Version 1.

0
Produced in July 2002

Compact image sensor camera

IV-S30J
User’s Manual (Function and Operation)
Thank you for purchasing the SHARP IV-S30J compact image sensor camera. Read this introductory user's
manual carefully to thoroughly familiarize yourself with the functions and proper procedures for operation.
Store this user's manual in a safe place. We are confident that the manual will be helpful whenever you
encounter a problem.
In addition to this manual, there are two other IV-S30J manuals as follows. Read them in conjunction with this
manual.

IV-S30J User’s Manual (Introduction and Hardware)

User’s Manual (Function and Operation: This manual)
Instruction Manual

Manual type Major subjects How to use

- Outline of the IV-S30J (features and
- Become acquainted with the IV-S30J
functions)
IV-S30J - Learn how to install the IV-S30J and
- Description of the hardware
User's Manual wire it up
- Startup method
(Introduction and Hardware) - When mastering the outline of
- General performance specifications.
operation.
- Example of operation and instruction
- Detailed explanations of all the
measurement functions. - Learn how to specify measurement
- How to make menu selections for /inspection conditions, good or NG
IV-S30J
each measurement judgment conditions, etc.
User's manual
- Details of inputting and outputting - Lear how to connect a programmable
(Function and Operation)
data and communications with other controller or personal computer.
devices. - Learn what to do if a problem occurs.
- Troubleshooting

Notes

- This manual was written with the utmost care. However, if you have any questions or
inquiries concerning the product, please feel free to contact our dealers or service agents.
- Copying all or part of this booklet is prohibited.
- The contents of this manual may be revised or modified for improvement without prior
notice.
Chapter 1: Setting and Operating Outline
Chapter 2: Setting the Operating and System Conditions
Chapter 3: Setting Measurement Conditions
Chapter 4: Positional Deviation Measurement
Chapter 5: Degree of Match Inspection
Chapter 6: Lead Inspection
Chapter 7: Area Measurement by Binary Conversion
Chapter 8: Object Counting by Binary Conversion
Chapter 9: Object Identification by Binary Conversion
Chapter 10: Existence Inspection by Point Measurement
Chapter 11: Multiple Positional Measurement
Chapter 12: Multiple Degree of Match Inspection
Chapter 13: Distance and Angle Measurement
Chapter 14: Numerical Calculations
Chapter 15: PC Function
Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions
Chapter 17: Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)
Chapter 18: Computer Link
Chapter 19: Troubleshooting
Alphabetical Index
 Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Setting and Operating Outline ...................................................... 1-1 to 23
1-1 Setting and operating procedures ................................................................................................ 1-1
1-2 Method for selecting the menu configuration ............................................................................... 1-2
[1] Menu configuration .................................................................................................................... 1-4
[2] Configuration of the setting conditions ....................................................................................... 1-5
[3] Configuration of Set Wizard ....................................................................................................... 1-6
1-3 Description of the Operation screen .......................................................................................... 1-10
1-4 Setting the measurement programs .......................................................................................... 1-13
1-5 Common operations for each menu .......................................................................................... 1-14
[1] Operations to return to the operation screen ........................................................................... 1-14
[2] Saving data .............................................................................................................................. 1-14
1-6 Power ON setting menu ............................................................................................................. 1-15
[1] Operations menu lock .............................................................................................................. 1-15
[2] Change the Japanese or English display mode ....................................................................... 1-15
1-7 Remote keypad (IV-S30RK1) .................................................................................................... 1-16
1-8 Operation flow ............................................................................................................................ 1-17
[1] Power ON and main loop processing ...................................................................................... 1-17
[2] Operation flow after the measurement start input is turned ON. .............................................. 1-19
1-9 Table of controller functions ..................................................................................................... 1-22

Chapter 2: Setting the Operating and System Conditions ............................ 2-1 to 17

2-1 Setting the operating conditions .................................................................................................. 2-1
[1] Monitor output ............................................................................................................................ 2-2
[2] Image capture ............................................................................................................................ 2-4
[3] Message display ........................................................................................................................ 2-5
[4] Pattern display ........................................................................................................................... 2-6
[5] Binary image display .................................................................................................................. 2-7
[6] q angle correction image display ............................................................................................... 2-8
[7] Operation main display .............................................................................................................. 2-9
[8] Evaluation change display ....................................................................................................... 2-10
[9] PC monitor screen ................................................................................................................... 2-11
[10] Through display ...................................................................................................................... 2-11
[11] Extension functions ................................................................................................................ 2-12
2-2 Setting the system conditions .................................................................................................... 2-14
[1] Manually setting the object type ............................................................................................... 2-14
[2] Gain/offset adjustment ............................................................................................................. 2-15
2-3 Editing Operation screen ........................................................................................................... 2-16
2-4 Option ........................................................................................................................................ 2-17

Chapter 3 : Setting Measurement Conditions ................................................ 3-1 to 39

3-1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-2 Shared settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-4
[1] Window shape selection and settings ........................................................................................ 3-4
[2] Image settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-9
[3] Evaluation conditions ............................................................................................................... 3-17
[4] Image pre-processing .............................................................................................................. 3-19
[5] Image adjustment .................................................................................................................... 3-24
 [6] Binary image mask .................................................................................................................. 3-25
[7] Position correction ................................................................................................................... 3-30
[8] Title registration ........................................................................................................................ 3-33
3-3 Input & Output / System settings ............................................................................................... 3-34
[1] Illuminance (light level) monitor ............................................................................................... 3-34
[2] Setting the shutter speed ......................................................................................................... 3-36
[3] Copying .................................................................................................................................... 3-37
[4] Halt on NG measurement ........................................................................................................ 3-38
[5] Window group move ................................................................................................................ 3-39

Chapter 4: Positional Deviation Measurement ............................................... 4-1 to 13

4-1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-2 Setting operation .......................................................................................................................... 4-2
[1] Set the register conditions for a gray search ............................................................................. 4-4
[2] Setting the register conditions for edge detection ...................................................................... 4-7

Chapter 5: Degree of Match Inspection ............................................................ 5-1 to 9

5-1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-2 Setting operation .......................................................................................................................... 5-2

Chapter 6: Lead Inspection ................................................................................ 6-1 to 8

6-1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-2 Setting operation .......................................................................................................................... 6-2

Chapter 7: Area Measurement by Binary Conversion ..................................... 7-1 to 9

7-1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-2 Setting operation .......................................................................................................................... 7-2

Chapter 8: Object Counting by Binary Conversion ......................................... 8-1 to 8

8-1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8-2 Setting operation .......................................................................................................................... 8-2

Chapter 9: Object Identification by Binary Conversion ................................... 9-1 to 9

9-1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9-2 Setting operation .......................................................................................................................... 9-2

Chapter 10: Existence Inspection by Point Measurement ............................ 10-1 to 9

10-1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10-2 Setting operation ...................................................................................................................... 10-2

Chapter 11: Multiple Positional Measurements ........................................... 11-1 to 11

11-1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................11-1
11-2 Setting operation .......................................................................................................................11-2
[1] Set the register conditions for a gray search ............................................................................ 11-5
[2] Setting the register conditions for edge detection ..................................................................... 11-7

Chapter 12: Multiple Degree of Match Inspection .......................................... 12-1 to 8

12-1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12-2 Setting operation ...................................................................................................................... 12-2
Chapter 13: Distance and Angle Measurement .............................................. 13-1 to 8
13-1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13-2 Setting operation ...................................................................................................................... 13-2

Chapter 14: Numerical Calculations .............................................................. 14-1 to 15

14-1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14-2 The individual numerical calculations for each measuring program ........................................ 14-1
14-3 Final numerical calculations ..................................................................................................... 14-9
14-4 Setting examples .................................................................................................................... 14-11

Chapter 15: PC Function ................................................................................ 15-1 to 18

15-1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15-2 Operation cycle ........................................................................................................................ 15-1
[1] Power ON sequence ................................................................................................................ 15-2
[2] PC scan cycle .......................................................................................................................... 15-2
[3] Measurement processing cycle ............................................................................................... 15-2
15-3 Ladder circuit program creation .............................................................................................. 15-3
[1] Procedure for creating measurement output condition and a ladder circuit ............................. 15-3
[2] A list of the "OUTPUT COND" screen displays ........................................................................ 15-9
[3] Procedure for creating the final output conditions in a ladder circuit ...................................... 15-11
15-4 Program examples (shape and positional deviation inspection) ........................................... 15-16
15-5 Examples of a final output conditions ladder circuit .............................................................. 15-17
15-6 PC monitor screen ................................................................................................................ 15-18

Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions ........................................ 16-1 to 32

16-1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16-2 Measurement start input and result output settings ................................................................. 16-5
16-3 CCD trigger ............................................................................................................................ 16-18
[1] Outline .................................................................................................................................... 16-18
[2] Setting procedure ................................................................................................................... 16-18
16-4 Setting for serial communications .......................................................................................... 16-21
16-5 Computer link ......................................................................................................................... 16-22
16-6 Output block assignment (Computer link output and general purpose serial output) ............ 16-23
[1] Data in specified blocks ......................................................................................................... 16-23
[2] Setting (operating) procedure ................................................................................................ 16-24
16-7 Setting the data output ........................................................................................................... 16-26
[1] Select "ANY" for the serial output .......................................................................................... 16-26
[2] Select "YES" or "NO" for output data ..................................................................................... 16-27
16-8 Calibrating the IV-S30J .......................................................................................................... 16-28

Chapter 17: Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface) ............... 17-1 to 17

17-1 List of processing functions ..................................................................................................... 17-1
17-2 Data flow .................................................................................................................................. 17-3
[1] Measurement execution 1: Command codes 10, 11, or 12 ..................................................... 17-3
[2] Measurement execution 2: Response processing for command 11 ........................................ 17-3
[3] Measurement execution 3: Command 14 ................................................................................ 17-4
[4] Processing other than measurement execution processing .................................................... 17-4
17-3 Communication format ............................................................................................................. 17-5
17-4 Processing functions ................................................................................................................ 17-7
 [1] Measurement execution functions ........................................................................................... 17-7
[2] Result reading .......................................................................................................................... 17-9
[3] Setting, initialization, and diagnosis of the operation screen ................................................. 17-12
[4] Setting numerical data of the any output measuring .............................................................. 17-16

Chapter 18: Computer Link ............................................................................ 18-1 to 34

18-1 Compatible models .................................................................................................................. 18-1
18-2 Data flow .................................................................................................................................. 18-2
18-3 Register setting ........................................................................................................................ 18-3
18-4 Measurement data blocks ........................................................................................................ 18-5
[1] Number of blocks ..................................................................................................................... 18-5
[2] Contents of the measurement result block (for each measurement function) ......................... 18-6
18-5 Specifications for any output data ............................................................................................ 18-6
18-6 Interface ................................................................................................................................. 18-19
[1] Setting items for the IV-S30J ................................................................................................. 18-19
[2] Connection with a Sharp PC .................................................................................................. 18-20
[3] Connection with a Mitsubishi PC ........................................................................................... 18-26
[4] Connection with an OMRON PC ............................................................................................ 18-29
18-7 Program examples ................................................................................................................. 18-31

Chapter 19: Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 19-1 to 6

[1] Symptoms and checks ............................................................................................................. 19-1
[2] Causes of termination codes (when an error occurs) and remedies ....................................... 19-3
[3] Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 19-6

Alphabetical Index ............................................................................................... I-1 to 7

 Setting and Operating Outline

Chapter 1: Setting and Operating Outline 1

1-1 Setting and operating procedures
This paragraph describes the rough operation sequence of the IV-S30J.
1 System design (Ref. chapter)
Plan your hardware environment to suit your use of the IV-S30J. User’s manual
(Introduction and Hardware)
- Measurement program (positional deviation 1-3 Measurement programs
measurement, degree of match inspection, etc.)
- Number of cameras, externally connected devices, 3-1 Basic system configuration
system components
- Input/output (start measurement input, result 3-2 System configuration examples
output, object type change, etc.)
- Lighting equipment, illumination, shutter speed, lens, etc. 5-1 Installation conditions

2 Installation/assembly
Install the hardware you will be using.
- Connection of cameras and monitor to the controller
- Installation of the controller and camera body User’s manual
- Connection of a power supply, input/output terminals (Introduction and Hardware)
and external devices 5-2 to 5-4 Installing, connecting,
and wiring methods
3 Turning ON the power supply (controller and monitor)
Supply power to each device.

4 Environment settings
Set IV-S30J parameters according to the actual hardware environment.
- Setting the Input/Output conditions Chapter 16
- Communication Chapter 17
- Computer link Chapter 18
- Gain/offset adjustment Page 2-15

5 Enter measuring programs

User’s Manual
(Introduction and Hardware)
Entered using the Entered using the Chapter 7: Setting Examples
Using the Set Wizard
wizard menu tree Chapter 8: Setting Examples
Using the Menu Tree
6-4 Operation chart
User’s Manual
6 Editing Operation screen (Introduction and Hardware)
6-7 Editing operation screen

7 Other settings
User’s Manual
Initialization Self Diagnosis (Introduction and Hardware)
6-8 Option
8 Operation

9 Test/inspection Chapter 19: Troubleshooting

0 Maintenance Chapter 19: Troubleshooting

1-1
 Setting and Operating Outline

1-2 Method for selecting the menu configuration

1 (1) Set wizard
The IV-S30J has a "Set Wizard" function to assist beginners in setting the measurement conditions.

Select "SET WIZARD" from the "MAIN MENU" and the wizard will show the items IVS30J
needed for each step. You only need to make selections according the instructions SYS-CND
on the screen. Using the wizard, you can establish the minimum required settings OBJECT TYPE COND
SET WIZARD
for making measurements.
EDIT MAIN OPS MENU
OPTION

STEP1 STEP2 STEP9

SELECT THE MEASUREMENT SELECT AN IMAGE CAPTURING STORE THIS SETTING AS A
START INPUT I/F METHOD DURING OPERATION SAMPLE IN THE WIZARD?
・・・

1PARALLEL+SERIAL ■ 1PARTIAL-IMG ■ 1NO □

2TRIG CCD START □ 2ALL IMAGE □ 2YES ■
3NO CAPTURED □
NEXT DETAIL RETURN END
ENTER A SHUTTER SPEED
(1/30∼1/10000)
1SHUTTER SPEED 1/00060

RETURN NEXT

The steps that the set wizard takes you through are displayed TYPE00
as lists on the "operation chart." At any point you can return to Start
the previous step to make a change if you want to. STEP1:PARALLEL+SERIAL
STEP2:CAPTURE IMG/PARTIAL-IMG
STEP3:MEAS1/CAM1
STEP4:MEAS1/BIN-AREA
STEP5:MEAS1/WINDOW/MASK,1
STEP6:MEAS1/MEAS CND
STEP7:MEAS1/EVALUATION
STEP8:MEAS1/CALC
STEP9:MEAS1/OUT
STEP10:FINAL NUMERIC CALC
STEP11:FINAL OUTPUT COND
STEP12:SERIAL OUTPUT/ANY
STEP13:OPS MENU COND
STEP14:CALIBRATION/YES
STEP15:MOVE ALL WINDOW/YES
STEP16:TITLE/YES
End

Wizard
The "Wizard" is a program that helps users make settings for measurement operations easily and
without making mistakes. The controller asks you a series of questions at each step and you
simply answer these to complete the settings.
The wizard is convenient for making settings when beginners and inexperienced operators are
operating the machine. However, operators who are familiar with the operation may save a lot of
time by using other setting methods.

1-2
 Setting and Operating Outline

(2) Menu tree

The IV-S30J has a menu tree which is shown the hierarchy of choices on OBJECT TYPE COND
TYPE00
1
each screen. To return to the previous screen or go to next screen, select TYPE01
the corresponding item on the menu tree. TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0 (POSI-DEVIATION)
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS01(MEAS-BIN-AREA)
MEAS(NEW)
MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

How to enter the menu tree

On the "MAIN MENU" select "OBJECT TYPE COND" to enter the menu IVS30J
tree. SYS-CND
and mean that a sub men is available inside the menu. OBJECT TYPE COND
Select and press the SET key or the right arrow key, the next level of SET WIZARD
menu will be opened. EDIT MAIN OPS MENU
OPTION
When is shown, it means that the lower menu level is already open.
OBJECT TYPE COND
TYPE00
TYPE01
TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
Sub menu is MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
displayed MEAS0 (POSI-DEVIATION)
POSI-CORRECT
Have sub menus
MEAS01(MEAS-BN-AREA)
not yet displayed
MEAS(NEW)
MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

1-3
 Setting and Operating Outline

[1] Menu configuration

1 SYS-CND I/O CONDITIONS
OBJECT TYPE COND COMM.SET
SET WIZARD COMPUTER LINK
EDIT MAIN OPS MENU GAIN.OFFSET
OPTION

TYPE00 TYPE RUN COND

IMAGE-ADJ (*1)
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) MEAS0 (POSI-DEVIATION)
MEA-CND(CAMERA2) POSI-CORRECT
FINAL NUM.CALC MEAS01
FINAL OUTPUT COND MEAS02

（  ）
(Max. 16 object types)
OBJ-TYPE I/O MEAS03 *2
OBJ-TYPE SYS. MEAS04

IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND REG-COND (S)
REG-COND (E)
EVALUATION COND
DISTANCE & ANGLE COND NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
NUM-CALC
TYPE15
OUT-COND
1CHG-TYPE
2STANDARD WIZARD
3OPERATION CHART

MAIN OPS MENU

1INITIALIZATION
2SELF DIAGNOSIS

*1: MEAS0 is only for making for "positional deviation measurements."

*2: MEAS01 to 04 can be set to make any type of measurement from "positional deviation
measurements" to "multiple degree of match inspections."

1-4
 Setting and Operating Outline

[2] Configuration of the setting conditions

1

- I/O conditions (16-1)

Measurement start input I/F, parallel input X5, parallel input X6, strobe output
- Object type manual change (2-14)
- Communication setting (17-1)
Communication standard, communication speed, data length, parity, stop bit,
station number
- Computer link (18-1)
Manufacturer, station number, top line of the written results
System - Gain/offset (2-15)
conditions

The numbers in parentheses ( ) are page numbers for your reference.

Output monitor (2-2), image capture (2-4), message display (2-5), pattern
Operating display (2-6), binary image display (2-7), θ angle correction image display (2-
conditions 8), operation main display (2-9), evaluation change display (2-10), PC monitor
screen (2-11), through display (2-11), extension functions (2-12).

Image pre- Positional deviation

processing (3-20) - See Chapter 4
measurement
Measurement 0, Positional deviation measurement, degree
camera 1 of match inspection, lead inspection, area
Measuring program

Measurement 0, measurement by binary conversion, object See

camera 2 counting by binary conversion, object - Chapters
identification by binary conversion, point 4 to 12.
Camera Measurement 1
measurement, multiple positions
1 and 2 measurement, multiple degree of match
Object Measurement 2
type 00 inspection.
Measurement 3
Measurement 4 CCD trigger (16-18), shutter speed (3-36), serial
Measuring output (16-24, 26), calibration setting (16-28).
conditions Input and output for
each object type Monitor light level (3-34), stop NG measurement (3-
38), window group move (3-39)
System for
each object

Same for Camera 1 and 2. However,

Camera 1 "Measurement 0, Camera 2" is not
available.
Object
type 01
・
・ Same for "Measurement 00."
Object
type 15

1-5
 Setting and Operating Outline

[3] Configuration of Set Wizard

1 The Set Wizard has the following screen configuration.
SET WIZARD SCREEN SAVE DEL F C1 BRT
[SAMPLE]
1CHG-TYPE
2STANDARD WIZARD TYPE00
3OPERATION CHART Start
End

STEP1
SELECT THE MEASUREMENT
START INPUT I/F
1PARALLEL+SERIAL+USB ■
2TRIG CCD START □

NEXT DETAIL COMM.SET  SCREEN COND SAVE

When "DETAIL" is selected. 1COMM.STANDARD RS232C
2BAUDRATE (kdps) 115.2
3NO.OF DATA BITS 7BIT
STEP2 4PARITY CHECK EVEN
5NO.O STOP BITS 2BIT
SELECT AN IMAGE CAPTURING 6STATION NO. 00(0~7F)
METHOD DURING OPERATION
1PARTIAL-IMG ■
2ALL IMAGE □
3NO CAPTURED □

ENTER ASHUTTER SPEED

(1/30~1/10000)
1SHUTTER SPEED 1/00060

RETURN NEXT

STEP3
CORRECT POSITION?
1NO ■
2CAM1 □
3CAM2 □

RETURN NEXT

STEP3
SELECT A CAMERA TO SPECIFY
MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS
1NO REGISTRATION ■ When "2CAM1" or "3CAM2" is selected.
2CAM1 ■
3CAM2 □

STEP4
RETURN NEXT
SELECT AN IMAGE PROCESSING
METHOD
When "1NO REGISTRATION" 1GRAY-SRC PROCESS ■
is selected. 2BINARY PROCESS □

1MEAS POSI-DEVIAT ■
2MEAS MULTI-POSI □
3DETECT DEG-MAGCH LE □
4MEAS MALTI-MATCHES □
5INSPECT LEADS □
6MEASURE POINT DENSI □

RETURN NEXT

1-6
 Setting and Operating Outline

1
STEP4
SELECT TYPE OF CALCUATION
BETWEEN IMAGES
1COMPARE IMGS NO

SELECT WHETHER OR NOT TO

CONVERT IMGE DENSITY
1CHNG GRAY LEVELNO

SELECT FILTER TYPE FOR

IMAGE DATA
1SPACE FILTER NO
COMPARE IMGS SCREEN SAVE
RETERN NEXT DETAIL
1CALC.TYPE NO
2CALC.AREA SET (232,216)-(279,263)
1Displayed when the "CAM1" or "CAM1&2" is selected in item "1COMPARE IMGS"
STEP5
1REGISTER NO.(0~7) 0

SELECT AN IMAGE PROCESSING

1NO □
2GRAY-SRC ■
3EDGE DTECT □
4SCH-EDGE □

1NUM.OF DTECT 1P

ENTER A RANGE AND UNITS FOR

ROTATION ANGLE DETECTION
1DTECT ANGL NO

RETURN NEXT DETAIL REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL

1REGISTER NO. 0(0~7)
2MEAS SHAPE(MDL0) RECTANGLE
3REFIMG AARE(MDL0) SET (224,208)~(287,271)
STEP6 4SEARCH ARE(MDL0) SET (216,200)~(295,279)
SELECT INSPECTION PRECISION
1STANDARD(PIXEL) ■
2HIGH(SUB-PIXAEL) □

RETURN NEXT

STEP7
COMPARE EVALUATION
CONDITIONS TO MEASUREMENT
RESULTS (YES/NO)
1NO □
2YES ■

RETURN NEXT DETAIL EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT

1REGISTER NO. 0(0~7) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]

2CONDITION SET AUTO(–10%)
3X COORD. (MDL0) 000.0~511.0 X0= NO
4Y COORD. (MDL0) 000.0~479.0 Y0= NO
5x DEVIATE (MDL0) -511.0~+511.0 x0= NO
6y DEVIATE (MDL0) -479.0~+479.0 y0= NO
7MATCH LVL(MDL0) -10000~+10000 M0= NO

8TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

1-7
 Setting and Operating Outline

STEP8
USE SETTING DISTANCE
ANGLE CONDITIONS (YES/NO)
1NO ■
2YES □

RETURN NEXT DETAIL DEST&AGL COND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

1OBJ DST
Displayed when "2YES" 2DISTANCE 00(0~15)
is selected 3DISTANCE NO

[TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]

STEP8
COMPARE MEASUREMENT
SETTINGS TO MEASUREMENT
RESULTS (YES/NO)
1NO ■ REGISTER NO. 00 01 02 0304 05 06 07 0809 10 1112 13 14 15
2YES(MEAS) □ DISTANCE ××××××××××××××××
DETAIL
3YES(DST&AGL) F C1 BRT
NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE
DETAIL 【N00-N07】
RETURN NEXT CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY)
Displayed when "2YES" or OBJECFORMULA
"3YES" is selected NO0

STEP8 NO1
LADDER CIRCUIT AND RESULT
OUTPUT BASED ON MESUREMENT NO2
AND CALCULATION RESULTS(
YES/NO) NO3
1NO ■
2YES(MEAS) DETAIL □

3YES(DST&AGL) OUTPUT COND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

DETAIL INPUT00-07
RETURN NEXT CHANGE INPUT

Displayed when "2YES" or 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT

"3YES" is selected INPUT00
LOGIC
STEP8 INPUT02
ADD MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS? LOGIC
1NO ■ INPUT03
2YES □

RETURN NEXT

STEP8
CALCULATE SETTINGS FOR ALL
MEASUREMENT RESULTS(YES/NO).
1NO ■
2YES □

RETURN NEXT

1-8
 Setting and Operating Outline

STEP8
SET LADDER CIRCUIT RESULT
OUTPUT BASED ON ALL
MEASUREMENT AND CALCULATION
RESULTS (YES/NO)
1NO ■
2YES □

RETURN NEXT DETAIL OUTPUT COND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07
CHANGE INPUT
Displayed when "2YES"
or "3YES" is selected. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT
INPUT00
STEP8 LOGIC
INPUT01
SELECT AN INTERFACE FOR
LOGIC
OUTPUTTING RESULTS WHEN THE
INPUT02
INPUT IS THE PARALLEL I/F
LOGIC
1NO ■
INPUT03
2COMPUTER LINK □
3SERIAL I/F □
Displayed when "2COMPUTER LINK" is selected
RETURN NEXT DETAIL COMPUTER LINK SCREEN COND SAVE
1PC MANUFACTURER SHARP(COMM PORT)
Displayed when 2STATION NO. 01
"2COMPUTER LINK" or 3WRITE TOP ADRS 09000
"3SERIAL I/F" is
selected.
Displayed when "3SERIAL I/F" is selected

COMM.SET SCREEN COND SAVE

1COMM.STANDARD RS232C
2BAUDRATE(kdps) 115.2
STEP9 3NO.OF DATA BITS 7BIT
CHANGE DISPLY CONTENTS OF 4PARITY CHECK EVEN
THE MAIN OPS MENU 5NO.OF STOP BITS 2BIT
1NO ■ 6STATION NO. 00(0~7F)
2YES □

RETURN NEXT DETAIL TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE

1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
Displayed when "2YES" is 2CAPTURE IMG PARIAL-IMG
selected. 3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
STEP9
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
STORE A TITLE FOR THIS 9PC-MNTR NO
SETTING? 0THROUCH DISPLAY NO
1NO □ qEXTENSION FUNC. NO
2YES ■

RETURN NEXT DETAIL STR OBJ TITLE SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

Displayed when "2YES" is

selected.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
AREA＿ 0123456789
STEP9
- - ( ) < > SP
STORE THIS SETTING AS A
SAMPLE IN THE WIZARD? ← → DEL END
1NO □
2YES ■

RETURN END

1-9
 Setting and Operating Outline

1-3 Description of the Operation screen

1 When the IV-S30J is started, the operation screen shown below will appear.
Each area of the operation screen is described below.

1 Object type number 2 Freeze/through screen

3 Camera currently selected

（TYPE00） F C1 BRT 4 Image brightness: bright/dark

6 Measuring time V*.**

MEAS 0000ms 
MEASURE 0 CAM1 NO
5 Software version
7 Measurement
setting details

9 READY output
8 I/O relay

X0~6□□□□□□□□  Y0~7□□□□□□□□  READY■
0 Menu display
MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHGN-REG SCREEN-CHG CHGTYPE

Displays the number of the currently selected object.

Select whether to display captured images on the screen as freeze images or through images.
Display
Description
method
Through - Displays the stream of images captured by the camera.
image - Used for adjusting the camera focus and image properties.
Freeze - Displays the single image captured at the start of making measurements.
image - Used to set each of the measurement conditions and operating conditions.
To switch the image between "Through" and "Freeze" modes, press the SEL key on the remote
keypad, and then press the up and down arrow keys.

Indicates which camera is currently selected

C1: Camera 1 (the camera connected to the "CAMERA1" connector)
C2: Camera 2 (the camera connected to the "CAMERA2" connector)

The brightness of the captured image can be set to one of two levels.
Screen
Description
display
Bright Display the captured image without changing its brightness.
Dark Display the captured image at 1/2 the actual brightness
How to select the brightness level
On any screen, except the operation screen, move the cursor to the "F" (freeze) or "T" (through)
position on the upper part of the screen by pressing the SEL key. Then, press the left or right arrow key
to move the cursor to the "BRT" (bright) or "DRK" (dark) indicator. Press the up or down arrow key to
switch between bright and dark.

1-10
 Setting and Operating Outline

Displays the software version.

Displays the measurement time currently assigned.

1
Actual measurement time
(Only when changing the object type)

Time to change CCD exposure time CCD image Image Result output
object type (Shutter operation time) capture time processing time time

- Serial communication time is not included.

- Set the controller as follows to reduce the measurement time.
1. Increase the shutter speed.
2. Select the "partial" image capture feature for the CCD.
3. Select "NO" for the measurement results display (message display, pattern display, and binary
image display).

Display setting details of each measurement.

MEASURE 0 CAM1 NO
↑ ↑ ↑
Measurement Camera 1 or Measurement
numbers from 0 to 4 camera 2 program name

Displays the status of input relays X0 to X6: OFF [ ], ON [ ].

Displays the status of output relays Y0 to Y7: OFF [ ], ON [ ].

Displays the status of the ready output: OFF [ ], ON [ ].

The menu bar at the bottom has two rows. When this menu is selected, the second row will appear.

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

MNU-CHG CHG-C1 CHG-C2 MANL-MEAS SHORTCUT

The details of each item on this menu bar are shown on the next page.

1-11
 Setting and Operating Outline

Details of each item on the menu bar

1 Item on the menu bar Description Display detail on the screen
IVS30J
SYS-CND
MAIN-COND OBJECT TYPE COND
Displays the MAIN screen.
(main conditions) SET WIZARD
EDIT MAIN OPS MENU
OPTION

Press the up and down arrow keys to change the display of

the evaluation results for each measurement number. MEASURE0 CAM1 NO
CHG-MEA
(Measurement 0 camera 1 -> measurement 0 camera 2 -> This part changes.
(Change measurement)
Measurement 1 -> Measurement 2 -> Measurement 3 ->
Measurement 4)
Displays the condition change selection list. Change the
conditions that get displayed by pressing the up and down
arrow keys.
COND-CHG For details about the measurement conditions, see pages 8-3 MEA-CND
DST&ANG COND...
(Change the and 8-8 in Introduction and Hardware and Chapter 3 in this
NUMERIC CALC
measurement manual.
conditions) For details about the distance and angle conditions, see page COND-CHG CHNG-REG
14-2 in this manual.
For details about the numeric value calculation conditions, see
page 15-7 in this manual.

A0= A08=
CHNG-REG Change the display of the set of stored details between [A00]
(change registration) - [A07] and [A08] - [A15] using the up and down arrow keys
to to
A072 A072
Displays the screen change selection list. Select a screen
using the up and down arrow keys. OPS-MAIN
SCREEN-CHG Note: The OPS-MAIN, JDG-COND-CHG,and PC-MNTR do PC-MNTR
(change screen) not appear on the popup menu unless "YES" is selected.
for each corresponding item on "TYPE RUN COND" SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE
menu. Only the currently available screens are listed.
Displays the object type selection list.
CHG-TYPE (TYPE00)
Select an object type by pressing the up and down keys.
(change the object
This is enabled when Manual Object Type Change is set to This part changes.
type)
"YES."
Moves the image from Camera 1 up and down the screen
CHG-C1 using the up and down arrow keys.
(change the Camera 1 Note: This is enabled when "CAM1&2" is selected in
image position) 1MONITOR OUTPUT on the TYPE RUN COND menu
(operating conditions).
Moves the image from Camera 2 up and down the screen
CHG-C2 using the up and down arrow keys.
(change the Camera 2 Note: This is enabled when "CAM1&2" is selected in
image position) 1MONITOR OUTPUT on the TYPE RUN COND menu
(operation conditions).
Manually move the two crosshair cursors, and measure MANL-MEAS
distance between these two points, as well as coordinate 1CURSOR1-COORD MOVE(224.208)
MANL-MEAS distance on X and Y axes. 2CURSOR2-COORD MOVE(287.271)
(Manual measurement) Note: Unless "MANL-MEAS" is selected on the DIST-BETW-2PT 089.0 ＋
DIST-BETW-X 063.0
"qEXTENSION FUNC" line in the TYPE RUN COND ＋
DIST-BETW-Y 063.0
(operation conditions), this screen cannot be displayed.

【PLACE】
1SHORTCUT1 NO
SHORTCUT Displays a short cut screen. 2SHORTCUT2 NO
3SHORTCUT3 NO

1-12
 Setting and Operating Outline

1-4 Setting the measurement programs

To execute a specific measurement program (positional deviation measurement, degree of match 1
inspection, etc.), select MEASUREMENT 0 to 4 on the "MEA-CND" line.
- MEASUREMENT 0 only allows you to measure positional deviation.
- For details about the settings for each measurement program, see Chapters 4 to 13.
- Specify the conditions for distance and angle measurement in the positional deviation measurement,
the degree of match inspection, object identification by binary conversion (MEAS GRAV CENTR:
YES), multiple position measurement, and for multiple degree of match inspection.

(1) Operation main screen (see page 1-10).

（TYPE00） F C1 BRT
V*.**

MEAS 0000ms 
MEASURE 0 CAM1 NO

X0~6□□□□□□□□  Y0~7□□□□□□□□  READY■
MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHGTYPE

Move the cursor to the "MAIN COND" item using

the left and right arrow keys and press the SET key.

(2) Select the "OBJECT TYPE COND" using the up MAIN MENU F C1 BRT
and down arrow keys and press the SET key. IVS30J
SYS-CND
OBJECT TYPE COND
SET WIZARD
EDIT MAIN OPS MENU
OPTION

(3) Move the cursor to the "TYPE(NEW)" item on the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
"OBJECT TYPE COND" line and press the SET OBJECT TYPE COND
key. TYPE00
TYPE(NEW)

(4) Move the cursor to "TYPE00" on the "SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND" line and press the SET key.
To select "TYPE01" and others, move the cursor to "TYPE(NEW)" and press the SET key.

(5) Select "MEAS0 to 4" (MEAS0 is only used for positional deviation measurements) on the "MEAS
COND (CAM1)" line and a popup menu will appear. Select any desired measurement program from
this popup menu and then press the SET key.

1-13
 Setting and Operating Outline

1-5 Common operations for each menu

1 [1] Operations to return to the operation screen
You can return to the operation screen, MAIN MENU, or setting screen from any menu by a single
operation.

Menu display
[TYPE RUN COND] menu
SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

OPS-MENU Return to the operation screen

MAIN Return to the MAIN screen.
SELECT Return to the currently selected setting screen.
RETURN Return to the previously selected screen.

[2] Saving data

All of the data such as measurement and evaluation conditions entered on the "TYPE RUN COND,"
"MEA-CND," and "SYSTEM COND" menus, can be saved into the IV-S30J flash memory.

Operation procedure
[SYS-CND] menu
SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

DATA SAVE?(YES=[SET],NO=[ESC])

1. On each menu screen, move the cursor to "SAVE" using the up/down and left/right keys, and press
the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the lower part of the screen.

DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save the data?) (YES=[SET]/NO=[ESC])

2. Press the SET key.

- The IV-S30J will start saving the data and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.

SAVING
REFERENCE IMG ■■
SYSTEM I/O ■
OBJECT TYPE COND ■■■■■■■■■■■□□□□□

When the data has been saved in the IV-S30J flash memory, the display will change from "SAVING"
to "COMPLETE SAVE."

1-14
 Setting and Operating Outline

1-6 Power ON setting menu

[1] Operations menu lock 1
To prevent accidental changes to conditions you have set, the operation screen can be locked so that the
screen cannot be changed to setting screen. The operation can only be carried out on the [POWER ON
SETTING] menu.
Display procedure
Follow the procedure described below when turning ON the power to the controller (IV-S30J), and the
[POWER ON SETTING] menu will be displayed on the monitor.
1. Turn ON the power to the IV-S30J controller, while holding down the ESC key.
2. Keep pressing the ESC key down for approx. 9 sec., after turning ON the power and the menu will
be displayed.

［POWER ON SETTING］ SEL TRG/BRT

1 MAIN OPS MENU UNLOCK LOCK
2 DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH
3 OPERATION ESC
SET

1 MAIN OPS MENU Description

All of the operating conditions for the
UNLOCK
IV-S30J can be changed.
The MAIN OPS MENU is locked and
LOCK
no change can be made.
Operation procedure
1. On the [POWER ON SETTING] menu, move the cursor to item " MAIN OPS MENU" with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "UNLOCK" or "LOCK" with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to item " OPERATION" with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
Press the SET key once more.
The IV-S30J saves the settings in the flash memory and the screen will return to the operation
screen.

Display when the operation screen is locked

(TYPE00)AREA1 T.IMG C1 L
LOCK FULL VX.X
OK
MEAS XXXXms
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION "LOCK" will be displayed
on the MAIN OPS MENU
[2] Change the Japanese or English display mode
Change display between Japanese and English. Use the [POWER ON SETTING] menu for the selection.

Display procedure
Follow the procedure described below when turning ON the power to the controller (IV-S30J), and the
[POWER ON SETTING] menu will be displayed on the monitor.
1. Turn ON the power to the controller, while holding down the ESC key.
2. Keep pressing the ESC key down for approx. 9 sec., and the following menu will be displayed.
[POWER ON SETTING] SEL TRG/BRT
1MAIN OPS MENU UNLOCK LOCK
2DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH 4
3 3OPERATION ESC SET
5
Operating procedure
3. Move the cursor to item " DISPLAY MODE" (display mode) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to "JAPANESE" or "ENGLISH" with the left and right keys.
5. Move the cursor to " OPERATION" using up and down keys and press the SET key. Then, again
press the SET key.
The screen will change to operation screen.

1-15
 Setting and Operating Outline

1-7 Remote keypad (IV-S30RK1)

1

4 SEL key
1 Direction keys
(up, down, left and right)
5 TRG/BRT key

2 SET key

3 ESC key

Key name Function Description

Selecting an item on a Select an item with the up, down, left and right
menu screen keys.
Setting a window Set each coordinate.
Direction keys*
1 (up, down, left - Select a digit or an item with the left and right
keys, and then specify a value with the up and
and right)
Setting a value down keys.
- Specify a value with the up, down, right and
left keys.
To enter nested menus
Determine a highlighted
item
2 SET key
Determine the setting
value
Returning a setting to its On the REG-COND screen,
original state before be- - Press the left arrow key + ESC key to change
3 ESC key ing changed between a display of all items and just one
Returning to the previous item at a time.
menu
- When the screen is changed from "Through"
Use to select the display to "Freeze," the IV-S30 will capture an image.
of object images: - Change the brightness of the image displayed
choose between "F" on the screen.
4 SEL key (Freeze) and "T" On the setting screen,
(Through) and between - Press the left arrow key and the SEL key to
"BRT" (bright) and change between Through and Freeze.
"DRK" (dark). - Press the right arrow key and the SEL key to
change between Bright and Dark.
Press this key on the run screen, and a new
Start measurement input
measurement is triggered.
Move the cursor to the
5 TRG/BRT key function menu at the
upper area.
Displays popup menu.

* The direction keys have an auto-repeat function.

1-16
 Setting and Operating Outline

1-8 Operation flow

[1] Power ON and main loop processing 1

(Power ON)

Wait to complete the power ON process

Initializing (CPU, gate array)

Memory check

Transmitting from flash memory to RAM - System program

- Conditions other than
the conditions specified
Data setting for each object type
- CPU, variables
- Gate array

NG Processing after the

Checksum checking
power is turned ON
OK
Display check sum results

No
Settings for all types completed

Yes
Transmitting from flash memory to RAM Measurement conditions for
each object type
Obtaining images, capturing
specific lines of an image

ON
ESC key

OFF Place the operation screen

in the locked state

To the next page

1-17
 Setting and Operating Outline

1 From the preceding page

Message display Display results.

Pattern display When the option has been set to "YES"
Crosshair cursor display (System) Display "YES"

(Communication processing) No
Data received

Yes
Communication processing

Receive a measurement Parallel/general-purpose serial/CCD

start input signal trigger

OFF
Measurement start
Main loop
processing
ON

PC calculation PC calculation

Executing measurements

Measurement result output processing Parallel/general-purpose serial

No
Key input

Yes
Process key strokes
Processing on sub-menu
(Menu configuration See page
1-4.)

1-18
 Setting and Operating Outline

[2] Operation flow after the measurement start input is turned ON. 1
Start (measurement start input ON)

PC calculation
Parallel output (Y0 to Y15), "READY" OFF

External interface inhibit

(keys, communications, parallel)

Measurement timer start

Reading the object type No. Capture the scan line range that was
Image capturing (camera 1/2) specified when setting the
measurement conditions.
No
*1 *1 The measurement start input is
set to "PARALLEL" and the
Yes ’READY’ ON signal to "end of
READY ON image capture."

No Is the light level

monitor selected?

Yes
Execute the light level
monitor function

Executing measurement 0 using

camera 1

Yes [Measurement program that is

Was an error detected? selected]
- Positional deviation measurement
No
Executing measurement 0 using
camera 2

Yes
Was an error detected?

No
2 (To the next page) 1 (To the next page)

1-19
 Setting and Operating Outline

1 2 (From the preceding page) 1 (From the preceding page)

No
Positional correction

Yes
[Measurement programs that can be
Setting the coordinate correction
(*2) selected]
values (X, Y, θ)
- Positional deviation measurement
- Degree of match inspection
Executing measurement 1 - Lead inspection
- Area measurement by binary
conversion
Yes
Was an error detected? - Counting by binary conversion
- Object identification by binary
No conversion
Executing measurement 2 - Point measurement
- Multiple position measurement
- Multiple degree of match inspection
Yes
Was an error detected?

No The window coordinates are

corrected within the range set for
Executing measurement 3
each type of measurement,
based on the correction value
Yes determined in the steps marked with
Was an error detected?
*2.
No
Executing measurement 4

Yes
Was an error detected?
No

No PC calculation
Message display

Yes No
Message display
Error display
Yes
Displaying the measurement results
(values, decisions etc.)

No
Pattern display

Yes
No
Positional correction yes

Yes
Display pattern after correction Display pattern when setting

To the next page

1-20
 Setting and Operating Outline

From the previous page

1
Determining the measuring time (timer stop)

Parallel output (Y0 to Y15) OFF

External interface enabled (communications)

No Computer link
Serial output

General purpose
General purpose serial output Computer link output

External interface enabled (key, parallel)

*3 Set the measurement
start input to any choiceNo
other than "parallel" or *3
set the ’READY’ ON
signal to "end Yes
measurement." READY ON

Waiting for a measurement start input signal or a key input

- When the halt NG measurement option is set to "YES" (page 3-38), the controller stops measuring
when an error occurs.

1-21
 Setting and Operating Outline

1-9 Table of controller functions

1 Shown below are the functions for the controller (IV-S30J).
- For details about the controller hardware (cameras, peripheral devices), see the "IV-S30J User's
Manual, Instruction and Hardware."
Specifications
Item
IV-S30J
Image sampling system 256 level gray scale, binary conversion, edge detection
One screen for displaying captured images. One monochrome screen for
Image memory
displaying camera information and messages
No. of assignable object type 16 object types
Maximum number of reference
images stored / number of 200 / 2 screens
whole screens stored
Image scan time 33.3 ms
Gray search time * 15 ms
Gray search, edge detection
Pixel, sub-pixel
precision
Shading correction Dividing, subtracting, and filtering
Image pre-processing

Subtracting, absolute value of difference (between camera 1 and reference

Comparative calculation
image, between camera 2 and reference image, between camera 1 and
between images
camera 2)
Magnification by "n" processing, γ(+/-) correction, histogram widening,
Gray level changes
mid-range emphasis
Smoothing (center/average), edge emphasis, edge extraction, horizontal
Space filter
edge, vertical edge
Binary threshold value Fixed and threshold value corrections (variation difference/variation rate)
Binary noise elimination Expansion - contraction, contraction - expansion, area filter
Binary image mask Specified window( rectangle, circle, oval), any binary image mask
Positional correction method X/Y correction, rotation correction
XY coordinate, deviation amount in X and Y axes, degree of match (1-point
search, 2-point search, 1-point edge, 2-point edge, 1-point search and 1-
Positional deviation point edge)
measurement Angle: ±15˚ ,±30˚ ,±45˚ , 360˚ (1-point search, 1-point search + 1-point
edge)
[Maximum 8 windows x 2 models]
Degree of match Degree of match, XY coordinate, density (1-point search, 2-point search)
inspection [Maximum 16 windows x 2 models]
Measurement program

Area measurement by
Area [Maximum 16 windows]
binary conversion
Object counting by Quantity (maximum 3,000 items per window), total area
binary conversion [Maximum 4 windows]
Quantity (maximum 128 per window), total area, area of each object
Object identification by
identified, gravity center, main axis angle, fillet diameter, peripheral length,
binary conversion
center point [Maximum 4 windows]
Number in binary image (maximum 256 points), average density (maximum
Point measurement
128 points)
Number of leads, distance between leads (max., min.), lead width (max.,
Lead inspection
min.), lead length (max., min.) [Maximum 16 windows]
Multiple position Number of objects (max. 128), degree of match, XY coordinate (1-point
inspection search, 1-point edge) [Maximum 4 windows]
Multiple degree of match Number of objects (max. 128), degree of match, XY coordinate, density (1-
inspection point search) [Maximum 4 windows]
* The gray search time is true when the search area is 256 x 256 pixels, the model size is 64 x 64
pixels, and the contraction function is set to 3.

1-22
 Setting and Operating Outline

Specifications
Item
IV-S30J 1
Maximum 6 per object type (measurement 0 - camera 1, measurement 0 -
Number of measurement
camera 2, measurements 1 to 4)
programs
Note: Measurement 0 is only used for positional deviation measurement.
Rectangle, circle, oval (when using area measurement by binary
conversion, object counting by binary conversion, object identification by
Window shape binary measurement), polygon window (maximum 32 sided polygons: When
binary area measurement, counting after binary conversion, or object
identification (labeling) after binary conversion is selected.)
Measure distance (between two points, X coordinate, Y coordinate),
Distance and angle measure angle (3 points, 2 points against horizontal line, 2 points against
measurement vertical line), auxiliary point (center, circle center, gravity center, line over 2
points, crossing point of two straight lines)
Four basic operations (+, -, X, /), root, absolute value, TAN, ATAN,
Arithmetic operation
maximum, minimum, average , total.
Display measuring time, light level monitor function, crosshair cursor
display, change display language between Japanese and English, Run
Other functions
screen lock function, setting menu display "yes/no", change image display
(through/freeze), change image brightness (bright/dark)
Input relays Parallel input: 7 points (X0 to X6)
Micro PC section

Parallel output: 8 points (Y0 to Y7)

Output relays
General-purpose serial interface, computer link: 16 points (Y0 to Y15)
Auxiliary relays 128 points (C0 to C127), special area 18 points (C110 to C127)
8 points (TM0 to TM7), timer setting range: 0.01 to 9.99 seconds
Timers
(countdown timer)
Counters 8 points (CN0 to CN7), counter setting range: 001 to 999 (counts down)
Input: 7 points, 12/24 VDC
Parallel interface
interface

Output: 9 points, 12/24 VDC

External

General-purpose
RS232C/RS422 (2.4 to 115.2 kbps)
serial interface
Computer link Built-in compatibility with certain SHARP, OMRON, and Mitsubishi models
Image output 1 channel, EIA 525 lines, 2:1 interlace
Number of cameras Maximum of 2
Using the IV-S30RK1 remote keypad and/or the IV-S30SP parameter
Make settings
setting support software
Measu- Internal trigger CCD trigger (using the CCD camera)
rement
start Trigger input (parallel I/F), general-purpose serial I/F, keypad trigger (for
External trigger
input manual measuring)
Interrupt processing
1 point: External trigger (X0)
input
Terminal block

4 points: Object type change (X1 to X4)

Inputs
2 points: External input (X5, X6)
Common for input 1 point: + common
Output 9 points: 1 READY , 8 user settable logical outputs (Y0 to Y7)
Common for output 1 point: + common
Power supply 2 points: +24 VDC, 0 V
Power voltage/consumption 24 VDC (±10 %) 7 W

1-23
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

Chapter 2: Setting the Operating and System Conditions

2-1 Setting the operating conditions
Set the following operating condition items on the [TYPE RUN COND] menu for each object type.
2
Item to set Reference page
Monitor output 2-2
Image capture 2-4
Message display 2-5
Pattern display 2-6
Binary image display 2-7
θ angle correction image display 2-8
Operation main display 2-9
Evaluation change display 2-10
PC monitor screen 2-11
Through display 2-11
Extension function 2-12

How to display the TYPE RUN COND screen

On the "MAIN MENU," select "OBJECT TYPE SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
COND", "TYPE 00", and "TYPE RUN COND" in this OBJECT TYPE COND
order. TYPE00 1MONITOR OUTPUT
TYPE RUN COND 2CAPTURE IMG
IMAGE-ADJ 3MESSAGE DISPLAY
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 4PATTERN DISPLAY
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2) 5SHOW BINARY IMG
FINAL NUM.CALC 6SHOW θFIX IMG
7OPS MAIN DESP
FINAL OUTPUT COND
8DESP CHG-EVAL
OBJ-TYPE I/O
9PC-MNTR
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
0THROUGH DISPLAY
TYPE(NEW) qEXTENSION FUNC.
wDISPLAY+CURSOR 1
eCLOSS CURSOR COORD
rDISPLAY+CURSOR 2
tCLOSS CURSOR COORD

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "TYPE RUN COND" screen will appear. TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1

2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
9PC-MNTR NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. NO

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2-1
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[1] Monitor output TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

When two cameras have been connected to IV-S30J,
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM1
you can switch back and forth between the image from 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG CAM2
the cameras on one monitor. Also, the monitor screen 3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC) CAM1&2
can be divided into two parts to display the two images 4PATTERN DISPLAY
2 simultaneously. 5SHOW BINARY IMG
YES
YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
- Purpose of the setting 7OPS MAIN DISP YES
To set the conditions in which an image captured 8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
9PC-MNTR NO
during measurement will be displayed on the 0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
operation screen. qEXTENSION FUNC. NO

- Output monitor switching

There are two methods for changing the monitor
output: change the TYPE RUN COND settings, use
external input signals through the parallel port to
make changes from outside.

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

(1) Change the monitor output by changing the TYPE RUN COND settings
Select the " MONITOR OUTPUT" item on the "TYPE RUN COND" screen and then select an item
from the popup menu.
1MONITOR OUTPUT Description
CAM1 Display the camera 1 image on the whole screen.
CAM2 Display the camera 2 image on the whole screen.
CAM1&2 Display the camera 1 image on upper half, and the camera 2 image
on lower half.

Display examples on the operation screen

- Camera 1 on the whole screen - Camera 2 on the whole screen.
(When "CAM1" has been specified in item (When "CAM2" has been specified in item
1MONITOR OUTPUT.) 1MONITOR OUTPUT.)
F C1 H F C2 H

SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S33MX

- Simultaneous display on a divided screen

(When "CAM1&2" has been specified in item
"1MONITOR OUTPUT.")
F C1/C2 H
Camera 2

SERIAL NO.
image

8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S30J
Camera 1
image

2-2
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

(2) Output monitor switching by parallel input I/O CONDITION SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
On the operation screen, select "MAIN-COND" -> 1MEAS INP I/F PARALLEL+SERIAL
"SYS-CND" -> "I/O CONDITIONS" in that order.
Move the cursor to the " PARALLEL INP X6" line 2OUT I/F(PARAL.) NO
using up/down arrow keys and press the SET key. 3MANL TYPE CHNG NO
4PARALLEL INP X5 EXT-INP
2
Select "CHNG-IMG-OUT-CAM" on the popup EXT-INP
menu that is displayed and then press the SET key. 5PARALLEL INP X6 CHNG-IMG-OUT-CAM CHNG-IMG-OUT-CAM
6STROBE OUT NO CAM-MEAS
7’READY’ON CAPTURE COMPLETE 2 IMAGES

Every time the X6 signal is turned from OFF to

ON, the selected camera display will be changed.
CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2(HORIZ)
whole screen whole screen divided screen

The display example of the operation screen is

the same as in section (1).

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2-3
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[2] Image capture TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

In item " CAPTURE IMG" on the "TYPE RUN COND" 1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
screen, specify the range which will be captured during 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG PARTIAL-IMG
operation. 3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC) WHOLE-IMG
4PATTERN DISPLAY YES NO
2 5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
9PC-MNTR NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. NO

CAPTURE IMG Description

- An image of the specified lines, required for inspection or measurement,
PARTIAL-IMG will be captured.
(partial image) - The processing time is shorter than in the "WHOLE-IMG" mode.

- A whole image will be captured, irrespective of the window settings for

WHOLE-IMG inspection or measurement.
(whole image) - This mode is used to monitor portions of an image outside the window
set up for inspection or measurement
- No image will be captured during operation. Measurements will be
NO carried out with an image being displayed.
(no image) - This mode only used to carry out measurements on an image
transmitted from a personal computer to the IV-S30J.

Example of a comparison of the capture times

- When "WHOLE-IMG" is selected: 33.3 ms

Capture whole image

480 lines

- When the "PARTIAL-IMG" is selected (when there are 240 scan lines): 16.6 ms
Capture partial image

240 lines

2-4
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[3] Message display

Select "YES" or "NO" to display messages on the TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
operation screen.
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
MESSAGE 3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC) YES(NUMERIC) 2
DISPLAY Description 4PATTERN DISPLAY YES YES(NO NUMERIC)
5SHOW BINARY IMG YES NO
YES (NUMERIC) All data will be displayed. 6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
YES (NO NUMERIC) Data other than the numerical 8DISP CHG-EVAL
9PC-MNTR
NO
result will not be displayed. NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
NO No messages will be displayed. qEXTENSION FUNC. NO

Setting to "NO" reduces the processing time.

Processing time:
YES(NUMERIC) > YES(NO NUMERIC) > NO

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Display examples
- When "YES(NUMERIC)" is selected - When "YES(NO NUMERIC)" is selected
(TYPE00)AREA1 F C1 L (TYPE00)AREA1 F C1 L
V*.** V*.**
OK OK
MEAS XXXXms MEAS XXXXms
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION

REGST.NO 0(0~7)
X0=176.0 OK
Y0=322.0 OK
x0=+000.0 OK
y0=+000.0 OK
M0=+10000 OK
B0=+001.7 OK
X1=534.0 OK
Y1=480.0 OK
x1=+001.0 OK
y1=+001.0 OK
M1=+09999 OK

X0~6 Y0~7 READY X0~6 Y0~7 READY

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

Can be deleted by pressing the SET key.

- When "NO" is selected

Press the
SET key

Press the
ESC key

X0~6 Y0~7 READY

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

The menu bar will disappear. The menu bar will be displayed.

2-5
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[4] Pattern display TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

Select "YES" or "NO" to determine whether to show the
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
pattern display (solid lines and dashed lines of the 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
rectangles in the window) over an image displayed on 3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
4PATTERN DISPLAY
2 the operation screen.
Note: When the "CAM1&2" is selected on the
5SHOW BINARY IMG
YES
YES
YES
NO
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
" MONITOR OUTPUT" (page 2-2), pattern 7OPS MAIN DISP YES
display cannot be selected. 8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
9PC-MNTR NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. NO
PATTERN
Description
DISPLAY
Displays patterns in the window, such
YES as the rectangles defined for the
inspection area and the search area.

NO Patterns will not be displayed

on the operation screen.
SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Display examples
- When "YES" is selected for PATTERN DISPLAY. - When "NO" is selected for PATTERN DISPLAY
(TYPE00) F C1 L (TYPE00) F C1 L

OK VX.X
OK VX.X
MEAS XXXXms MEAS XXXXms
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION

REGST. NO. 0(0~7) REGST. NO. 0(0~7)

X0=176.0 OK X0=176.0 OK
Y0=322.0 OK Y0=322.0 OK
x0=+000.0 OK x0=+000.0 OK
y0=+000.0 OK y0=+000.0 OK
M0=+10000 OK M0=+10000 OK
B0=+001.7 OK B0=+001.7 OK
X1=534.0 OK X1=534.0 OK
Y1=480.0 OK Y1=480.0 OK
x1=+001.0 OK x1=+001.0 OK
y1=+001.0 OK y1=+001.0 OK
M1=+09999 OK M1=+09999 OK

X0~6 Y0~7 READY X0~6 Y0~7 READY

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

2-6
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[5] Binary image display TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
Select "YES" or "NO" to display a binary image on the 1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
operation screen. 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
Note: When "CAM1&2" is selected on the "MONITOR 3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
4PATTERN DISPLAY
OUTPUT" (page 2-2), the binary image display 5SHOW BINARY IMG
YES
YES YES 2
cannot be selected. 6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES NO
- When "NO" is selected on the " PATTERN 7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
DISPLAY," the " SHOW BINARY IMG" item will 9PC-MNTR NO
not appear. 0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. NO

SHOW BINARY
Description
IMG
A binary image will be displayed on
YES the operation screen.

NO A binary image will not be displayed

on the operation screen.
SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Display examples
- When "YES" is selected for the "5SHOW BINARY IMG" - When "NO" is selected for the "5SHOW BINARY IMG"
(TYPE00) F C1 L (TYPE00) F C1 L

OK VX.X
OK VX.X

MEAS XXXXms MEAS XXXXms

MEASUREMENT1 CNT-BIN-OBJ MEASUREMENT1 CNT-BIN-OBJ
K0=00006 OK K0=00006 OK
A0=015781 OK A0=015781 OK
K1=00020 OK K1=00020 OK
A1=087620 OK A1=087620 OK
K2=00010 OK K2=00010 OK
A2=042680 OK A2=042680 OK
K3= K3=
A3= A3=

X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

2-7
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[6] θ angle correction image display TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

Select "YES" or "NO" to display a θ angle corrected 1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1

image on the operation screen. 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
4PATTERN DISPLAY
2 5SHOW BINARY IMG
YES
YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES NO
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
SHOW 9PC-MNTR NO
FIX θ IMG Description 0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. NO
A θ angle corrected image will be
YES displayed on the operation screen.
A θ angle corrected image will not be
NO
displayed on the operation screen.

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Display examples

(Reference image) (Measured image)

Position of
reference image

- When the θ
angle correction
image display
mode has been
set to YES.

- When the θ
angle correction
image display
mode has been
set to NO.

2-8
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[7] Operation main display

When the operation screen was set to display other TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
screens (such as the "DISP CHG-EVAL" and "PC-
MNTR" screens), this item should be selected to return 1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
2CAPTURE IMG
to the main display from other screens. On the "TYPE 3MESSAGE DISPLAY
PARTIAL-IMG
YES(NUMERIC) 2
RUN COND" screen, select " OPS MAIN DISP" and 4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
then "YES" on the popup menu. That will return you to 5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
the main operation screen. 7OPS MAIN DISP YES YES
Note: When other screens are set to "YES" (such as 8DISP CHG-EVAL NO NO
the " DISP CHG-EVAL" and " PC-MNTR" 9PC-MNTR NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
screens), make sure to select "YES" from the qEXTENSION FUNC. NO
OPS MAIN DISP.

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
upper function menu. Select "SCREEN" and press the
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
SET key. Then select "OPS-MENU." 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
OPS-MENU
MAIN
3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
SELECT
4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
RETURN
5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
9PC-MNTR NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. NO

Select "SCREEN-CHG" on the lower menu on the (TYPE00) AREA1 F C1 DRK○

operation screen and press the SET key. "OPS-MAIN" V*.**
C1=002.2 OK
will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
While the "OPS-MAIN" line is highlighted, press the
OK
MEAS XXXXms
C2=100.0 OK

SET key. The main display will then change back to the MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION

operation screen from the other screens (e.g. the JDG-

COND-CHG and PC-MNTR screens).

OPS-MAIN
PC-MNTR
X0∼6 □□□□□□□□ Y0∼7 □□□□□□□□  READY □■
MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

2-9
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[8] Evaluation change display

Specify whether the evaluation condition change TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
menu can be displayed on the operation screen or
not. 1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
2 Select the " DISP CHG-EVAL" line on the "TYPE 3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
RUN COND" screen and select "YES" on the popup 4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
menu. 5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL YES YES
9PC-MNTR NO NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. NO

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
upper function menu. Select "SCREEN" and press the
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
SET key. Then select "OPS-MENU." 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
OPS-MENU
MAIN
3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
SELECT
4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
RETURN
5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
9PC-MNTR NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. NO

Select "SCREEN-CHG" on the lower menu on the (TYPE00) F C1 BRT

operation screen, and press the SET key. "JDG-
COND CHG" will be displayed in the lower right
MEAS 0000ms
corner of the screen. You can display the evaluation MEASURE 0 CAM1 NO
condition change menu by pressing the up and down
keys.
- Press the SET key. The cursor will move to the
area containing the phrase "evaluation condition
change menu during operation." You can change
the settings for the evaluation conditions.
- At this time, the screen display will look the same
as the normal operation main screen, except for
the area marked "evaluation condition change
menu shown during operation."
JDG-COND-CHG
PC-MNTR
Display evaluation condition
change menu while in operation
X0∼6 □□□□□□□□ Y0∼7 □□□□□□□□  READY □■
MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

2-10
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[9] PC monitor screen (TYPE00)AREA1 T C1 DRK○

Specify whether to display the PC monitor LOCK FULL V*.**
on the operation screen. OK C1=002.2 OK
C2=100.0 OK
Select the " PC-MNTR" line on the "TYPE MEAS XXXXms
RUN COND" screen and select "YES" on 1
2
X00∼ 06
Y000∼007  READY
2
the popup menu. Now the PC monitor
3 C000∼007
screen can be displayed.
4 [NUMERIC CALC] [TMR] [CNTR]
AN00= +00000250.0 OK TM0:200 CN0:100
Select "SCREEN-CHG" on the lower menu AN01= -00000300.0 OK TM1:300 CN1:150
bar of the operation screen and then select AN02=NOT SET TM2:NOT SET CN2:NOT SET
5 AN03=NOT SET TM3:NOT SET CN3:NOT SET
"PC-MNTR" on the popup menu. The PC AN04=NOT SET TM4:NOT SET CN4:NOT SET
monitor will be displayed. AN05=NOT SET TM5:NOT SET CN5:NOT SET
AN06=NOT SET TM6:NOTSET CN6:NOT SET
6 AN07=NOT SET TM7:NOT SET CN7:NOT SET

7 MMU-CHG MAIN-COND SEL-OUT SEL-AUX SEL-NUM SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

1 The ON (■) or OFF (□) status of the input relays (X00 to X07) is displayed.
2 The ON (■) or OFF (□) status of the output relays (Y00 to Y15) is displayed.
3 The ON (■) or OFF (□) status of the auxiliary relays (C000 to C127) is displayed.
4 The results (AN00 to AN15) of the final numerical calculations are displayed.
5 The current timer value is displayed.
6The current counter value is displayed.
7 Menu bar
Menu bar Description
Change the output relay address (Y00 to Y15) using the up and down keys
SEL-OUT
(in units of 8 points).
Change the auxiliary relay address (C000 to C127) using the up and down
SEL-AUX
keys (in units of 8 points).
Change the final numerical calculation address (AN00 to AN15) using the
SEL-NUM up and down keys (in units of 8 points).

The other data displayed is the same as on the operation screen. -See page 1-10.
[10] Through display
Select the desired measurement image status TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
(FREEZE or THROUGH) by choosing either "YES" or
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
"NO" on the operation screen. 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
THROUGH DISPLAY Description 7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
Measurements can be 9PC-MNTR NO
NO 0THROUGH DISPLAY NO YES
made on a frozen image. qEXTENSION FUNC. NO NO

Measurements can be
YES
made on a through image.

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2-11
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[11] Extension functions

The extension function has crosshair cursor display and manual display functions.

(1) Crosshair cursor display

The crosshair cursor can be displayed on any position.
2 - "1" equals a 16-pixel line. "2" equals a full line.
- The initial coordinates of the crosshair cursor center are (256,240)

Operation procedure [Display example]

1. On the "TYPE RUN COND" screen, (TYPE00)AREA1
move the cursor to item

Measurement image of
" EXTENSION FUNC." using the OK
up and down keys, and press the MEAS XXXXms
SET key. MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI DEVIATION

2. Select "DISPLAY+CURSOR" on the

camera 1.
popup menu and press the SET
key.
3. Press the SET key on the
" DISPLAY+CURSOR 1" line and
select "1" or "2" on the popup menu.
Then press the SET key.
Measurement image of

4. Select " CROSS CURSOR

COORD" and press the SET key.
Now, the crosshair appear on the
camera 2.

screen. Move the crosshair cursor

using the up/down/left/right arrow
keys. (It moves one pixel at a time) X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY
5. When the cursor is positioned MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

where you want it, press the SET Displays two crosshair cursors.
key to confirm the position.

If you select " DISPLAY+CURSOR 2," you TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
can display two cursors when you output monitor
images from Cameras 1 and 2. 1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
9PC-MNTR NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. DISPLAY+CURSOR DISPLAY+CURSOR
wDISPLAY+CURSOR 1 1 1 MANL-MEAS
eCLOSS CURSOR COORD SET (256,240) 2
rDISPLAY+CURSOR 2 NO

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2-12
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

(2) Manual measurement

With this function, you can measure distance between two points, the distance between X
coordinates, or the distance between Y coordinates that were selected manually on the operation
main screen.
2
Operation procedure
1. Select " EXTENSION FUNC." on the TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
"TYPE RUN COND" menu using the up 1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1
and down arrow keys. Then press the SET 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
key. 3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
2. Select "MANL-MEAS" on the popup menu 5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
and press the SET key. 6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
9PC-MNTR NO NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO DISPLAY+CURSOR
qEXTENSION FUNC. MANL-MEAS MANL-MEAS

3. Move the cursor to the upper function menu TYPE RUN COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
by pressing the TRG/BRT key and select
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 OPS-MENU
"SCREEN." Then press the SET key. 2CAPTURE IMG PARTIAL-IMG
MAIN
Select "OPS-MENU" on the popup menu 3MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(NUMERIC)
SELECT
and return to the operation screen. 4PATTERN DISPLAY YES
RETURN
5SHOW BINARY IMG YES
6SHOW θ FIX IMG YES
7OPS MAIN DISP YES
8DISP CHG-EVAL NO
9PC-MNTR NO
0THROUGH DISPLAY NO
qEXTENSION FUNC. NO

4. Move the cursor to the "MNU-CHG"

(TYPE00)AREA1
(menu change) item on the bottom
of the operation screen and press
the SET key to change the bottom
OK
MEAS XXXXms
menu display. Move the cursor to MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI DEVIATION
Manual measurement

"MANL-MEAS" (manual MANL-MEAS

measurement) and press the SET 1CURSOR1-COORD MOVE(224,208)
key. 2CURSOR2-COORD MOVE(287,271)
DIST-BETW-2PT 089.0
5. The menu items for manual DIST-BETW-X 063.0
menu

measurements will appear on the DEST-BETW-Y 063.0

screen.
6. Select " CURSOR1-COORD" or "
CURSOR2-COORD" and press
the SET key.
7. Move cursor 1 or cursor 2 using the
up/down/left/right keys. (They move
one pixel at a time.)
The distance between the two X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY
points, and between the X MNU-CHG NEXT-NG CHG-C1 CHG-C2 MANL-MEAS SHORTCUT

coordinates and Y coordinates for Cross hair cursor 1 Cross hair cursor 2
the two points, will change on real
time basis.
8. After the positions of the points are determined, press the SET key.
9. When the operation is complete, press the ESC key.
The manual measurement menu items will disappear.

2-13
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

2-2 Setting the system conditions

Set the following items on the "SYS-CND" menu to set MAIN MENU F C1 BRT
the system conditions for the controller. IVS30J
Setting item SYS-CND

2 - Input/output conditions OBJECT TYPE COND

SET WIZARD
- Communication setting
EDIT MAIN OPS MENU
- Computer link OPTION
- Gain/offset

For the following items, see the pages listed

below.
- Input/output conditions Chapter 16
- Communication setting Chapter 17
- Computer link Chapter 18

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

[1] Manually setting the object type

On the operation screen, the object type (00 to 15) can SYSTEM COND SET F C1 BRT
be changed manually (using the remote keypad). SYS-COND
I/O CONDITIONS 1MEAS INP I/F
COMM-SET 2OUT I/F(PARAL.)
COMPUTER LINK 3MANL TYPE CHNG
GAIN-OFFSET 4PARALLEL INP X5
5PARALLEL INP X6
6STROBE OUT
7’READY’ON

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

On the MAIN MENU, select "SYS-CND" -> "I/O I/O CONDITION SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
CONDITIONS" -> " MANL TYPE CHNG" in that 1MEAS INP I/F PARALLEL+SERIAL
order and then select "YES" or "NO" on the popup
menu. 2OUT I/F(PARAL.) NO
3MANL TYPE CHNG NO NO
4PARALLEL INP X5 EXT-INP YES
MANL TYPE
Description
CHNG 5PARALLEL INP X6 EXT-INP
6STROBE OUT NO
The type can be manually changed on the 7’READY’ON CAPTURE COMPLETE
operation screen.
YES Note: If the "3MANL TYPE CHNG" is set to
"YES," the type cannot be changed
with an external interface (parallel I/O
or general purpose serial interface).

NO The type cannot be manually changed on the

operation screen.

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2-14
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

[2] Gain/offset adjustment

The gain and offset of the IV-S30J can only be adjusted by our service engineers. Users must not
try to change them.
The data which can be adjusted is shown below for reference purpose only.
Generally, an image from the CCD camera can be optimized by adjusting the optical system, such as the 2
lens iris. To make fine adjustments, the IV-S30J is equipped with functions to adjust the offset and gain of
image signals from cameras 1 and 2 and the contrast on an external monitor screen.
- The gain and offset are adjusted by checking the display on the screen.
- The screen is kept in the through mode.

Setting method
On the MAIN MENU, select "SYS-CND" -> GAIN-OFFSET SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"GAIN OFFSET" and the following message will
1OFFSET (CAM1) ＋(↑) −(↓) (026)
appear on the screen.
2GAIN (CAM1) ＋(↑) −(↓) (245)
3OFFSET (CAM2) ＋(↑) −(↓) (026)
CHANGING A SETUP MAY LEAD TO A 4GAIN (CAM2) ＋(↑) −(↓) (245)
MACHINE FAILURE. DO YOU CHANGE IT? 5CONTRAST (MNTR) ＋(↑) −(↓) (055)

(YES=SET, NO=ESC)
SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the SET key the "GAIN OFFSET" screen at the right appears.
Gain and offset adjustment Details of adjustment (selection)
The offset for camera 1 is adjusted with the up and down keys.
1OFFSET (CAM1) - The complete signal level is shifted leaving the amplitude of the
image signals from the CCD camera unchanged. As the offset
value is increased, the whole screen will becomes more white.
The gain for camera 1 is adjusted with the up and down keys.
- The amplitude of the image signals from the CCD camera is
2GAIN (CAM1) changed. As the gain value is reduced, the screen will become
lighter, and as the gain value is increased, the screen will
become darker.
The offset for camera 2 is adjusted with the up and down keys.
3OFFSET (CAM2) - The adjustment procedure is the same as that in Item ①.
The gain for camera 2 is adjusted with the up and down keys.
4GAIN (CAM2) - The adjustment procedure is the same as that in Item ②.
The monitor contrast is adjusted with the up and down keys.
5CONTRAST (MNTR) - The intensity of image signals sent to the monitor is adjusted.
As the contrast value is increased, the contrast on the screen will
become stronger.

2-15
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

2-3 Editing Operation screen

In this controller, the operation screen display can be changed. You can move, enlarge, reduce, or hide
any block of text.

2 (1) Move the cursor to "MAIN-MENU" on the operation screen and press the SET key.

(2) Move the cursor to "EDIT MAIN OPS MENU" and MAIN MENU F C1 BRT
press the SET key.
IVS30J
SYS-CND
OBJECT TYPE COND
SET WIZARD
EDIT MAIN OPS MENU
OPTION

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

(3) Now the operation screen will appear. Select a OPS-MAIN SCREEN OBJECT SAVE RESET F C1 BRT
block of text you want to edit using the up, down,
left, and right arrow keys, and press the SET key. （TYPE00）SAMPLE00 F C1 DRK ○
A pop up menu will appear and you can select LOCK FULL V*.* ■
from move, enlarge, reduce, and hide. (In this
example, the block of text "OK" is selected.)
OK
MEAS XXXXms 
C1=002.2 OK
C2=100.0 OK
MEAS1 MEAS-BIN-AREA MOVE
NG-IMG 00(00)
MAGNIFCATION
- MOVE REDUCTION
Select "MOVE" using the SET key. Now the MEAS PROGRAM NON-DISP
highlighted block of text can be moved using the MEAS RESULT

up, down, left, and right arrow keys. When the text
is in the desired new position, press the SET key
again.

- MAGNIFICATION/REDUCTION
Move the cursor to the "MAGNIFCATION" or
"REDUCTION" line and press the SET key. The
highlighted block of text can be enlarged or
reduced. X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY

- NON-DISP
Move the cursor to the "NON-DISP" line and press the SET key. The highlighted block of text will be
deleted.

2-16
 Setting the Operating and System Conditions

2-4 Option
With the IV-S30J, you can initialize the measurement settings, and run a self-diagnosis from the option
menu.

Setting method 2
1) Display the "OPTION" from the "MAIN MENU." MAIN MENU F C1 BRT
IVS30J
SYS-CND
OBJECT TYPE COND
SET WIZARD
EDIT MAIN OPS MENU
OPTION

2) Select the operation you want, such as OPTION SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
" INITIALIZATION" or " SELF DIAGNOSIS." 1INITIALIZATION ALL-INIT INIT-RAM
2SELF DIAGNOSIS EXEC

INITIALIZATION
Select any of the "ALL-INT" (initialize both FROM and RAM), or "INT-RAM" and the following
message will appear.

MEM INIT?(YES=[SET], NO=[ESC] )

Press the SET key to start the initialization. The bar shown below will appear and display the
progress of the initialization.
INITIALIZATION

REFERENCE IMG ■■
SYSTEM I/O ■
OBJECT TYPE COND ■■■■■■■□□□

After the initialization is complete, the word "INITIALIZING" will change to "COMPLETE INIT."
Press the ESC key to return to main screen.

SELF DIAGNOSIS
Select " SELF DIAGNOSIS" and press the OPTION SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
SET key twice. The controller will execute a self-
1INITIALIZATION ALL-INIT INIT-RAM
diagnosis and display the results of the
2SELF DIAGNOSIS EXEC
diagnosis, as shown right. If the diagnosis results
are normal, "OK" will be displayed. If the results
are abnormal, "NO" will be displayed. When the diagnosis is complete, the
"DIAGNOSING" display will change to
When the diagnosis is complete, the "COMPLETE DIAGNOSIS ."

"DIAGNOSING" display will change to

"COMPLETE DIAGNOSIS ." DIAGNOSING
VRAM OK
SDRAM OK

TYPE COND OK
REFFERENCE IMG OK
BOOT-PROG OK
SYSTEM-PROG OK

SET=EXEC ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2-17
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

Chapter 3 : Setting Measurement Conditions

3-1 Outline
The measuring conditions for each object type are set on the "OBJECT TYPE COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions for object type) menu. A maximum of 16 object type numbers can be OBJECT TYPE COND
registered. + TYPE00
+ TYPE01
+ TYPE02 3
+ TYPE03
+ TYPE04
+ TYPE05
TYPE(NEW)

How to enter the setting screen

On the MAIN MENU, move the cursor to "OBJECT TYPE COND" and SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND
press the SET key. The "SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND" screen will
OBJECT TYPE COND
appear. Select "TYPE00," "MEA-CND(CAMERA1)," and "MEAS0" or TYPE00
"MEAS(NEW)." TYPE RUN COND
Note: "MEAS0" is only used for measuring positional deviation. IMAGE-ADJ
MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
+ MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS (NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

Choose a measurement program from the popup menu at MEASUREMENT 1 SCREEN COND SAVE
" MEAS SELECTION" to bring up the "MEAS CND" screen.
For details, see Chapter 8: "Setting Example Using the 1MEAS SELECTION POSI-DEVIATION
Menu Tree" in the Instruction and Hardware.
NO
POSI-DEVIATION
Note: New measurement programs are allocated to "MEAS01" CHK-DEG-MATCH
through "MEAS04." The smallest measurement number INSPECT-LEAD
available (from 1 to 4) will be assigned. "MEAS0" is MEAS-BIN-OBJ
dedicated to positional deviation measurements. LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
MULTI-POSI
MULTI MATCHES

3-1
 Setting Measurement Conditions

Setting procedure
A general outline of the setting procedures is shown below. For details, see each chapter.
Setting the measurement program MEASURE 0
conditions
MEASURE 1
MEASURE 2 Jump to the next page
MEASURE 3
3 MEASURE 4

Select the image pre-processing

method Image pre-processing - See page 3-19

Set final numerical calculation "FINAL NUM.CALC" - See Chapter 14

Set final output condition "FINAL OUTPUT COND" - See Chapter 15

Setting the input/output conditions "OBJ-TYPE I/O" - See Chapter 16

Setting the system conditions "OBJ-TYPE SYS"

Save the settings in the flash memory "SAVE" - See page 1-14

Return to the MAIN OPS MENU "OPS-MENU"

3-2
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

Outline of setting the measurement program

The measurement program can be specified from SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
"MEAS0" through "MEAS4." (Camera1/camera 2) OBJECT TYPE COND
TYPE00
TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
+ MEAS0(POSI-DEVIATION)
POSI-CORRECT
+ MEAS01(CHK-DEG-MATCH)
3
Measurement program
+ MEAS02(INSPECT-LEAD)
+ MEAS03(MEAS-BIN-AREA)
+ MEAS04(CNT-BIN-OBJ)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
+ TYPE01
+ TYPE02
+ TYPE03
+ TYPE04
SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

When you want to specify the measurement condi- MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
tions using "POSI-DEVIATION."
1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
2REGISTER NO 0(0~7)
3MODE 1P-SCH

REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

5MDL 0 S ×××××××
6MDL 1 E S ××××××

NO
1P-SCH
2P-SCH
1P-EDGE
2P-EDGE
1P-SCH+1P-EDGE

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Set the specific Set the evaluation Set the method for
conditions for each conditions (testing) numeric calculation
measurement program (testing)

Set the output conditions (see

Chapter 16: Setting the Select "SCREEN" and then "OPS-MENU" to the
Input/Output Conditions) operation screen.

3-3
 Setting Measurement Conditions

3-2 Shared settings

[1] Window shape selection and settings
This section describes how to select and set the EX: Register conditions of "Positional deviation
window shapes used for image processing (e.g. measurement."
rectangular windows, horizontal or vertical line REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

boundaries, circle windows, elliptical windows, and 1REGISTER NO 0(0~7)

polygonal windows). This can be done using the up, 2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0) RECTANGLE
3 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0) SET
down, left, and right setting keys on the remote key 4SEARCH ARE (MDL0) SET
(224,208)~(287,271)
(216,200)~(295,279)
pad.
RECTANGLE
X-LINE
Y-LINE

(1) Rectangular window

Line type Image processing used Measurement programs

Reference image for gray Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search), degree
scale search and binary of match inspection, lead inspection, multiple position
image matching measurement (gray scale search), and multiple degree of match
Solid lines inspection.
Window containing a Area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by
binary image binary conversion, object identification by binary conversion.
Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search), degree
Gray scale search area of match inspection, lead inspection (criteria search), multiple
detection position measurement (gray scale search) and multiple degree
of match inspection.
Dotted lines Positional deviation measurement (edge detection), multiple
Edge of an area detection position measurement (edge detection).

Binary image window Area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by

mask binary conversion, object identification by binary conversion.

3-4
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

How to set a rectangular window

1. Moving the mask
- Up key - Down key - Left key - Right key

2. Specifying the upper left corner

- Up key - Down key - Left key - Right key

3. Specifying the lower right corner

- Up key - Down key - Left key - Right key

To register reference images

To register reference images, the system should be in the "Freeze" mode.
See page 1-10

Window specifications
Line type Move Size Minimum Maximum
Reference X x Y (X*Y =
Solid line One pixel at a time In unit of one pixel 16 x 16 (pixel)
image 65536 pixels)
Search area Dotted line One pixel at a time In unit of one pixel 16 x 16 (pixel) 512 x 480 pixels

3-5
 Setting Measurement Conditions

(2) Horizontal/vertical lines

Line type Image processing used Measurement programs
Gray scale search Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search),
(reference image) degree of match inspection, lead inspection (criteria search).
Solid lines
Edge of an area
Lead inspection
detection
3 Dotted lines Gray scale search line Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search),
detection degree of match inspection, lead inspection (criteria search).

How to set horizontal lines

The following items on the settings menu can be used to define lines: MOVE, S.PT, E.PT.
Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line.
1. Move
- Up key - Down key - Left key - Right key

2. Specifying the starting point 3. Specifying the ending point

- Left key - Right key - Left key - Right key

(The up and down keys function the (The up and down keys function the
same as in the move item) same as in the move item)

How to set vertical lines

1. Move
- Up key - Down key - Left key - Right key

2. Specifying the starting point 3. Specifying the ending point

- Up key - Down key - Up key - Down key

(The left and right keys function the (The left and right keys function the
same as in the move item) same as in the move item)

To register reference images

To register reference images, the system should be in the "Freeze" mode.
See page 1-10.

3-6
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

Window specifications
- Horizontal lines
Min. Max.
Line type Move Length
length length
Reference image Solid line Horizontal direction: One pixel at a time In units 8 512
Search area Dotted line Vertical direction: One pixel at a time of pixels pixels pixels

- Vertical lines 3
Min. Max.
Line type Move Length
length length
Reference image Solid line Horizontal direction: One pixel at a time In units 8 480
Search area Dotted line Vertical direction: One pixel at a time of pixels pixels pixels
When setting the horizontal and vertical lines, specify the line length as follows:
The reference image must shorter than the search area lines.

(3) Circle window

Line type Image processing used Measurement programs
Window containing a Area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by
Solid lines
binary image binary conversion, object identification by binary conversion

Binary image window Area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by

Dotted lines mask binary conversion, object identification by binary conversion

How to set a circle window

The following items on the settings menu can be used to define the circle window: CENTER,
RAD. Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line circle window.
1. Specifying the center
- Up key - Down key - Left key - Right key

2. Specifying the radius

- Up/right key - Down/left key

(4) Elliptical window

Line type Image processing used Measurement programs

Window containing a Area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by
Solid lines binary image binary conversion, object identification by binary conversion

Binary image window Area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by

Dotted lines mask binary conversion, object identification by binary conversion

3-7
 Setting Measurement Conditions

How to set an elliptical window

The following items on the settings menu can be used to define the elliptical window: CENTER,
RAD. Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line elliptical window.
1. Specifying the center
- Up key - Down key - Left key - Right key

2. Specifying the radius

- Up key - Down key - Left key - Right key

(5) Polygonal window

With the binary area measurement function, object counting after binary
conversion function, object identification after binary conversion function, or
point measurement after binary conversion function, you can create any
shape of polygonal window with up to 32 sides, in addition to the rectangles,
circles, and ovals that were available in previous versions.

Any polygonal window

(up to 32 sides)

How to create a window

On the "POLYGON" setting screen, specify a coordinate 16P (305,153)
using the up, down, left, and right arrow keys, and then press 27P (305,186)
38P (272,186)
the SET key. Thereafter, specify points 02, 03 and so on, in 49P (272,211)
numerical order. After specifying the last coordinate, press 510P (243,211)
the SET key again to confirm the polygonal shape you have 611P (243,236)
drawn. 712P (217,239)
813P (217,239)
To edit the polygonal shape, select a point to modify using
the up and down arrow keys, and press the SET key. A
popup menu will appear. Select CHANGE, INSERT or
DELETE.

3-8
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

[2] Image settings

What follows is a description of how to use the image settings to control the measuring program.

(1) Pixel contraction and detection precision (gray scale processing)

The display will change from 1 to 2 to 3
Measurement condition setting screen using the up and down arrow keys.

3
MEAS CND REG COND

1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD STANDARD 5CONTR. PIXL(MDL0) 1

HIGH PRECISION

Note: At the "DETAIL" item in the upper

function menu, select "CONTR.PIXEL."
Then, "5 or 9CONTR.PIXL" will
appear on the screen.

Menu Description
- STANDARD (standard): Detection precision of 1 pixel unit
level
- HIGH (High precision): Detection precision of 1/10 pixel
           unit level
(High precision)
Search coordinates use a
sub-pixel level of precision (1/10)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1
2
Reference image
3
4
1DTECT 5
PRECISION  (Standard) 6
(detection Search coordinates 7
use a 1 pixel level 8
precision) of precision
9 Degree of
Degree of match
match

High precision Standard pixel

pixel detection Camera image detection

Point of detection Pixel Point of detection

59CONTR. - 1: Search the scanned image in groups of 2 pixels.

PIXL - 2: Search the scanned image in groups of 4 pixels.
(Grey search
scale conditions) - 3: Search the scanned image in groups of 8 pixels.

- To increase the speed of your search, you must take into account the settings listed below.
1. When using the high precision setting, a smaller image should be used.
2. Reduce the size of the scanned image.
3. After considering what the maximum out of position dimension would be, make the
search area as small as possible.
4. If the size of the object is larger than 8 pixels then set the pixel contraction to "3."

Measurement programs which are affected by these settings

Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search), degree of match inspection, lead
inspection, multiple position measurement, and multiple degree of match inspection.

3-9
 Setting Measurement Conditions

(2) Threshold value setting

The IV-S30J treats the "areas darker than the lower limit value" or "brighter than the upper limit value"
as "black." It treats that the areas between the upper limit value and lower limit value as "white."
However, if the white-black reverse function is enabled, conversion to white/black will be reversed.
Normally, if you want to use only one threshold value for binary conversion, set the upper limit value to
"255." Then you only need to adjust the lower limit value to a threshold value that works for our
application.
3 (Threshold value)
255
Threshold valve B Lower White
Binary conversion limit A
(upper limit 255, lower limit A)
Threshold valve A Black
B

(Captured image) Binary conversion 0

(upper limit 255, lower limit B)

(Threshold value) (Threshold value)

Binary conversion 255 255
(upper limit A, lower limit B) Upper Black
limit A A
White
White
Lower Lower
limit B limit B
Black Black
0 0

Setting the threshold value automatically - Binary area condition (binary image mask) menu of
The binary threshold value can be set the binary area measurement
automatically. THRESHOLD VAL AUTO-REG RESET F C1 DRK
In the binary area condition of each
measurement program, execute the "AUTO 1U.LM 255(0~255)
2L.LM 100(0~255) L LIMIT ONLY
REG" function (lower limit only or upper and
U&L LIMITS
lower limits) and the optimum threshold values
will be set in each measurement area
automatically.
The binary area conditions (binary image
mask) menu in the binary area
measurement.

Measurement programs which are affected

by these settings
Area measurement by binary conversion,
object counting by binary conversion, object
identification by binary conversion, point
measurement (binary images)
SET=CHNG ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

3-10
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

(3) Setting window boundaries (enable/disable)

This function enables and disables the labeling (object identification) of binary images located that
cross over the window frame boundary.
Window 1 2
Labeling
(enable
Binary window
conversion boundaries)
3

Labeling 3 4
(disable window Images 1 and 3 cross over the
boundary) window frame edges and are
measured together with the
areas outside the window frame
edges.
1
Condition: Labeling
2      (in order they are
     connected)

Measurement programs which are affected F C1 BRT

REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL
by these settings
1REGISTER NO. 0(0~3)
Object counting by binary conversion, object □MASK REGIST.
□BINARY PROCESS
identification by binary conversion □BINRY NOISE FILT
□BOUNDARY PROCESS
Setting method □AREA FILTER
Select "DETAIL" in the upper function menu
on the REG COND screen. Select
"BOUNDARY PROCESS" from the popup menu and then press the SET key.

(4) Object identification and numbering function (labeling)

Object identification and numbering (labeling) is a process for locating separate object and assigning
serial numbers (labels) one at a time in a binary image. By this process, multiple objects in the same
binary image can be handled separately or as a group.
1 2
Object
identification
Binary (in order of
conversion scanning)
3 Island

Object identification 4
3 (in order of area)
2

4 Island

Measurement programs which are affected by these settings

Object counting by binary conversion, object identification by binary conversion

3-11
 Setting Measurement Conditions

(5) Binary processing (fixed/threshold value correction)

By setting THRESHOLD-ADJ (threshold adjustment function), the IV-S30 can cope with variations in
lighting.

Variation in
Note: In order to use the THRESHOLD-
ADJ(threshold adjustment

lighting
3 function), the monitor brightness
functions must be selected to
Threshold correction value Fixed measure variations in lighting. If
you don’t select the monitor
brightness function, a LIGHT LVL
NOT SET (correcting binary value:
monitor illumination not selected)
error will occur.

Fails to convert the image

due to a variation in lighting
Threshold correction using either VAR-DIFF (enter variations in lighting as value) and
VAR-RATE (enter variations in lighting as a rate) can be selected the THRESHOLD-ADJ
(the threshold adjustment function).
Set (selection) item Details of correction

Variation Correct the threshold value by adding the previously specified threshold
difference value to the light level variation difference.
Threshold value (Measured light level — reference light level) + specified threshold value
adjustment
Variation Correct the threshold value by multiplying the previously threshold value
rate to the light level variation rate.
(Measured light level ÷ reference light level) x specified threshold value

Measurement programs which are affected by these settings

Area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by binary conversion, object
identification by binary conversion, point measurement (binary images)

Setting method
Select " THRESHOLD" on the "REG COND" REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
screen and then change the upper and lower 1MEAS SHAPE RECTANGLE
limit values using the up, down, left, and right 2MEAS AREA SET (224,208)~(287,271)
arrow keys. 3THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)]
4INVERT B/W NO

Change using the up and

down arrow keys.

3-12
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

(6) The expansion/contraction method of eliminating noise in binary images

When converting an image to binary values, it is often the case that dots of noise will show up in the
converted image. This noise may be eliminated during pre-processing by using the smoothing
function. However, it can also be dealt with through the expansion/contraction noise elimination
method.
Expansion
A single white dot, or small groups of white dots, in the middle of a black background can be
eliminated from the image.
Contraction
3
A single black dot, or small groups of black dots, in the middle of a white background can be
eliminated from the image.
The IV-S30J has both "contraction → expansion" and "expansion → contraction" functions for
eliminating binary noise.
Expansion → contraction
When isolated dots of noise are eliminated by expansion, the areas enlarged by the expansion
are returned to their original size by contracting them again.

Contraction
conversion

Expansion
Binary

2 Contraction → expansion
When isolated white noise is eliminated by contraction, the areas shrunk by contraction are
returned to their original size by expanding them again.
Contraction
conversion

Expansion
Binary

- Number of times of expansion and number of times of contraction can be set independently.
When the number of contraction cycles is set to 0, and the number of expansion cycles is one
or greater, then only the expansion function will be used.
On the other hand, if the number of expansion cycles is set to 0 and the number of contraction
cycles is one or greater, then only the contraction function will be used.

Measurement programs which are affected by these settings

Area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by binary conversion, object
identification by binary conversion

Setting method
REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
Select "DETAIL" in the upper function menu on
1REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15)
the REG COND screen, and choose "BINRY 2MEAS SHAPE RECTANGLE
□MASK REGIST.
NOISE FILT" to change the blank box to a filled □BINARY PROCESS
3MEAS AREA SET (224,208)~(287,271)
■BINARY NOISE
box. Then, " BINRY NOISE FILT" will appear 4THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)]
5INVERT B/W NO
on the REG COND screen. Press the SET key
on this line and select "EXPD. -> CONTR." or
"CONTR -> EXPD." from the popup menu. NO
6BINARY NOISE FILT EXPD. →CONTR EXPD. →CONTR.
CONTR. →EXPD.

3-13
 Setting Measurement Conditions

(7) Edge detection

The "edge" refers to the boundaries between the brighter (white) and darker (black) parts in an image.
The "edge detection" function is used to detect this boundary by processing the image.

An example of detecting a point using the edge detection function and user specified
criteria
• Horizontal transition point • Vertical transition point
from light to dark (moving from light to dark (moving
3 from left to right) from top to bottom) Edge Flat
Edge detection width width
point Light
Edge detection point A ↑

Detection
direction
Detection area Brightness Difference
A B level in level
↓
B Dark A Direction B
Detection direction
• Horizontal transition point • Vertical transition point
from light to dark (moving from light to dark (moving
from right to left) from bottom to top) Edge Flat
Light width width
A

Detection
direction
Detection area ↑
Brightness Difference
A B level in level
Edge detection
point ↓
Detection direction B Dark A Direction B
• Center (dark), horizontal (left and right)
Edge detection point

Detection area

• Edge detection of the inside and outside edges of a two circles

B: Moving right horizontally C: Moving left horizontally

A: Moving right horizontally from dark to light from dark to light
from light to dark
D: Moving left horizontally
from light to dark

Internal diameter (between B and C)

External diameter (between A and D)
Detection area

- The edge detection point coordinates are used as a reference point to detect an out of position
condition.
- Edge detection in binary images is much quicker than in a gray scale search. However, the binary
image detection process is less precise at detecting position.

3-14
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

Setting the threshold value automatically - Edge detection menu of the lead inspection
By executing an "AUTO.REG" (automatic THRESHOLD VAL AUTO-REG RESET F C1 BRT
setting) for the edge detection condition in
each measurement program, the IV-S30J can 1GRYS 050(0~255)
2EDGE.W 2(1~8)
automatically detect edges in the 3FLAT.W 04(1~16)
measurement areas, and set the optimum
threshold values automatically (density
difference and edge width). 3
Measurement programs which are affected
by these settings
Positional deviation measurement (edge
detection), lead inspection, multiple position
measurement (edge detection).

SET=CHNG ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

(8) Artifact processing

Artifact processing is a method of processing that eliminates the false detection of the edge of the
target object when an artifact is in the line being scanned. This process can be used during edge
detection. The real edge of the target object is detected by computing the average duration of the dark
area in the scan line, which is much longer for a target object than for an artifact.

Example of detection
An example of light to dark averaging (DTCT MODE:BRT DRK) while scanning horizontally
(SEARCH DIR:HORIZ ), with artifact processing (enabled) (ARTIF).

Duration of dark area

in the line scan

Average light (vertical)

Edge detection point
(with artifact processing: enabled)
When artifact processing is disabled (NO ARTIF) in the above example, the edge detection
point changes.

Edge detection point (with artifact processing off)

Measurement programs which are affected by these settings
Positional deviation measurement (edge detection), lead inspection, and multiple position
measurement (edge detection).

3-15
 Setting Measurement Conditions

(9) Contrast search in the reference image

Using the reference image area setting in the gray scale search mode, the area of maximum contrast
can be identified automatically in the captured image.
- While moving the selected reference image area within the specified search area on the captured
image one pixel at a time, the IV-S30J determines the density in each area in the reference
image, and automatically picks the area with the largest difference.
- This function may be used for sorting printed objects.
3

Search in the specified search Find the area having the maximum
area on the captured image features in the reference image
area.

Measurement programs available that use this setting

Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search), degree of match inspection, multiple
position measurements (gray scale search), and multiple degree of match inspection.

Setting method
Move the cursor to the " REFERENCE IMG" RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
with up and down arrow keys on the reference
image area setting screen. Next, select MDL 0
1UP.L (224,208)
"CONTRAST SRCH." Finally, press the SET
2LO.R (287,271)
key. 3MOVE
4REFERENCE IMG CONTRAST SRCH
REG
DISP

X:224 Y:208
SET=DECISION ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

3-16
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

[3] Evaluation conditions

The setting details and procedures for setting the evaluation conditions are the same for all measurement
programs.

Evaluation conditions [EVALUATION COND] menu for measuring degree of match

EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE The "degree of match + 09000"
refers to a degree of match (match
1REGISTER 00(0~15) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
2CONDITION SET RESET AUTO(±10%)
between individual pixels) between
the registered image and the
3
3MATCH LVL (MDL0) -10000~+10000 M0=+09000 OK NO measured image that is equal to
4X COORD. (MDL0) 000.0~511.0 X0= 000.0 OK NO 90.00% or more of the total.
5Y COORD. (MDL0) 000.0~479.0 Y0= 000.0 OK NO Using the up and down keys, you
6GLAY LVL (MDL0) 000.0~255.0 G0= 116.0 OK NO can set the output to NO (no out-
7MATCH LVL (MDL1) -10000~+10000 M1=+09000 OK NO put), Y0 to 7 (output on these re-
8X COORD. (MDL1) 000.0~511.0 X1= 000.0 OK NO lays), or C000 to C127 (output on
9Y COORD. (MDL1) 000.0~479.0 Y1= 000.0 OK NO these secondary relays), in the out-
0GLAY LVL (MDL1) 000.0~255.0 G1= 116.0 OK NO put area of the menu.
qTEST EXEC(WITH-POSI. ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ) (If the test result returns OK, then
the output is turned ON. If it is NG,
SEL=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC then it is turned OFF).
When carrying out a test using item
qTEST, on the menu, the result-
If you select "WITH-POSI.ADJ," the system will conduct test
ing measurement values and the
while adjusting for positional deviation. - pages 3-30 to 3-32. evaluation (OK or NG) will be dis-
played.
● Condition setting
Upper and lower limit values of the all evaluation condition items can be set automatically
with the following processes.
After testing more than one good workpieces, the IV-S30J automatically set the limits based
on the test results.
Condition
Details
settings
- Multiple the specified rate (±%) on the newly tested good workpieces,
and compared this value with the range between the current upper and
lower limits. If it is outside the upper and lower limits, the IV-S30
renews the maximum or minimum value with this value.
At the first setting, the first test result will be the upper and lower limit
without any condition.
AUTO
(±**%) [±**%]
The value from ±00% to ±99% can be entered to the "±**%" in units of
1%. (Default value = ±10%)
To enter this position, move the cursor to the "AUTO" position and press
the up and down keys to change the value. After determining the value,
press the SET key, upper and lower limits of each item will be
automatically set with tis %.be the upper and lower limit without any
condition.

3-17
 Setting Measurement Conditions

Setting method
There are two ways to get to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "CND" in the upper function menu on MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
the MEAS CND (or REG COND) screen and 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
IMG PRE-PROC
press the SET key. Select "EVALUATION" on 2REGISTER NO. 0(0~7)
REG-COND(S)
the pop up menu to go to the "EVALUAT REG-COND(E)
3MODE 1P-SCH
3 COND" screen. 4DTECT ANGL –15¡
POSITION CORRECTION
EVALUATION
5ANGLE UNIT 10
DST&ANGL
NUM-CALC
REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
OUT
6MDL 0 S
7MDL 1
×

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
item on the Menu tree screen and press the OBJECT TYPE COND
1REGISTER NO.
SET key. TYPE00
2CONDITION SET
TYPE RUN COND 3X COORD. (BDL0)
IMAGE-ADJ 4Y COORD. (MDL0)
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5x DEVIATE (MDL0)
MEAS0(POSI-DEVIATION) 6y DEVIATE (MDL0)
IMG PRE-PROC 7MATCH LVL (MDL0)
MEAS CND 8ANGULAR DEVIATE
REG-COND(S) 9X COORD. (MDL1)
REG-COND(E) 0Y COORD. (MDL1)
EVALUATION COND qx DEVIATE (MDL1)
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND wy DEVIATE (MDL1)
NUM-CALC eMATCH LVL (MDL1)
OUT-COND rTEST
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

3-18
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

[4] Image pre-processing

A comparative calculation between images, gray level changes, and space filter are available for image
pre-processing.

Comparative Subtracting,absolute value of difference (between camera 1 and reference

calculation between image,between camera 2 and reference image, between camera 1 and
images camera 2)
Magnification by "n" processing, γ(+/-) correction, histogram widening, 3
Gray level changes
midrange emphasis
Smoothing (center/average),edge emphasis,edge extraction, horizontal
Space filter
edge,vertical edge

How to get to the "IMG PRE-PROC" screen

MEASUREMENT 1 SCREEN COND SAVE
Select "OBJECT TYPE COND" and then "TYPE00"
or "TYPE(NEW)" on the "MAIN COND" screen. 1MEAS SELECTION POSI-DEVIATION NO
Then select "MEA-CND(CAMERA1)" and "MEAS" POSI-DEVIATION
to open a measurement screen. At the " MEAS CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
SELECTION" item, press the SET key and choose MEAS-BIN-OBJ
a measurement program from the popup menu. CNT-BIN-OBJ
Note: If the " MEAS SELECTION" is set to "NO," LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
the image pre-processing cannot be speci- MALTI-POSI
fied. MULTI MATCHES

Press the ESC key to return to the OBJECT TYPE SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
COND screen. Then select "IMG PRE-PROC." OBJECT TYPE COND
1COMPARE IMGS
TYPE00
2COMP IMGS COND
TYPE RUN COND 3CHNG GRAY LEVEL
IMAGE-ADJ 4CONTRAST MAGNI
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5SPACE FILTER
MEAS0(POSI-DEVIATION) 6NUM.OF FILTER
IMG PRE-PROC
+ MEAS CND
EVALUATION COND
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "IMG PRE-PROC" screen will appear. IMG PRE-PROC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

1COMPARE IMGS NO
For details about "COMPARE IMGS" (compare
images), see page 3-20. 2CHNG GRAY LEVEL NO
For details about "CHNG GRAY LEVEL"
(change gray level), see page 3-22. 3SPACE FILTER NO

For details about "SPACE FILTER," see page

3-23.

3-19
 Setting Measurement Conditions

(1) Comparative calculations between images

It is possible to run calculations on the differences between the images taken by camera 1 and camera
2, as well as on the differences between the current image and the already stored reference image.

There are two types of calculation: "subtraction" and the "absolute value of the differences."
COMPARE IMGS SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
Light level in image 1 (0 to 255) -
Light level in image 2 (0 to 255)
3 Subtraction - Light level after calculation
1CALC.TYPE
2CALC.AREA
NO NO
SET (232,216)-(279,263) SUBI1-T1
However, a result less than 0 will DIFF.ABS｜I1-T1｜
give a result of 0.

The absolute | Light level in image 1 (0 to 255) -

value of the Light level in image 2 (0 to 255) |
- Light level after calculation (0 to
differences
255)

Example of comparative calculations between images

Image A Image B
Light
level 0
Light
level 180

- Subtraction
(Image A - Image B)

- Subtraction
(Image B - Image A)

- The absolute value

of the differences
( | Image A - Image B | )

3-20
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

Setting details
1. Select the camera to be used for IMG PRE-PROC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
" COMPARE IMGS" from the popup menu. 1COMPARE IMGS CAM1
NO
Then select the " COMP IMGS COND" item CAM1
2COMP IMGS COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
CAM1&2
to get to the setting screen. 3CHNG GRAY LEVEL CONTRAST MAGNI
4CONTRAST MAGNI 00.0TIMES
5SPACE FILTER SMOOTH(AVE)
6NUM.OF FILTER 1(0~5)
3

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2. Select " CALC.TYPE" and then set COMPARE IMGS SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
" CALC.AREA."
1CALC.TYPE NO
2CALC.AREA SET (232,216)-(279,263)

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

The list of settings which may be selected at item "1COMPARE IMGS" is as follows.

SELECT
CAMERA 1CALC.TYPE Contents

NO (none) Comparative calculations of differences between images will not be carried out.
CAM 1 None Comparative calculations of differences between images will not be carried out.
(camera 1)
Subtraction I1-T1 The reference image T1 (* 1) is subtracted from the image taken by camera 1.
The absolute value of the The absolute value of the difference is calculated between the reference image
difference between |I1-T1| T1 (* 1) and the image taken by camera 1.
CAM 2 None Comparative calculations of differences between images will not be carried out.
(camera 2) Subtraction I2-T2 The reference image T2 (* 1) is subtracted from the image taken by camera 2.
The absolute value of the The absolute value of the difference is calculated between the reference image
difference between |I2-T2| T2 (* 1) and the image taken by camera 2.
CAM 1&2 Subtraction I1-I2 The image taken by camera 1 is subtracted from the image taken by camera 2.
(cameras Subtraction I2-I1 The image taken by camera 2 is subtracted from the image taken by camera 1.
1 & 2)
(*2) The absolute value of the The absolute value of the difference is calculated between the image taken by
difference between |I2-I2| camera 1 and the image taken by camera 2.

The reference images T1 and T2 (*1) and the size of the areas covered by I1 and I2 (the images taken
by cameras 1 and 2) (*2) may be set in item " CALC. AREA."

3-21
 Setting Measurement Conditions

(2) Gray level change

To change the gray level, you can change the IMG PRE-PROC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"**.*TIMES" (magnification by N processing), the "
1COMPARE IMGS NO
γ+," "γ-" (γ (positive/negative) correction), the
"CHNG-L" (widening histogram), and the "INCRS- 2CHNG GRAY LEVEL NONO
CONTRAST MAGNI
M" (mid emphasis) functions. 3SPACE FILTER NOγ+
γ-
3 CHNG-L
INCRS-M

Gray level change Details

To improve the contrast (the ratio of high value gray levels to low value gray
Magnification by N levels), specify a magnification rate (00.0 to 99.9) for multiplying the image
processing data.
(**.* TIMES) - If the magnified gray level exceeds 255, the system will correct the value
to 255.
- γ positive correction: used when the mid gray level is too low.
255
Output image gray level

γ
(positive/negative) 255
Input image gray level
correction
- γ negative correction: used when the mid gray level is too high.
255
Output image gray level

255
Input image gray level

This is a method to widen the histogram of an image in which the histogram

is at part of it, thus improve its contrast.

Histogram
widening

a b Zm Zm
0 Gray level 0 Gray level

1 Bad contrast image 2 Good contrast image

Emphasize the mid gray level.

- This improves contrast while remaining the background image.
- The input image density (G) can be converted to the output image density
with the following formulas:
Input image gray level(G) Output image gray level
Mid emphasis
0 to 127 （Ｇ÷127）2×127
128 to 255 （（Ｇ−128）÷127×127）
＋127

3-22
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

(3) Space filter

Space filter includes various image manipulation IMG PRE-PROC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
processes that create more readable images by
1COMPARE IMGS NO
removing noise and distortion in the image data.
And, by extracting or emphasizing certain image 2CHNG GRAY LEVEL NO
features, it is easier to evaluate or identify target NO
objects by converting the images into standard 3SPACE FILTER SMOOTH(AVE) SMOOTH(AVE)
4NUM.OF FILTER 7(0~5) SMOOTH(CENT)
patterns.
In the IV-S30J, you can select from "smoothing
EMPHAS EDGE
EXTRACT EDGE
3
(average, center)," "edge emphasis," "edge HORIZ-EDGE
VERT-EDGE
extraction," "horizontal edge," and "vertical edge."
Item Contents
- Specify the median pixel gray level from - Display smooth images with
Smoothing the surrounding 3 x 3 area. decreased noise.
(center) - Since noise elements are difficult to - Used to eliminated surface
select, they will not affect the output. flaws and unevenness in the
reflected light caused by
- Specify the average pixel gray protrusions or dents.
Smoothing level from the surrounding 3 x 3 area. - This type of smoothing
(average) - Since noise elements are included in the (averaging) is faster than the
average, the noise will affect the output. median smoothing.
Edge - Display images with sharp boundaries between brighter and darker areas.
emphasis - Used to stabilize and create a binary outline around unclear objects.
- Display images after extracting and
Edge
clarifying the boundaries between the
extraction
brighter and darker areas.
- Used to measure objects with
Horizontal - Horizontal edge extraction: Display only
low contrast.
edge the horizontal boundaries of an object.
Vertical - Vertical edge extraction: Display only the
edge vertical boundaries of an object.
Example of an image
- No - Smoothing

- Edge emphasis - Edge extraction (All)

- Edge extraction (horizontal) - Edge extraction (vertical)

3-23
 Setting Measurement Conditions

[5] Image adjustment

How to set the image adjustment function
SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
Select "IMAGE-ADJ" on the "SELECT OBJECT
TYPE COND" screen and press the SET key. OBJECT TYPE COND
TYPE00 1ADJ.IMG GRAY(CAM1)
TYPE RUN COND 2ADJ.COND(CAM1)
IMAGE-ADJ 3ADJ.IMG GRAY(CAM2)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 4ADJ.COND(CAM2)
3 + MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

Shading correction
This process removes unevenness from images IMAGE-ADJ SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
that have gray level unevenness caused by an NO
illumination. 1ADJ.IMG GRAY(CAM1) YES YES
2ADJ-COND(CAM1) (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3ADJ.IMG GRAY(CAM2) NO

Adjustment condition
To set the adjustment conditions for gray level ADJ.IMG GRAY SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
corrections, select " ADJ-COND" and then press 1ADJ.MODE SUBTRACTING
the SET key to show the sub menu. 2ADJ.AREA SET (224,208)-(287,271)
3SET STD.GRAY LV SET (224,208)-(287,271) GRAY(000)

SUBTRACTING
DECREASING
FILTERING

Correction mode Details

Divide a scanned image with the reference image that expresses changes of dark and bright as a
whole, and correct the brightness throughout the image.
SUBTRACTING {(Each gray level of scanned image) X reference gray level} / (Each gray level of reference image)
- Divide a scanned image that is shot under the uneven light by a blank image that is shot under the
same light condition, you can change the image to the one that is shot under the even light.

Subtract a scanned image with the reference image that expresses changes of dark and bright as a
whole, and correct the brightness throughout the image.
DECREASING {(Each gray level of scanned image) + reference gray level} - (Each gray level of reference image)
- Subtract a scanned image that is shot under the uneven light by a blank image that is shot under
the same light condition, you can change the image to the one that is shot under the even light.

Filter a scanned image with the maximum value, and then with an average value, to make a
brightness image.
FILTERING [Max. value filter: Max. gray level of 3 x 3]
- [Average value filter: Average gray level of 3 x 3]
- Use this filter when a brightness distribution image (reference image) for the scanned image
cannot be obtained.

3-24
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

[6] Binary image mask

Use the binary image mask when an object to measure by binary conversion cannot be measured using
rectangle, circle, or ellipse window.
Mask a scanned image (AND) with the registered binary image.
Binary image mask Gray level in the scanned image Gray level output after masking
0 to 255
1 0 to 255
(gray level in the scanned image) 3
0 0 to 255 0 (black fixed)

Measurement programs which are affected by this setting

Area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by binary conversion, object identification by
binary conversion

Setting method
1. On the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE *
F C1 BRT
NUM-OF-MASK 1
screen, select "MEAS CND" (measurement
1WINDOW BINARY-IMG-MASK NUM-OF-MASK 2
conditions) and press the SET key. The MEA- 2REGISTER NO. 0 NUM-OF-MASK 4
CND screen will appear. Select " WINDOW" 3REGISTER EXIST NO BINARY-IMG-MASK
and press the SET key. Select "BINARY-IMG- 4MASK BINARY IMG NO POLYGON
MASK" from the popup menu.
0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
REGISTER NO.
×
5BINARY AREA

2. Highlight the " MASK BINARY IMG" item MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
and press the SET key. A popup menu will
1WINDOW BINARY-IMG-MASK
appear. Select "REF-IMG" or "MANUAL" and
2REGISTER NO. 0
the " BIN IMG MASK" line will appear. 3REGISTER EXIST NO NO
Selecting "REF-IMG" See page 3-26 to 27. 4MASK BINARY IMG REF-IMG REF-IMG
Selecting "MANUAL" See page 3-28 to 29. 5BIN IMG MASK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU) MANUAL
REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
6BINARY AREA ×

3. Select " BIN IMG MASK" (binary image MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
masking condition) and press the SET key.
1WINDOW BINARY-IMG-MASK
The, MASK BINARY IMG screen will appear.
2REGISTER NO. 0
3REGISTER EXIST NO
4MASK BINARY IMG REF-IMG
5BIN IMG MASK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)

REGISTR NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

6BIN AREA COND ×

4. Here you can set the masking conditions. First MASK BINARY IMGCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
move the cursor to " MASK AREA" and press
1MASK AREA SET (232,216) ~ (279,263)
the SET key. Specify and confirm the position 2THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100 (0~255) ]
and size of a masking area. On the 3MASK INVERT B/W NO NO
" THRESHOLD" line, adjust the threshold 4MASK NOISE FILTR EXPD. → CONTR. EXPD. → CONTR.
value between 0 and 255. At " MASK 5NUM.OF MASK FILT EXPD.0 CONTR.0 (0~5) CONTR. → EXPD
INVERT B/W," select whether or not to invert
the masking area. When a mask noise
removing method is specified in " MASK
NOISE FILTR ," the " NUM.OF MASK FILT” MASK AREA
(number of times to filter) line will appear. Set
the number of times from 0 to 5.

3-25
 Setting Measurement Conditions

Setting example
When " MASK BINARY IMG" is set to "REF-IMG."
Shown below is an example of how to specify a binary image mask for a star shape.

1) Store a binary image mask on the "BINARY IMG MASK" menu (mask setting =
standard) shown above.
1. Specify the mask outline for the object to be measured.

Mask outline

2. For correcting minor positional deviations, store an enlarged image as

the binary image mask.
- Positional relation between the stored binary image
mask and the object to be measured.
Binary image mask
Star-shaped binary image
mask (outside boundary)

Star-shaped object to be
measured (inside boundary)

3. Return to the "TYPE MEAS COND" menu. Select "MEAS-COND" in the

"5MEAS-BIN-AREA" item

2) Settings on the "TYPE MEAS COND" menu

REGIST COND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
1. Select "YES" from the popup menu at "
REGISTER EXIST." 1WINDOW BINARY-IMG-MASK
2. Select " " (00) at the " BINARY AREA" item 2REGISTER NO. 0
and press the SET key to bring up the "REG 3REGISTER EXIST YES YES
COND" menu. 4MASK BINARY IMG REF-IMG NO
5BIN IMG MASK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)

REGISTR NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

6BINARY AREA ○

SET=SELECT(YES/NO) ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

3-26
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

3) Setting the binary area conditions

■MASK REGIST.
■BINARY PROCESS
■BINRY NOISE FILT

REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

RECTANGLE
3
1MEAS SHAPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE
2MEAS AREA SET (224,208)~(287,271) ELLIPSE
3THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255) ] THRESHOLD VAL AUTO-REG RESET F C1 BRT
4INVERT B/W NO NO
5MASK SHAPE YES 1U.LM 255(0~255)
6MASK AREA (224,208)~(287,271) 2L.LM 100(0~255)
7BINARY PROCESS FIXED
8BINARY NOISE FILT NO

FIXED
THRES-ADJ(VAR-DEFF)
THRES-ADJ(VAR-RATE)

NO
EXPD.→CONTR.
CONTR.→EXPD

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMGTRG=FUNC

RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT

SET=CHNG ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

1UP.L (224,208)
2LO.R (287,271)
3MOVE

1. Specify a measurement area smaller than the mask area and specify the binary conditions.

Measuring area

2. Return to the MAIN OPS MENU.

4) Measure the binary area

Captured image Binary mask image (registered in step 1-2)

Image after executing

White dots (six) a measurement

- The white dots will be converted to

black dots by applying the binary
image mask.

3-27
 Setting Measurement Conditions

When " MASK BINARY IMG" is set to "MANUAL."

Shown below is an example of a binary image MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
mask that matches the following shape (an 8
pointed star). 1WINDOW BINARY-IMG-MASK
2REGISTER NO. 0 NO
3REGISTER EXIST NO REF-IMG
4MASK BINARY IMG MANUAL MANUAL

3
0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
REGISTER NO.
×
5BIN AREA COND

1. Select " MASK BINARY IMG" and press the SET key. Select "MANUAL" from the popup
menu.

2. Select " BIN IMG MASK" (binary mask MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
conditions) and press the SET key twice.
1WINDOW BINARY-IMG-MASK
2REGISTER NO. 0
3REGISTER EXIST NO
4MASK BINARY IMG REF-IMG
5BIN IMG MASK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)

REGISTR NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

6BIN AREA COND ×

3. The "MASK BINARY IMG" screen will MASK BINARY IMG SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
appear. Select " MASK AREA" and press 1MASK AREA SET
the SET key twice. 2MASK IMVERT B/W NO
3MASK REGIST. REG DISP

4. The "POLYGON" setting screen will POLYGON RESET MOVE RETURN F C1 BRT
appear.
1POINT01 (255,255)

X:224 Y:208

3-28
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

5. Select "0" using the up and down keys and MASK BINARY IMGCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
then select "MOVE" using the left and right
1PO01T01 (255,255)
keys. Finally, press the SET key.
2PO02T01 (254,226)
3PO03T01 (221,226)
4PO04T01 (221,251)
5PO05T01 (274,276)
6PO06T01 (274,247)
7PO07T01
8PO08T01
(257,247)
()
3

X:256 Y:240

6. Move vertex 02 to 08 a little outside of the MASK BINARY IMGCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
first point on the star using the up, down,
left, and right keys, and then press the SET 1PO01T01 (255,255)
2PO02T01 (254,226)
key.
3PO03T01 (221,226)
4PO04T01 (221,251)
5PO05T01 (274,276)
6PO06T01 (274,247)
7PO07T01 (257,247)
8PO08T01 ()

X:124 Y:276

7. After creating a mask area, press the ESC MASK BINARY IMG SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
key to return to the "MASK BINARY IMG" 1MASK AREA SET
screen. Select " MASK REGIST" and 2MASK IMVERT B/W NO
press the SET key. The cursor will move to 3MASK REGIST. REG DISP
the "REG" position. Press the SET key to
register the mask.
- The area inside the mask will change to
white. To invert the inside and outside
shades (change white to black and black
to white), select "YES" on the " MASK
INVERT B/W" line.

3-29
 Setting Measurement Conditions

[7] Position correction

Based on the positional deviation data measurement 0 (positional deviation measurement), the correction
of the image coordinates is dealt with using measurements 1 to 4.
(1) Correction details
The types of position correction available are: XY correction, angular correction (standard) and
angular correction (high precision)

3 Type Details
The position is adjusted according to the amount of deviation in X and
Y at the first point (model 0) detected in measurement 0.
There are three correction directions: X axis correction, Y axis
XY correction correction and X and Y axis correction.
- X axis correction-- Adjusted misalignment in the X axis
- Y axis correction-- Adjusted misalignment in the Y axis
The position is adjusted because of a detected angular deviation q in
rotation [2-point search/2-point edge/1-point search + 1-point edge]
Angular correction from measurement 0.
(standard) - When "YES" is selected in the DTECT ANGL item specifying a "1P-
SCH" or a "1P-SCH+1P-EDGE" in measurement 0, the position will be
corrected according to the angle detected.
The position is adjusted because of a detected angular deviation q in
rotation [2-point search/2-point edge/1-point search + 1-point edge]
from measurement 0. The high precision angular correction settings
Angular correction allows the IV-S30 to display a very precisely corrected image. But, this
(high precision) selection lowers rotation processing speed.
- When "YES" is selected in the DTECT ANGL item specifying a "1P-
SCH" or a "1P-SCH+1P-EDGE" in measurement 0, the position will be
corrected according to the angle detected.

[Example of a comparison between standard and high precision angular correction]

Scanned image

Image after correction

An image with a jagged edge

An image with smooth edges

will be created.

will be created.

Scanned image (Standard) (High precision)

q image after angular correction

3-30
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

(2) Operation setting details POSI-CORRECT SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

Select the "POSI-CORRECT" condition item on the
"SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND" screen and 1CORRECTION REG. 2ND STAGE CORRECTION
2MODE(1ST) ANGLE-ADJ.(STANDARD)
press the SET key to enter the correction. NO
3X CORRECT ADJ.(1ST) YES
4X CORRECTION 1ST STAGE CORRECTION
REG0(0~7) MDL0
5Y CORRECT ADJ.(1ST) 2ND STAGE CORRECTION
YES
6Y CORRECTION REG0(0~7) MDL0
7ADJUST ANGL.(1ST) NO
8ADJUST ANGL
YES
REG0(0~7) MDL0 XY-ADJ. 3
ANGLE-ADJ.(STANDARD)
9MODE(2ND) XY-ADJ. ANGLE-ADJ.(HIGH)
0X CORRECT ADJ.(2ND) YES
qX CORRECTION REG0(0~7) MDL0
wY CORRECT ADJ.(2ND) YES NO
eY CORRECTION REG0(0~7) MDL0 XY-ADJ.

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Setting procedure

No XY ADJ. ANGLE ADJ. (STANDARD HIGH)

Mode 0 - X CORRECTION (no/yes) - X CORRECTION (no/yes)
- Y CORRECTION (no/yes) - Y CORRECTION (no/yes)
- ADJUST ANGL (no/yes)

No XY ADJ. ANGLE ADJ. (STANDARD HIGH)

- X CORRECTION (no/yes) - X CORRECTION (no/yes)
Mode 1 - Y CORRECTION (no/yes) - Y CORRECTION (no/yes)
- ADJUST ANGL (no/yes)

(3) Correction example

Example of correcting the first X and Y point
1. Amount of correction (X2-X1, Y2-Y1) specified by measurement 0 (positional deviation
measurement)

Coordinates (X1, Y1) of object in the reference image (model 0)

Target object coordinates (X2, Y2)

[Measurement results]
- Detected coordinates: (X2, Y2)
Y2-Y1 - Deviation amount: X2-X1, Y2-Y1

Search area

X2-X1
2. Measuring a point using measurement 1

Y2-Y1

Point

X2-X1
3-31
 Setting Measurement Conditions

Example of angular correction

1. Detection of the amount of angular deviation (using measurement 0, 2 point search
(positional deviation measurement).
- Registration image

Reference image
(model 0)
3 Detected coordinates
(model 0)
Search area
(model 0)
Reference image
(model 1)
Detected coordinates
(model 1)
Search area
(model 1)

- Measurement image Detecting the amount of angular deviation

Detected coordinates
(model 0)
θ
Position of registration image

Detected coordinates
(model 1)

2. Performing measurement 1 to 4 (of distance and angle measurement) on an image that has
been rotated around its center by the amount of angular deviation detected in step 1.
- Image that has been rotated around its center in step 1

3-32
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

[8] Title registration

A title for a object type number can be entered and saved when the object type number is displayed on the
screen.

Purpose
The title is used to make it easier to control the details of the settings for the object type.

Title characters 3
A maximum of 16 letters and symbols may be entered.

Operation method
Select "OBJECT TYPE COND" on the "MAIN SELECT OBFECT TYPE COND F C1 DRK
MENU" screen and then select "TYPE00" (the cur- OBJECT TYPE COND
rent type). Then press the "TRG/BRT" key. Select + TYPE00
"TITLE" from the popup menu and press the SET OPS-MENU
key. SAVE
COPY
PASTE
DEL
SPECIFY NUMBER
TITLE

STORE OBJCT STR OBJ TITLE SCREEN SAVE F C1 DRK

Setting details
TITLE
A to Z
These characters and symbols are A B C D E F G H I J K L M
0 to 9 used to enter the title name. N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
= to > AREA＿ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SP (space bar) This is used to make spaces. - - ( ) < > SP
←→ These are used to move the cursor. ← → DEL END
This is used to delete the character
DEL. (delete) to the right of the cursor.

END Exit the title registration screen.

The title that has been entered will be displayed
in the top left corner of the operation screen and
"SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND" screen.

Operation screen SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND screen

(TYPE00) AREA F C1 DRK SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
V*.**
OK OBJECT TYPE COND
TYPE00(AREA)
MEAS XXXXms TYPE RUN COND
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION IMAGE-ADJ
MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0(POSI-DEVIATION)
IMG PRE-PROC
+ MEAS CND
EVALUATION COND
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND

3-33
 Setting Measurement Conditions

3-3 Input & Output / System settings

[1] Illuminance (light level) monitor
(1) Purpose
1. Allows the system to monitor changes the lighting of the environment
If the light level exceeds the preset lighting range, it will be regarded as a change in the
environment and "OVR ILLM RANGE" will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
2. Automatic adjustment of the threshold values used for binary conversions can follow
3 changes in the lighting environment.
The threshold value is modified from the user's setting due to changes in the actual brightness
measured in the environment.

(2) Applications
Used when the level of illumination changed due to changes in voltage or when the influence of
sunlight in the workplace cannot be ignored.

(3) Setting procedure

Select "OBJECT TYPE COND" → "TYPE00" (current type) and "OBJ-TYPE SYS," in that order, on
the "MAIN MENU" screen.

1. Select " MNTR LIGHT LVL (CAM1)" (monitor OBJ-TYPE SYS. SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
light level). Select "YES" from the popup menu.
1HALT ON NG MEAS YES NO
Then, the " LIGHT LV COND" item will 2MNTR LIGHT LVL(CAM1) YES YES
appear on the screen. 3LIGHT LV COND (TO NEXT SUB-BENU)
4MNTR LIGHT LVL(CAM2) YES
5LIGHT LV COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6MOVE ALL WINDOW (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)

2. Select " LIGHT LV COND" and press the SET LIGHT LV COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
key. The "LIGHT LV COND" screen and
1SIZE Y08(4~32)X08(4~65)
monitoring window will appear.
2POSITION (248,232)
3THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM255 L.LM000(0~255)
3. Press the SEL key and move the cursor to the MEAS.AVG.GRA=000.0
upper function menu. Set the image mode to 4REG AVG.GRAY LV EXEC REG.AVG.GRAY=000.0
"T" (Through).

Monitor window

SEL=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

3-34
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

4. Select item " SIZE", and item " POSITION", using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key. Then, set the size and position of the monitoring window using the direction keys.
- The monitoring window should be placed in a location with medium brightness, which does not
contain any objects to be measured.
- The monitor window is a rectangle 4 to 32 pixels tall and 4 to 64 pixels wide (se in multiples of 4
pixels). The monitor window can be moved one pixel at a time.
- The average light level in the monitoring window is displayed on "MEAS.AVG.GRAYS (average
measured light level) in item ." 3
[When monitoring changes in the lighting environment] ... If not, go to item 6.
5. Select item " THRESHOLD VALUE", using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Select the upper and lower limits using the left and right keys, and set the light level range (0 to
255) using the up and down keys. Then, press the SET key.
When the average light level in the monitoring window is out of the preset light level range,
"OVR ILLM. RANGE (light level over range)" will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.

[When the threshold value for binary conversion is automatically modified to take into
account changes in the lighting environment] .... If not, go to item 8.
6. Press the SEL key to enter freeze frame the image.
- "F.IMG (freeze)" will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
- Before reading and storing the next average light level sample, it is necessary to enter the freeze
frame.
7. Select item " REG AVG. GRAY LVL (average light level registration)," using the up and down
keys, and press the SET key twice. When the SET key is pressed again, the "REG. AVG. GRAYS
(average light level)" will be registered.
- This average light level is required when threshold value correction is selected in the binary
conversion method.
- If the average light level has not been registered, you will see "error 22: BIN MON. LIGHT LVL
NOT SET (the light level check function has not been enabled)."
- The registered light level is the reference value used when threshold values are modified.
- If the current screen is not a frozen image, "CHANGE TO FREEZE MODE (change to freeze)"
will be displayed.
8. Move the cursor to the upper function menu by pressing the TRG/BRT key and select the "SAVE"
item using the left and right arrow keys. Then press the SET key.
- A message "SAVE DATA? (YES = [SET], NO = [ESC])" will appear on the screen. Press the SET
key to save the data.

After the measurement monitoring function is turned ON and images have been captured, the
lighting monitoring function set above will be active.

3-35
 Setting Measurement Conditions

[2] Setting the shutter speed

The shutter speed can be set independently for each object type.
Since the shutter speed can be set continuously in the range of 1/30 to 1/10,000 of a second, very fine
adjustment is possible.
- If you want to measure moving objects and increase the image processing speed, set the shutter
speed to around 1/1000 or 1/2000 seconds. However, if you use a faster shutter speed than you
need, very bright lights will be necessary, and bright lighting is not economical.
3 - For details about the relationship between the brightness of objects (objects to be measured) and
the shutter speed, see IV-S30J User's Manual (Introduction and Hardware) "5-1 [2] Illumination and
shutter speed."
[Example]
- When the shutter speed is slow - When the shutter speed is fast
(1/60 of a second) (1/1000 of a second)

The object is blurred across the screen. The object is frozen on the screen.

Setting procedure
On the MAIN MENU screen, select "OBJECT TYPE COND," "TYPE00" (current type) and "OBJ-TYPE
I/O," in that order.

You can specify any value in the range of 1/30 to 1/ OBJ-TYPE I/O SCREEN SAVE F C1 DRK
10000 seconds (initial value 1/60) for the shutter 1TRIG CCD START BIN
speed. 2CCD TRIG COND (TO NEXT SUB MENU)
1. Move the cursor to the " SHUTTER SPEED" 3SHUTTER SPEED 1/00060(1/30~1/10000)
4SERIAL OUTPUT ANY
item on the OBJECT TYPE I/O using the up
and down keys, and press the SET key. 5CAMNO NO 1(1∼2)
2. Press the SET key again, and move the cursor 6CALIBRATION NO
to the digit you want, using the left and right
keys.

1/ 00060

This cursor will move to the left and right.

3. Set the value using the up and down keys.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set each digit.
After setting all of the digits, press the SET key.

3-36
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

[3] Copying
When there are many common parameters between object types, it is most efficient to access those
existing sets of parameters in order to copy and then modify them.
The parameters of a previously specified object type are copied into another object type, after which they
can be modified.

The source of the copy The target of the copy

The measurement conditions of The measurement conditions of the target 3
the source object type. (The data object type. (The data is used to simplify
is copied from flash memory) setting the target object's parameters)

Operation procedure
SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 DRK
On the "MAIN MENU" screen, select "OBJECT
TYPE COND" and then "TYPE00" (current type). At OBJECT TYPE COND
+ TYPE00
this point, press the TRG/BRT key to display the
OPS-MENU
popup menu. Select "COPY" from the popup menu SAVE
and press the SET key. COPY
PASTE
DEL
SPECIFY NUMBER
TITLE

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Notes

- Do not disconnect the power while the IV-S30J is copying.

- Once data has been corrupted it will be necessary to start after initializing the setting, all over
again. Unless this is done it will not be possible to restart the machine.
- The reference images used for the gray scale search function are not copied with the
operation above. Make sure reset them.

3-37
 Setting Measurement Conditions

[4] Halt on NG measurement

You can stop all measurements when an NG image OBJ-TYPE SYS. SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
(according to the final evaluation results) occurs while
1HALT ON NG MEAS YES NO
operating the IV-S30J. YES
2MNTR LIGHT LVL(CAM1) YES
Select " HALT ON NG MEAS" on the "OBJECT 3LIGHT LV COND (TO NEXT SUB-BENU)
NO(NG MEAS DISP)
TYPE SYS." menu. 4MNTR LIGHT LVL(CAM2) YES
5LIGHT LV COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6MOVE ALL WINDOW
3 (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)

1HALT ON NG MEAS Description

Even if an NG image (final evaluation result) is detected while
NO operating the IV-S30J, the system will continue making
measurements.
When an NG image is detected (according to the final
YES evaluation result) while operating the IV-S30J, the controller
will stop making measurements.
Even if an NG image (final evaluation result) is detected while
operating the IV-S30J, the system will continue making
NO (NG MEAS DISP)
measurements. But, it displays the occurred NG
measurements at first.

Shown below is an example of an NG image that occurred during measurement 1.

(Setting whether to stop measurements when an NG occurs)

"No" "Yes"
Wait for trigger input

Processing measurement 0, camera 1

Processing measurement 0, camera 2

NG occurred Processing measurement 1

- Stops processes
Processing measurement 2 of measurements 2
to 4

Processing measurement 3

Processing measurement 4

3-38
 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type

[5] Window group move

All the window positions set in the measurement OBJ-TYPE SYS. SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
programs for the same object type number can be
1HALT ON NG MEAS YES
shifted horizontally by a specified amount as a group.
2MNTR LIGHT LVL(CAM1) YES
[Example of use] Shift the coordinate positions used 3LIGHT LV COND (TO NEXT SUB-BENU)
as data for another object type. 4MNTR LIGHT LVL(CAM2) YES
(After copying the data between object types, move 5LIGHT LV COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
the windows as a group.)
To set the amount, use " MOVE ALL WINDOW" in
6MOVE ALL WINDOW (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3
the" OBJECT TYPE SYS" menu.

1. While " SELECT CAMERA" is selected, press MOVE ALL WIN SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
the up and down arrow keys to select either
1SELECT CAMERA CAM1
"CAM1" or "CAM2." Then press the SET key. 2STR COORD POSI MOVE(256,240) COORDINATES STORED
3MOVE ALL WINDOW MOVE(256,240) EXEC

2. Select " STR COORD POSI" (store coordinate position) and press the SET key. Then select
"MOVE" by using the left and right arrow keys and finally, press the SET key.

3. Move the cursor (solid line) to the original coordinates before the move using the up, down, left, and
right keys, and press the SET key.

4. Select "COORDINATES STORED" using the left and right keys, and press the SET key. After that
press the ESC key.
The coordinates before the move are now registered.

5. Select " MOVE ALL WINDOW" using the up and down keys and press the SET key. Select
"MOVE" using the left and right keys and press the SET key.

6. Move the cursor (dotted line) to the new coordinates you are moving to use the up, down, left, and
right keys and press the SET key.

Distance to
move A
Coordinates
Coordinates of of the new
the original

7. Select "EXEC" (execute) using the left and right keys and press the SET key.
All the windows registered to the same object type will be shifted horizontally at the same time by the
distance between the original coordinates to the new coordinates. After the move is complete, a
"Window group move is complete" message will be displayed.

Distance to move A

New window
Original window

- When some part of the window to be moved will move outside of the image display area, the "Out
of range" message will be displayed together with the measurement number and register number.
In this case, select "Continue" or "Halt."
If "Continue" is selected, the window will be shifted to the limit within the image display area.

3-39
 Positional Deviation Measurement

Chapter 4: Positional Deviation Measurement

4-1 Outline
The gray scale search function and edge detection function* make possible measuring
Purpose positional deviation as well as the absolute position.
- It is also possible to detect the position of sub-pixel units with great accuracy.
- A rotation angle of 360ﾟ can be detected. (When a one point gray search is selected).
Application Used to determine the position of machine parts and substrates.
[Determining the location of the positioning (the fiducial mark) mark that 4
identifies the position of the substrate]
(1) 1 point search: Detecting the deviation in position in X and Y directions
Reference image: Center coordinates (X1,Y1)
Inspection Image: Center coordinates (X2,Y2)

[Measured result]
Y2-Y1 Center coordinates: (X2,Y2)
Amount of deviation: X2-X1, Y2-Y1

Search area

X2-X1
(2) 2 point search: Determining positional deviation in X and Y directions as well
as rotational deviation
Reference image a: Center coordinates (Xa1,Ya1)
Inspection image a: Center coordinates (Xa2,Ya2)

Reference image b: Center coordinates (Xb1,Yb1)

Ya2-Ya1
Example Inspection image b: Center coordinates (Xb2,Yb2)

Search area
(image a)
Yb2-Yb1
Xa2-Xa1

Angular deviation: θ
Xb2-Xb1 Search area (image b)
[Measured results]
- Center coordinates of image a: (Xa2,Ya2)
- Amount of deviation of image a: Xa2-Xa1, Ya2-Ya1
- Center coordinates of image b: (Xb2,Yb2)
- Amount of deviation of image b: Xb2-Xb1, Yb2-Yb1
- Deviation angle: θ
* Gray scale search / edge detection function
Gray scale search: Compares a workpiece image with the 256-level gray-scale
reference image to find an area that matches the reference image.
- See page G-6 of the User’s Manual (Instruction & Hardware).
Edge detection: Finds the boundary between light and dark areas in an image.
- See page G-3 of the User’s Manual (Instruction & Hardware).
- The deviation angle θ, determined in the 2-point search, is used to readjust the
rotation of the image for measurements 1 to 4.

4-1
 Positional Deviation Measurement

4-2 Setting operation

Setting the measurement conditions
Select "MAIN COND" -> "OBJECT
TYPE COND" -> "TYPE00" ->"MEA SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND MEASUREMENT0 SCREEN COND SAVE
ME
CND (CAMERA1) " -> "MEAS0," in OBJECT TYPE COND
1MEAS SELECTION NO
that order. TYPE00
POSI-DEVIATION
TYPE RUN COND
On the " MEAS SELECTION" line, IMAGE-ADJ
select "POSI-DEVIATION" from the MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
4 popup menu. Press the ESC key to MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
return to the OBJECT TYPE COND MEAS(NEW) SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND
(menu tree) screen, and select the ++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
OBJECT TYPE COND
"MEAS CND" item to enter the MEAS FINAL NUM. CALC
TYPE00
FINAL OUTPUT COND
CND screen. OBJ-TYPE I/0 TYPE RUN COND
For details, see "Chapter 8: OBJ-TYPE SYS. IMAGE-ADJ
TYPE(NEW) MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
Setting examples using the menu MEAS0 (POSI-DEVATION)
tree" in Introduction and IMG PRE-PROC
Hardware. + MEAS-CND

Note: "POSI-DEVIATION" (positional deviation) measurement can be specified in the "MEAS0"

(measurement 0) and "MEAS1" (measurement 1) to "MEAS4" (measurement 4) functions. If
you choose "MEAS(NEW)," the smallest available measurement number will be chosen
automatically ("MEAS1" to "MEAS4").

DTECT PRECISON
MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
Select detection precision. You can select one of two
1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
levels (standard/high), according to your conditions, 2REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7)
STANDARD
HIGH
the desired precision level for detection results, and 3MODE 1P-SCH
4DTECT ANGL ±15°
the detection speed. 5ANGLE UNIT 10 NO
For details, see page 3-9.  REGISTER NO.
0001020304 05 060708 0910111213 1415
1P-SCH
6MDL 0 S ××××××× 2P-SCH
7MDL 1 ×××××××× 1P-EDGE
REGISTER NO.
2P-EDGE
Enter a register number. When making positional 1P-SCH+1P-EDGE
deviation measurements, you can select any register
from 0 to 7 (a total of 8 registers).
NO
±15°
MODE
±30°
Select a mode for detection. ±45°
The details of each mode are as follows. 360°

SET=SELECT A MENU FOR ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Detection Mode Details Usable models

NO (None) Does not detect.
1P-SCH Detect the positional deviation of one point in the scanned image
Model 0 only
(1-point search) compared to a single reference image, after performing a gray search.
2P-SCH Detect the positional deviation of two points in the scanned image
Model 0 and 1
(2-point search) compared to two reference images, after performing a gray search.
Detect the positional deviation of one point in the scanned image
1P-EDGE
compared to a single reference image, after performing edge Model 0 only
(1-point edge)
detection.
2P-EDGE Detect the positional deviation of two points in the scanned image
Model 0 and 1
(2-point edge) compared to two reference images, after performing edge detection.
1P-SCH + 1P-EDGE
Detect the positional deviation of two points, one point after performing
(1-point search and Model 0 and 1
a gray search and one point after performing edge detection.
1-point edge)
Gray search See page 3-9.
Edge detection See page 3-14.

4-2
 Positional Deviation Measurement

DTECT ANGL and ANGLE UNIT

When the "1P-SCH" or "1P-SCH + 1P-EDGE" is selected in " MODE," you can specify angle
detection.
For details about angle detection, see page 4-12.
Select a detection range on the " DTECT ANGL" line and select the units at " ANGLE UNIT."

REGISTER NO. ( MDL 0, MDL 1)

The specified modes are displayed for each register number on these lines. When a 1-point search
or 1-point edge is specified, only " MDL 0" will be available. When a 2-point search, 2-point edge,
or 1-point search and 1-point edge is specified, " MDL 1" is also available.
The "S" in the table indicates a gray search, and the "E" indicates edge detection. "X" means not 4
used.

• An example of mode settings

  REGISTER NO. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 S：Gray search

6MDL0 ＳＳＳＥＥ××× E：Edge detection
7MDL1 Ｓ×ＥＥ×××× ×：No setting
REGISTER0 : 2P-SCH
REGISTER1 : 1P-SCH
REGISTER2 : 1P-SCH + 1P-EDGE
REGISTER3 : 2P-EDGE
REGISTER4 : 1P-EDGE

How to set the register conditions

How to enter the REG-COND setting screen

There are three methods for getting to the REG-COND setting screen.

1) On the MEAS CND setting screen, move the MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
cursor to " MDL 0" or " MDL 1" and press
the SET key. The cursor will move into the 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
2REGISTER NO. 0(0~7)
table. Move the cursor to the "S" or "E" column 3MODE 1P-SCH+1P-EDGE
and press the SET key. 4DTECT ANGL NO
Note: If you press the SET key in the "X"
column, the setting will be invalid. REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 1011 12131415
5MDL 0
S
6MDL 1
About "S" See pages 4-4 to 6.
About "E" See pages 4-7 to 8. IMG PRE-PROC
REG-COND(S)
REG-COND(E)
2) On the MEAS CND setting screen, press the POSITION CORRECTION
TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper EVALUATION
function menu. Select the "COND" item and DST&ANGL
then select the "REG-COND(S)" or "REG- NUM-CALC
COND(E)" item and press the SET key. OUT

About "REG-COND(S)" SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

See pages 4-4 to 6.

About "REG-COND(E) "
See pages 4-7 to 8.

4-3
 Positional Deviation Measurement

3) On the menu tree, move the cursor to the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
"MEAS CND" item, and press the right arrow OBJECT TYPE COND 1REGISTER NO.
key. The sub menu which contains the "REG-   + TYPE00 2MEAS SHAPE(MDL0)
COND(S)" and "REG-COND(E)" items will TYPE01 3SEARCH AREA(MDL0)
TYPE RUN COND 4DTECT MODE(MDL0)
appear. Move the cursor to either of these 5SEARCH DIR(MDL0)
IMAGE-ADJ
items and press the SET key. MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 6THRESHOLDS(MDL0)
+ MEAS0(POSI-DEVIATION) 7REF COORD(MDL0)
8MEAS SHAPE(MDL1)
About "REG-COND(S)" + IMG PRE-PROC
9SEARCH AREA(MDL1)
MEAS CND 0DTECT MODE(MDL1)
See pages 4-4 to 6.
REG-COND(S) qSEARCH DIR(MDL1)
About "REG-COND(E)" REG-COND(E) wTHRESHOLDS(MDL1)
4 See pages 4-7 to 8. EVALUATION COND eREF COORD(MDL1)
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

[1] Set the register conditions for a gray search

MEAS SHAPE
Select a window shape to be used for the REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
positional deviation measurement.
1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7)
Select "RECTANGLE," "X-LINE," or "Y-LINE" 2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0) RECTANGLE RECTANGLE
from the popup menu on the " MEAS SHAPE" 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0) SET（224.208)∼(287.271） X-LINE
4SEARCH ARE (MDL0)  SET（216.200)∼(295.279） Y-LINE
line.
Specify coordinates for
the upper left and lower
right corners. The window
RECTANGLE
will be a rectangular area +
defined by these
coordinates.
Search area
Length of a line from the
Object to measure
X-LINE start point to the end point
on the X axis.
Length of a line from the
Y-LINE start point to the end point SEL=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
on the Y axis.

REFIMG ARE
Move the cursor to " REFIMG ARE(MDL0)" REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
and press the SET key. When the SET item is
highlighted, press the SET key again to bring up 1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7)
2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0) RECTANGLE
the setting screen. 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0) SET（224.208)∼(287.271）
4SEARCH ARE (MDL0)  SET（216.200)∼(295.279）

Search area

Object to measure

SEL=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

4-4
 Positional Deviation Measurement

When a rectangle is selected Setting screen (RECTANGLE)

Specify the upper left and lower right corners of RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
the reference image area. Move the cursor to the MDL 0
1UP.L (224.208)
" UP.L" and press the SET key. Lines for the X 2LO.R (287.271)
and Y axes will appear on the reference image 3MOVE
area (shown as a solid line). Move the X and Y 4REFERENCE IMG
lines to the desired position using the up/down/
left/right arrow keys to set the coordinates for the
UP.L
upper left corner. When correct, press the SET
key. Search area
- To leave the coordinates at their previous REG-IMG 4
position, press the ESC key.
LO.R
Next, move the cursor to the" LO.R" and press
the SET key to determine the lower right corner of Reference image area
the rectangle. The range inside the rectangle of
the solid line becomes the reference image.
X:224 Y:208

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

When a horizontal line is selected Setting screen (X-LINE)

Specify the start and end points on the X axis. X-LINE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
MDL 0
Specify the start and end points using the up/ 1S.PT (199.245)
down/left/right arrow keys. The points will move 2E.PT (328.245)
3MOVE
along the X axis (while keeping the same Y 4REFERENCE IMG
coordinate).
Note: Specify a search area longer than the
reference image area. Specifying a Search area
Start point
shorter search area may cause an error
message to be displayed.

Reference image area End point

X:194 Y:344

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

When a vertical line is selected Setting screen (Y-LINE)

Y-LINE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
Specify the start and end points on the Y axis. MDL 0
Specify the start and end points using the up/ 1S.PT (194.175)
down/left/right arrow keys. The points will move 2E.PT (194.344)
3MOVE End point
along the Y axis (while keeping the same X 4REFERENCE IMG
coordinate).
Note: Specify a search area longer than the Search area
reference image area. Specifying a
shorter search area may cause an error
message to be displayed.

Reference image area

Start point

X:199 Y:245

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

4-5
 Positional Deviation Measurement

Register a reference image RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT

After setting the reference image area, store an MDL 0
image in the controller as a reference image. 1UP.L (224.208)
Select " REFERENCE IMG" using the up/ 2LO.R (287.271)
3MOVE CONTRAST SRCH
down arrow keys and select "REG" from the 4REFERENCE IMG REG
popup menu. DISP

X:224 Y:208

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

CONTRAST SRCH After changing to a gray search, automatically search for the area
(contrast search) with the most features (maximum contrast) in the captured image.
REG (register) Store the currently displayed image as a reference image.
Select any one of the registered reference images using the
DISP (display) up/down/left/right arrow keys, the selected reference image will be
displayed in the lower right of the screen.

SEARCH ARE
Specify the search area (inside the dotted lines) REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
on the " SEARCH ARE (MDL0)" line, using the
1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7)
same procedures used for setting the reference 2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0) RECTANGLE
image area. 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0) SET（224.208)∼(287.271）
4SEARCH ARE (MDL0)  SET（216.200)∼(295.279）

If you are selecting a 2-point search, also set the

points the same way as for MDL1.

Search area

Object to measure

SEL=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

An example of storing
- This is an example of a 2-point search when the detection shape is a rectangle.
Model 1
Model 0
Reference image (model 1)
Reference image
(Model 0) Search area (model 1)
Search area
(Model 0)

Note: When setting the horizontal and vertical lines, specify the line length as follows:
The reference image must shorter than the search area lines.

4-6
 Positional Deviation Measurement

REFIMG
Move the cursor to the function menu on the REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
REG COND screen by pressing the TRG/BRT
key. Move the cursor to "DETAIL." Press the 1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7)
2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0) RECTANGLE
SET key on the "REFERENCE IMG" line in the 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0) SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
popup menu. The white square on the left will 4SEARCH ARE (MDL0)  SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
change to a black square. Then, the " REF 5REFIMG (MDL0) 001(000~001) ■REFERENCE IMG ※
6DTECT CRD (MDL0) CENTER (250.229) ■DTECT CRD
IMG" item will appear on the screen. 7CONTR.PIXL (MDL0) 1 ■CONTR.PIXL
- You can use the same procedures to show
"DTECT CRD" (detection coordinates) and ※ Make □ to ■ on the popup menu,
"CONTR.PIXL" (contraction pixels) on the the respective item will be added to
4
screen. the "REG COND" menu.

SEL=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

On the " REF IMG" line, select a reference
image from the reference images already
registered.
Ex : 015 (000 to 026)
Select reference image No. 15 from the 26 registered reference images (000 to 026).

DTECT CRD (detection coordinates)

Select whether to use the detection coordinates as the center of the reference area or to allow the
point to be set freely.

CONTR.PIXL (contraction pixels)

When "RECTANGLE" was selected at " MEAS SHAPE," you can select items 1 to 3 below. When
" X-LINE" or "Y-LINE" was selected, you can select items 1 or 2 below.
1: Search the image in units of 2 pixels.
2: Search the image in units of 4 pixels.
3: Search the image in units of 8 pixels.

[2] Setting the register conditions for edge detection

MEAS SHAPE (MDL 1) REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

Select a measurement shape. 1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7) RECTANGLE (NO ARFT)
RECTANGLE RECTANGLE (ARFT)
Select a pattern to be LINE
LINE (straight line) used for image CIRC-L
CIRC-L (circle) processing. ELIP-L
ELIP-L (ellipse)  See pages 3-4 to 3-8.
CHNG POINT
DRK→BRT
BRT→DRK
+ CENT(BRT)
CENT(DRK)
NO ARTF/ARTIF: Select whether to detect edge
or not with average density.
See page 3-15. 2MEAS SHAPE (MDL1) RECTANGLE (NO ARFT)
3SEARCH ARE (MDL1) SET (224.208)∼(287.271) HORIZ (→)
4DTECT MODE (MDL1)  CHNG POINT HORIZ (←)
5SEARCH DIR(MDL1) HORIZ (→) VERT(↓)
SEARCH AREA 6THRESHOLD(MDL1) SET (D:050 E:2 F:04) VERT(↑)
Select " SEARCH AREA (MDL1)" and press the 7REF COORD(MDL1) SET KEY(512.480)
SET key to go to the setting screen.
SEL=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

4-7
 Positional Deviation Measurement

When a rectangle is selected Setting screen (RECTANGLE)

Highlight " UP.L" and press the SET key. The X RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
and Y axes will appear in the detection area. MDL 0
1UP.L (224.208)
Move the X/Y axes using the up/down/left/right 2LO.R (287.271)
arrow keys to identify the upper left corner. When 3MOVE
correct, press the SET key.
- To return to the previous coordinates, press
the ESC key.
Next, highlight " LO.R" and press the SET key.
Identify the lower right corner the same way.
4
DTECT MODE
Select an image processing method for the
edges.
CHNG POINT
DRK -> BRT
BRT -> DRK See page 3-14. X:224 Y:208
CENT (BRT)
CENT (DRK) SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

SEARCH DIR
Specify a search direction. The direction for searching varies with each detection shape.

When "RECTANGLE" is selected

Horizontal（→） Scan the reference line from left to right（→）
Horizontal（←） Scan the reference line from left to right（←）
Vertical（↓） Scan the reference line from top to bottom（↓）
Vertical（↑） Scan the reference line from bottom to top（↑）

When "LINE" is selected

Start point → End point Scan along a straight line from the starting point to the end point
End point → Start point Scan along a straight line from the end point to the starting point

When "CIRC-L" or "ELIP-L" is selected

Clockwise direction Scan around the circumference clockwise
Counter-clockwise direction Scan around the circumference counter-clockwise

For details, see page 3-14.

THRESHOLD
Specify a threshold value for binary conversion.
For details, see page 3-10.

Edge Flat
width width

Light level

Density difference

A B
Automatic setting
Select "AUTO-REG" from the upper function menu on the THRESHOLD setting screen. The
controller will set the optimum value automatically.
For details, see page 3-15.

REF COORD (reference coordinates)

You can change the reference coordinates to any desired position.

4-8
 Positional Deviation Measurement

Set the evaluation conditions

How to move to the evaluation condition setting screen
There are two methods for getting to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "COND" in the upper function menu on MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
the MEAS COND (or REG COND) screen 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
and press the SET key. Select 2REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7)
3MODE 1P-SCH
"EVALUATION" on the pop up menu to go to 4DTECT ANGL NO IMG PRE-PROC
the EVALUAT COND screen. 5ANGLE UNIT REG-COND(S)
 REGISTER NO.
6MDL 0
0001020304 05 060708 09REG-COND(E)
S ×××××××
101112131415
POSITION CORRECTION
4
7MDL 1 ×××××××× EVALUATION
DST&ANGL
NUM-CALC
OUT

SET=SELECT A MENU FOR ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 DRK
OBJECT TYPE COND
item on the Menu tree screen and press the 1REGISTER NO.
  + TYPE00
SET key. TYPE RUN COND
2CONDITION SET
3X COORD.(MDL0)
IMAGE-ADJ 4Y COORD.(MDL0)
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5x DEVAITE(MDL0)
MEAS0(POSI-DEVIATION) 6y DEVAITE(MDL0)
+ IMG PRE-PROC 7MATCH LVL(MDL0)
MEAS CND 8TEST
REG-COND(S)
REG-COND(E)
EVALUATION COND
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "EVALUAT COND" (evaluation conditions) EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT
screen will appear.
1REGISTER NO. 0(0~7) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
For details about the evaluation conditions, see 2CONDITION SET AUTO(–10%)
page 3-17. 3X COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~511.0 X0= NO
4Y COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~479.0 Y0= NO
5x DEVAITE(MDL0) -511.0~+511.0 x0= NO
6y DEVAITE(MDL0) -479.0~+479.0 y0= NO
7MATCH LVL(MDL0) -10000~+10000 M0= NO

8TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

4-9
 Positional Deviation Measurement

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from
the popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numerical calculations."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT" from the
4 popup menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions.

Display the measurement results

Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The measurement results will be dis-
played on the screen.
●1P-SCH+1P-EDGE
(TYPE00) F C1 BRT
V*.**
OK
MEAS XXXXms
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION

Registration number REGISTER NO(0~7)

Detection coordinates in the X0=176.0 OK
reference image for model 0 Y0=322.0 OK
Amount of deviation from the x0=+000.0 OK
reference image for model 0
y0=+000.0 OK
Degree of match with the
reference image for model 0 M0=+10000 OK
Amount of angular deviation B0=+001.7 OK
Detection coordinates in the X1=534.0 OK
reference image for model 1 Y1=480.0 OK
Amount of deviation from the x1=+001.0 OK
reference image for model 1 y1=+001.0 OK
Degree of match with the K1=1
reference image for model 1
X0~6 □□□□□□□□  Y0~7 □□□□□□□□  READY ■
MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

For display examples of measurement results using other modes, see the next page.

4-10
 Positional Deviation Measurement

The displays for other modes are shown in the next page.

Ë 1-point search
Registration number REGST NO. 0(0~7)
Detection coordinates in the X0=176.0 OK
reference image for model 0 Y0=322.0 OK
Amount of deviation from x0=+000.0 OK
the reference image for model 0 y0=+000.0 OK
Degree of match with the
reference image for model 0 M0=+10000 OK 4
* Rotation angle B0=+002.6 OK

* Angle will be displayed when "DTECT ANGL" is set to "YES."

Ë 2-point search
Registration number REGST NO. 0(0~7)
Detection coordinates in the X0=176.0 OK
reference image for model 0 Y0=322.0 OK
Amount of deviation from x0=+000.0 OK
the reference image for model 0 y0=+000.0 OK
Degree of match with the Model 1
reference image for model 0 M0=+10000 OK
Amount of angular deviation B0=+001.7 OK
X1=534.0 OK
Coordinates in the detect
point for model 1 Y1=480.0 OK Model 0

Amount of deviation in the x1=+001.0 OK

detect point for model 1 y1=+001.0 OK
The number of the detect
point for model 1 K1=1 OK

Ë 1-point edge
Registration number REGST NO. 0(0~7)
X0=176.0 OK
Coordinates in the detect
point for model 1 Y0=322.0 OK
x0=+000.0 OK
Amount of deviation in the
detect point for model 1 y0=+000.0 OK
The number of the detect K0=1 OK
point for model 1 B0=

Ë 2-point edge

Registration number REGST NO. 0(0~7)

Coordinates in the detect X0=176.0 OK

point for model 0 Y0=322.0 OK

Amount of deviation in the x0=+000.0 OK

detect point for model 0 y0=+000.0 OK
The number of the detect
point for model 0 K0=1 OK
Amount of angular deviation B0=+001.7 OK
X1=534.0 OK
Coordinates in the detect
point for model 1 Y1=480.0 OK
Amount of deviation in the x1=+001.0 OK
detect point for model 1 y1=+001.0 OK
The number of the detect K1=1 OK
point for model 1

4-11
 Positional Deviation Measurement

Angle detection
You can detect the angle of an object by selecting 1P-SCH (1-point search) in the POSI-DEVIATION
item (measurement 0 to 4) .
(1) Angle detection by object shape
There are some objects whose angle cannot be detected, due to the shape of the object and the
compression level used for the gray scale search, as shown in the table below.
Object shape Angle detection Difficulty level

4 The angle cannot be detected. ×

The angle can be detected using a

compression level of 2 for the gray
scale search.
△

The angle can be detected. ○

- The information given above is true when the measurement conditions are as follows: the size of
the reference image to be registered is approximately 64 X 64, and the search size is approximately
100 X 100.
(2) Setting method
On the [MEAS CND] screen, select the "1P-SCH" or "1P-SCH+1P-EDGE" mode on the " MODE"
and then select the " DTECT ANGL" item. See page 4-2.
MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD STANDARD
2REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7) HIGH
1 3MODE 1P-SCH
2 4DTECT ANGL NO
3 5ANGLE UNIT NO Note: When the rotation angle detection is set other
0001020304 05 060708 0910111213 1415
1P-SCH
 REGISTER NO. than "NO," the "HIGH PRECISION" selection
6MDL 0 S ××××××× 2P-SCH
7MDL 1 ×××××××× 1P-EDGE
will be invalid. (The detection precision is fixed
2P-EDGE
to the "STANDARD.")
1P-SCH+1P-EDGE

NO
±15°
±30°
±45°
360°

SET=SELECT A MENU FOR ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

1. Select the "1P-SCH" or "1P-SCH+1P-EDGE" mode on the " MODE".

2. Select the angle search range (±15˚, ±30˚, ±45˚, ±360˚) on the " DTECT ANGL" item. The larger
the angle search range, the slower the processing will be.
3. Select a rotation step size in degrees in " ANGLE UNIT," using the up and down keys. The
relationship between the detection range (unit) of the rotation angle and the reference images to
be created is shown below:
Rotation angle Reference image created
Detection
Unit Rotation angle Quantity
range
1 -17, -16, -15, -14, • • • • • • • • +14, +15, +16, +17 35
3 -21, -18, -15, -12, • • • • • • • • +12, +15, +18, +21 15
±15˚
5 -25, -20, -15, -10, -5, 0, +5, +10, +15, +20, +25 11
10 -15, -10, 0, +10, +15 5

To the next page 4-12

 Positional Deviation Measurement

Rotation angle Reference image created

Detectio-
Unit Rotation angle Quantity
n range
2 -34, -32, -30, -28, • • • • • • • • +28, +30, +32, +34 35
3 -36, -33, -30, -27, • • • • • • • • +27, +30, +33, +34 25
±30˚ 5 -40, -35, -30, -25, • • • • • • • • +25, +30, +35, +40 17
6 -42, -36, -30, -24, • • • • • • • • +24, +30, +36, +42 15
10 -30, -20, -10, 0, +10, +20, +30 7
3 -51, -48, -45, -42, • • • • • • • • +42, +45, +48, +51 35 4
±45˚ 5 -55, -50, -45, -40, • • • • • • • • +40, +45, +50, +55 23
10 -45, -40, -30, -20, -10, 0, +10, +20, +30, +40, +45 11
Full
10 -170, -160, -150, • • • • • • +150, +160, +170, +180 36
angle

4. On the settings for the gray scale search conditions (page 4-4), register the object by surrounding
it with a square window, regardless of the shape of the object to be measured.
Example

Image to register

When triggered to store the reference image, the system will store various views of the object in
memory by rotating the image, 10 degrees at a time.
When the angle range is set to –360˚ (Rotation angle unit : 10)

Reference image . . . . .

0 10 20 180 -170 -10

5. Specify a search area that is large enough to include various positional deviations of the object.
Reference image area

Search area

6. When starting the measurement, the system will execute a gray scale search of the captured
image based on the stored reference images, which were created by rotating the basic image, 10
degrees at a time in step 3 above.
Define the position using the curve interpolation.
Degree of match

Captured
image

10  20  30  40  50  60  70 Rotation

Degree of match curve angle
Note: When "NO" is selected for the "DTECT ANGL" (rotation angle detection) in the previous page
after registering the reference image, a "Reference image condition mismatch" error will occur
when executing the measurement.

4-13
 Degree of Match Inspection

Chapter 5: Degree of Match Inspection

5-1 Outline
The gray search function is capable of finding the differences between the non-
defective reference image and the image to be inspected evaluating the degree
Purpose of match. (The acceptability of the workpiece is evaluated based on its level of
similarity to the reference model.)
Checking for misalignment of labels, checking for entry of wrong parts, checking
Applications that electronic components have been precisely mounted on PC boards,
checking for misprints, checking for missing metallic parts, such as terminals,
and simple inspection of lettering
5
[Checking for label misalignment on package]

Search area Search area

Reference for positioning Reference for positioning
image for image for
positioning positioning

SERIAL NO.
8F053G26

IV-S30J
MODEL
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S30J
Examples
Reference image Reference image
for checking for checking

çAcceptable application of label çUnacceptable application of label

[Measurement results]
- Degree of match compared with the reference image
- Detected coordinates (X/Y) of the measurement image.
- Light level in the measured image (average light
level/absolute value of difference)

- Checking sequence
1 A gray search for the reference image for positioning is made.
2 After the position of the reference image for checking is corrected based on
the coordinates of the reference image for positioning found in step 1, the
degree of match is determined.
3 If the degree of match of the reference image for checking is low, the label is
regarded as applied incorrectly.

5-1
 Degree of Match Inspection

5-2 Setting operation

Setting the measurement conditions
How to enter the measurement conditions setting screen

Select "MAIN-COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
(menu tree)-> "TYPE00" ->"MEA-CND
OBJECT TYPE COND
(CAMERA1)" -> "MEAS(NEW)," in that order. TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
Then press the SET key to bring up the "MEAS1" TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
screen. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
5 ++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Move to the " MEAS SELECTION" line on the MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"MEASUREMENT1" screen and select "CHK- 1MEAS SELECTION CHK-DEG-MATCH
DEG-MATCH" from the popup menu. NO
POSI-DEVIATION
CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
MEAS-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ
LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
MULTI-POSI
MULTI MATCHES

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the ESC key to return to the OBJECT TYPE COND (menu tree) screen, and select the "MEAS
CND" item shown under "MEAS01 (CHK-DEG-MATCH)" to go to the MEAS CND screen.
For details, see "Chapter 8: Setting Examples Using the Menu Tree" in the Introduction and
Hardware.

5-2
 Degree of Match Inspection

Setting the measurement conditions

DTECT PRECISON MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

Select detection precision. You can select 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD STANDARD NO
one of two levels (standard/high), according 2REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15) HIGH 1P-SCH
3MODE 2P-SCH
to your conditions, the desired precision level 4SEARCH YES
2P-SCH
for detection results, and the detection speed. 5MATCHING AVG-GRAYS
For details, see page 3-10.  REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
6MDL 0 S ×××××××××××××××
REGISTER NO. 7MDL 1
S ×××××××××××××××
16 registers are available for the degree of YES
match inspection (Registers 0 to 15). AVG-GRAYS NO
If you want to set the measurement DIFF.ABS
conditions for a different register number,
press the SET key to highlight the register 5
number currently selected. Then press the up
and down arrow keys to select the register
number whose measurement conditions you
want to set. Press the SET key to confirm
your selection.
SET=SELECT A MENU FOR ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

MODE
Select a detection mode.
Detail of each mode are as follows.
MODE Details
NO (None) Does not detect.
1P-SCH Detect the positional deviation of one point in the scanned image
(1-point search) compared to a single reference image, after performing a gray search.
2P-SCH Detect the positional deviation of two points in the scanned image
(2-point search) compared to two reference images, after performing a gray search.
Gray search See page 3-9.

SEARCH
Specify whether or not to use the search function.

MATCHING
Select a density for comparison when inspecting the image. The details are as follows.
Description
Average
Obtain average light level of the image in the area detected using the gray search.
light level
Calculate the difference of the absolute values from the image detected using the
Difference gray search and the reference image. The result is light level difference. By
absolute obtaining this value, you can get an idea of the total change in light level.
value Total light level difference = S (Ni — Nt)
Ni : Light level of the captured image (contraction 3)
Nt : Light level of the reference image (contraction 3)

REGISTER NO. ( MDL 0, MDL 1)

The specified modes are displayed for each register number on these lines. When a 1-point
search is specified, only " MDL 0" will be available. When a 2-point search is specified,
" MDL 1" is also available. The "S" in the table indicates a gray search. "X" means not used.

An example of mode selection

  REGISTER NO. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 S：Gray search
6MDL0 ＳＳ×××××××××××××× ×：No setting
7MDL1 ×Ｓ××××××××××××××
REGISTER00 : 1P-SCH
REGISTER01 : 2P-SCH

5-3
 Degree of Match Inspection

How to set the register conditions

How to enter the REG-COND setting screen
There are three methods for getting to the REG-COND setting screen.

1) On the "MEAS CND" setting screen, move the MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
cursor to " MDL 0" or " MDL 1" and press IMG PRE-PROC
the SET key. The cursor will move into the 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
2REGISTER NO. 00(0~15) REG-COND
table. Move the cursor to the "S" column and 3MODE 2P-SCH EVALUATION
press the SET key. 4SEARCH YES DST&ANGL
5MATCHING AVG-GRAYS NUM-CALC
Note: If you press the SET key in the "X"
OUT
column, the setting will be invalid.  REGISTER NO.
0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
6MDL 0
7MDL 1 S × × × × × × × × ×× × × × × ×
5 S × × ×× × × × × × × × × × × ×

2) On the "MEAS CND" setting screen, press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper
function menu. Select the "COND" item and then select the "REG-COND" item and press the SET
key.

3) On the menu tree, move the cursor to the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 DRK
"MEAS CND" item, and press the right arrow OBJECT TYPE COND
key. The sub menu which contains the "REG-    + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
TYPE01 2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0)
COND" items will appear. Move the cursor to TYPE RUN COND 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0)
this item and press the SET key. IMAGE-ADJ 4SEARCH ARE (MDL0)
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5REFIMG (MDL0)
MEAS0 6DTECT CRD (MDL0)
POSI-CORRECT 7CONTR.PIXL (MDL0)
MEAS01(CHK-DEG-MATCH) 8MEAS SHAPE (MDL1)
IMG PRE-PROC 9REFIMG ARE (MDL1)
MEAS CND 0SEARCH ARE (MDL1)
REG-COND qREFIMG (MDL1)
EVALUATION COND wDTECT CRD (MDL1)
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND eCONTR.PIXL (MDL1)
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

How to set register conditions

REGISTER NO. REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

The currently selected register number is 1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7) RECTANGLE
displayed. 2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0) RECTANGLE X-LINE
If you want to set the measurement 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0) SET (224.208)∼(287.271) Y-LINE
4SEARCH ARE (MDL0)  SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
conditions for a different register number, 5REFIMG (MDL0) 001 (000~001) ■REFERENCE IMG *
press the SET key to highlight the register 6DTECT CRD (MDL0) CENTER (250.229) ■DTECT COORD
number currently selected. Then press the up 7CONTR.PIXL (MDL0) 1
■CONTR.PIXEL
and down arrow keys to select the register 8MEAS SHAPE (MDL1) RECTANGLE
number whose measurement conditions you 9REFIMG ARE (MDL1) SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
want to set. Press the SET key to confirm 0SEARCH ARE (MDL1) SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
qREFIMG (MDL1) 001 (000~001)
your selection. wDTECT CRD (MDL1) CENTER (250.229)
eCONTR.PIXL (MDL1) 1
MEAS SHAPE(MLD0)
Select a shape (rectangle, horizontal line, or
vertical line) for the reference image area and * Make □ to ■ on the popup menu,
search area. the respective item will be added to
the "REG COND" menu.
For details about each shape, see pages
3-4 to 3-8. SEL=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

5-4
 Degree of Match Inspection

REFIMG ARE (MDL0)

Move the cursor to " REFIMG ARE(MDL0)" and press the SET key. When the SET item is
highlighted, press the SET key again to bring up the setting screen.

When a rectangle is selected

Specify the upper left and lower right Setting screen (RECTANGLE)
corners of the reference image area. RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
MDL 0
1UP.L (224.208)
Reference image of MDL0
2LO.R (287.271)
Detection image of MDL0
3MOVE
Search area of MDL0
4REFERENCE IMG

SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
5
MODEL
IV-S30J

Reference image of MDL1

Detection image of MDL1
Search area of MDL1
X:224 Y:139

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

When a horizontal line is selected

Specify the start and end points on the X Setting screen (X-LINE)

axis. Specify the start and end points using X-LINE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
MDL 0
the up/down/left/right arrow keys. The 1S.PT (199.245)
points will move along the X axis (while 2E.PT (328.245)
3MOVE
keeping the same Y coordinate). 4REFERENCE IMG

SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
Crosshair cursor MODEL
IV-S30J
(detection coordinate)
Solid line (reference line)
Dotted line (search line)

X:194 Y:245

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

5-5
 Degree of Match Inspection

When a vertical line is selected

Setting screen (Y-LINE)
Specify the start and end points on the Y
Y-LINE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
axis. Specify the start and end points using MDL 0
the up/down/left/right arrow keys. The 1S.PT (194.175)
points will move along the Y axis (while 2E.PT (194.344)
3MOVE
keeping the same X coordinate). 4REFERENCE IMG

Crosshair cursor
(detection coordinate)
Solid line (reference line)
Dotted line (search line)

SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S30J

X:194 Y:344

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Register a reference image

After setting the reference image area, store RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
an image in the controller as a reference MDL 0
1UP.L (224.208)
image. 2LO.R (287.271)
Select " REFERENCE IMG" using the up/ 3MOVE CONTRAST SRCH
down arrow keys and select "REG" from the 4REFERENCE IMG REG
DISP
popup menu.

SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S30MX
IV-S30J

X:224 Y:208

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

SEARCH ARE
Specify the search area (inside the dotted
lines) on the " SEARCH ARE (MDL0)" line, RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
using the same procedures used for setting MDL 0
1UP.L (224.208)
the reference image area. 2LO.R (287.271)
Note: Set the menu for MDL1. Setting 3MOVE
procedures are the same as MDL0.

SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S30MX
IV-S30J

X:224 Y:139

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

5-6
 Degree of Match Inspection

REFIMG
On the " REF IMG (MDL0)" line, select a REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
reference image from the reference images
1REGISTER NO. 00 (0∼15)
already registered. 2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0) RECTANGLE
Ex. 015 (000 to 026) 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0) SET (131.122)∼(217.201)
Select reference image No. 15 from the 26 4SEARCH ARE (MDL0)  SET (119.114∼(224.214)
5REFIMG (MDL0) 15 (000~026)
registered reference images (000 to 026). 6DTECT CRD (MDL0) CENTER (176.164)
Note: This item is displayed only when the 7CONTR.PIXL (MDL0) 1
"REFERENCE IMG" is selected on the
8MEAS SHAPE (MDL1) RECTANGLE
"DETAIL" in the upper function menu. 9REFIMG ARE (MDL1) SET (224.208)∼(372.349)
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
See page 5-4. 0SEARCH ARE (MDL1) SET (276.259)∼(381.368)
MODEL
IV-S30J
qREFIMG (MDL1) 003 (000~026)
wDTECT CRD (MDL1) CENTER (334.313)
eCONTR.PIXL (MDL1) 3

SEL=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

DTECT CRD (detection coordinates) REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
Select whether to use the detection
1REGISTER NO. 00 (0∼15)
coordinates as the center of the reference 2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0) RECTANGLE
area or to allow the point to be set freely. 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0) SET (131.122)∼(217.201)
4SEARCH ARE (MDL0)  SET (119.114∼(224.214)
Note: This item is displayed only when the 5REFIMG (MDL0) 003 (000~026)
"DTECT COORD" is selected on the 6DTECT CRD (MDL0) CENTER (176.164) CENTER
"DETAIL" in the upper function menu. 7CONTR.PIXL (MDL0) 1 SET
See page 5-4. 8MEAS SHAPE(MDL1) RECTANGLE
9REFIMG ARE (MDL1) SET (224.208)∼(372.349)
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
0SEARCH ARE (MDL1) SET (276.259)∼(381.368)
MODEL
IV-S30J
qREFIMG (MDL1) 003 (000~026)
wDTECT CRD (MDL1) CENTER (334.313)
eCONTR.PIXL (MDL1) 3

SEL=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

CONTR.PIXL
REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
Select "CONTR.PIXL" (pixel contraction).
Note: This item is displayed only when the 1REGISTER NO. 00 (0∼15)
2MEAS SHAPE (MDL0) RECTANGLE
"CONTR.PIXEL" is selected on the 3REFIMG ARE (MDL0) SET (131.122)∼(217.201)
"DETAIL" in the upper function menu. 4SEARCH ARE (MDL0)  SET (119.114∼(224.214)
See page 5-4. 5REFIMG (MDL0) 003 (000~026)
6DTECT CRD (MDL0) CENTER (176.164)
7CONTR.PIXL (MDL0) 1
For detail about the "CONTR.PIXEL," see
8MEAS SHAPE(MDL1) RECTANGLE
page 3-9. 9REFIMG ARE (MDL1) SET (224.208)∼(372.349)
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
0SEARCH ARE (MDL1) SET (276.259)∼(381.368)
MODEL
IV-S30J
qREFIMG (MDL1) 003 (000~026)
wDTECT CRD (MDL1) CENTER (334.313)
eCONTR.PIXL (MDL1) 3

SEL=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

5-7
 Degree of Match Inspection

Set the evaluation conditions

How to move to the evaluation condition setting screen
There are two methods for getting to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "COND" in the upper function menu on MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
the "MEAS COND" (or "REG COND") screen
IMG PRE-PROC
and press the SET key. Select 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
2REGISTER NO. 00(0~15) REG-COND
"EVALUATION" on the popup menu to go to 3MODE 2P-SCH EVALUATION
the "EVALUAT COND" screen. 4SEARCH YES DST&ANGL
5MATCHING AVG-GRAYS NUM-CALC
OUT
 REGISTER NO.
6MDL 0 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
7MDL 1 S ×××××××××××××××
5 ××××××××××××××××

SET=REG COND FOR ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 DRK
item on the menu tree screen and press the OBJECT TYPE COND
SET key.    + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
TYPE01 2CONDITION SET
TYPE RUN COND 3MATCH LVL(MDL0)
IMAGE-ADJ 4XCOORD.(MDL0)
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5Y COORD.(MDL0)
MEAS0 6GRAY LVL(MDL0)
POSI-CORRECT 7MATCH LVL(MDL1)
MEAS01(CHK-DEG-MATCH) 8X COORD.(MDL1)
IMG PRE-PROC 9Y COORD.(MDL1)
MEAS CND 0GRAY LVL(MDL1)
REG-COND qTEST
EVALUATION COND
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "EVALUAT COND" (evaluation conditions) EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT

will appear. 1REGISTER NO. 00(0~15) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]

For details about "EVALUAT COND," see page 2CONDITION SET‘ AUTO(–10%)
3MATCH LVL(MDL0) -10000~+10000 M0= NO
3-17. 4X COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~511.0 X0= NO
5Y COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~479.0 Y0= NO
6GRAY LVL(MDL0) 000.0~255.0 G0= NO

7MATCH LVL(MDL1) -10000~+10000 M1= NO

8X COORD.(MDL1) 000.0~511.0 X1= NO
9Y COORD.(MDL1) 000.0~479.0 Y1= NO
0GRAY LVL(MDL1) 000.0~255.0 G1= NO
qTEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

5-8
 Degree of Match Inspection

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from
the popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numeric calculation."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT" from the
popup menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 15: Set the Input/Output Conditions."

Display the inspection results 5

Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The inspection results will be displayed on
the screen.
■ When a 2 point search has been specified
F C1 DRK
(TYPE00)
V*.**

Final evaluation result

Measuring time
OK
MEAS XXXXms
Measurement program number MEASUREMENT 1 CHK-DEG-MATCH Model 0

Registration number REGISTER N00(0~15)

Degree of match with the M0=+09878 OK
reference image for model 0 X0= 288.0 OK
Detection coordinates for model 0 Y0= 190.0 OK
Average gray level in the G0= 023.0 OK SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
Model 1
reference image for model 0* M1=+09306 OK
MODEL
IV-S30J
Degree of match with the X1= 389.0 OK
reference image for model 1
   Y1= 355.0 OK
Detection coordinates for model 1
G1= 023.0 OK
Average gray level in the
reference image for model 1*
X0∼6 □□□□□□□□  Y0∼7 □□□□□□□□  READY ■□

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

5-9
 Lead Inspection

Chapter 6: Lead Inspection

6-1 Outline
Inspect the condition of IC leads and connector pins based on positional
Purpose information obtained from the gray scale search function. (No. of leads or pins that
can be detected: Max. 128 pieces)

Applications Inspect IC leads or connector pins

Inspect the layout of the IC leads and connector pins

Lead measure- D0 D1 D2 [Lead inspection]

ment limit line - Number of leads K
Lead - D0 to D2: Distance

L0

L1

L2

L3
between leads
K0 K1 K2 K3
- W0 to W3: Lead width
6
Reference line - L0 to L3: Lead length

Examples W0 W1 W2 W3

・Inspection procedure
1 Determine the measurement points (K0 to K3) from the mid points of the
leads and the reference line.
2 Calculate the maximum and minimum distances between the leads (D0 to
D2) on the reference line.
3 Calculate the maximum and minimum lead lengths (L0 to L3), starting from
the measurement points (K0 to K3) and measuring toward the lead measure-
ment limit line.
4 Calculate the maximum and minimum lead widths (W0 to W3) from the meas-
urement points.

6-1
 Lead Inspection

6-2 Setting operation

Setting the measurement conditions

How to enter the measurement conditions setting screen

Select "MAIN-COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
COND" -> "TYPE00" ->"MEA-CND (CAM- OBJECT TYPE COND
ERA1) " -> "MEAS(NEW)," in that order. Then TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
press the SET key to bring up the "MEAS1" TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
screen. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
6 OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Move to the " MEAS SELECTION" line on MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
the "MEASUREMENT1" screen and select 1MEAS SELECTION INSPECT-LEAD
"INSPECT-LEAD" from the popup menu. NO
POSI-DEVIATION
CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
MEAS-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ
LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
MULTI-POSI
MULTI MATCHES

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the ESC key to return to the "OBJECT TYPE COND" (menu tree) screen, and select the
"MEAS CND" item shown under "MEAS01 (INSPECT-LEAD)" to go to the "MEAS CND" screen.
For details, see "Chapter 8: Setting Examples Using the Menu Tree" in Introduction and
Hardware.

6-2
 Lead Inspection

Setting the measurement conditions

REGISTER NO.
16 registers are available for the lead MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
inspection (Registers 0 to 15).
1REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15) NO
If you want to set the measurement 2REGISTER EXIST YES YES STANDARD
conditions for a different register number, 3DTECT PRECISION STANDARD HIGH
press the SET key to highlight the
register number currently selected. Then   REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
press the up and down arrow keys to 4MEAS OBJECT ○×××××××××××××××
select the register number whose   LEAD LENGTH ××××××××××××××××
measurement conditions you want to set.
Press the SET key to confirm your
selection.

REGISTER EXIST
Select whether to register or not. 6
DTECT PRECISON
Select detection precision. You can
select one of two levels (standard/high), SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
according to your conditions, the desired
precision level for detection results, and the detection speed.
For details, see page 3-9.

REGISTER NO. ( MEAS OBJECT, LEAD LENGTH)

Register setting conditions are shown for each register number. Circles mean that
"REGISTER NO." has set to "YES."
Æ Setting (display) of items to be inspected

REGISTER NO. 00 01 02  When item "2REGISTER EXIST" has set "YES," a
4MEAS OBJECT ○○× circle is displayed.
LEAD LENGTH ○×× On the "REG COND" screen, when the "7EXTENSION
X : No setting MEAS" is set to "LEAD-LENGTH," or "BALL-WIDTH," a
circle is displayed.

How to set the register conditions

How to enter the REG-COND setting screen

There are three methods for getting to the REG-COND setting screen.

1) On the MEAS CND setting screen, move MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
the cursor to " MEAS OBJECT" and
press the SET key. The cursor will move 1REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15)
2REGISTER EXIST YES
into the table. Move the cursor to the "○"
3DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
column and press the SET key.
Note: If you press the SET key in the "X"   REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
column, the setting will be invalid. 4MEAS OBJECT ○×××××××××××××××
  LEAD LENGTH ××××××××××××××××

2) On the "MEAS CND" setting screen, press

IMG PRE-PROC
the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the REG-COND
upper function menu. Select the "COND" EVALUATION
item and then select the "REG-COND" item NUM-CALC
and press the SET key. OUT

SEL=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

6-3
 Lead Inspection

3) On the menu tree, move the cursor to the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
"MEAS CND" item, and press the right OBJECT TYPE COND
arrow key. The sub menu which contains   + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
the "REG COND" item will appear. Move TYPE RUN COND 2DTECT SHAPE
IMAGE-ADJ 3SEARCH AREA
the cursor to either of these items and press 4DTECT MODE
MEA-CND (CAMERA1)
the SET key. MEAS0 5SEARCH DIRECT
POSI-CORRECT 6THRESHOLD
MEAS01 (INSPECT-LEAD)
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
6 OBJ-TYPE SYS.
SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Set the register conditions

REGISTER NO. REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DATAIL F C1 BRT

The currently selected register number is
displayed. 1REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15) RECT(ARTIFACT)
2DTECT SHAPE RECT(ARTIFACT) LINE
If you want to set the measurement
3SEARCH AREA SET(224,208)∼(287,271) CIRC-L
conditions for a different register number, 4DTECT MODE CENT(BRT)
press the SET key to highlight the register 5SEARCH DIRECT HORIZ(→) CENT(BRT)
number currently selected. Then press the 6THRESHOLD SET(D:050 E:2 F:04) CENT(DRK)
up and down arrow keys to select the 7EXTENSION LEAD-LENGTH
register number whose measurement 8EXT.MEAS DIRECT VERTY=+000 HORIZ(→)
conditions you want to set. Press the SET HORIZ(←)
key to confirm your selection. VERT(↓)
VERT(↑)

DTECT SHAPE NO
Select a detection shape. Three shapes LEAD-LENGTH
are available: "RECT(ARTIFACT)," "LINE," BALL-WIDTH

and "CIRC-L." Depending on which item is

selected, the choices on lines " SEARCH
AREA" and " SEARCH DIRECT" will SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP
change.

Specify the coordinates of the upper left and lower right corners. The controller
RECT
will detect an edge inside this rectangle. For details about processing artifacts,
(ARTIFACT)
see page 3-15.
Specify the coordinates of the starting and end points. The controller will
LINE
detect an edge along this straight line.
Specify the coordinates of the center and radius. The controller will detect an
CIRC-L
edge inside this circle.

SEARCH AREA
Specify a search area. Move the cursor to this line and press the SET key. The currently SET
item will be highlighted. Press the SET key again to enter the setting screen.

When the "RECT (ARTIFACT)" is selected

Specify the upper left and lower right corners
of the rectangular search area. UP.L

LO.R
6-4
 Lead Inspection

When the "LINE" is selected

Specify the coordinates of the
starting and end points. Start point
End point

When the "CIRC-L" is selected

Specify the coordinates of the
center, radius, and starting point. Center
Radius

DTECT MODE
Select a detection mode.
CENT(DRK) Detect the center of a dark area found by the detection search.
CENT(BRT) Detect the center of a bright area found by the detection search.

Search direction

CENT(BRT) CENT(DRK)

SEARCH DIRECT (search direction)

Specify a search direction. The direction for searching varies with each detection shape.

When "RECTANGLE" is selected

Horizontal（→） Scan along the reference line from left to right（→）
Horizontal（←） Scan along the reference line from left to right（←）
Vertical（↓） Scan along the reference line from top to bottom（↓）
Vertical（↑） Scan along the reference line from bottom to top（↑）

When "LINE" is selected

Start point → End point Scan along a straight line from the starting point to the end point
End point → Start point Scan along a straight line from the end point to the starting point

When "CIRC-L" or "ELIP-L" is selected

Clockwise direction Scan around the circumference clockwise
Counter-clockwise direction Scan around the circumference counter-clockwise

6-5
 Lead Inspection

Ë Example of settings
- Example when DTECT MODE (detection mode) is set to "CENT (BRT)" (center dark) and
SEARCH DIRECT (search direction) is set to "HORIZ (horizontal)."
Center point
A B

Edge Reference line

Edge Flat
width width

Brightness Difference in
light

A Direction B

- Example when DTECT MODE (detection mode) is set to "CENT (DRK)" (center dark) and
SEARCH DIRECT (search direction) is set to "HORIZ (horizontal)."
6
A B Center point

Edge Edge Flat Reference line

width width

Brightness Difference in
light

A Direction B

THRESHOLD
Specify a threshold value. Move the cursor to this line and press the SET key. The currently SET
item will be highlighted. Press the SET key again to enter the setting screen.

Move to each of the following items and press the SET key: " GRYS." (difference of gray level)
" EDGE.W" (edge width), and " FLAT.W" (flat width). The current value for that item will be
highlighted and it can be changed using the up and down keys. After the value is correct, press the
ESC key to confirm it.
The values above can be reset to an appropriate level automatically. Move the cursor to the upper
function menu by pressing the TRG/BRT key and select "AUTO-REG". Then press the SET key to
set the levels automatically.
For details, see page 3-15.

EXTENSION MEAS, EXT. MEAS DIRECT

Extension measurements can be made for "LEAD-LENGTH" or "BALL-WIDTH" in line "
EXTENSION MEAS. Then, the " EXT. MEAS DIRECT" item will appear. At the " EXT. MEAS
DIRECT" item, set the position for the extension measurement direction, relative to the reference
line.
Lead length Decide the position using
"8EXT. MEAS DIRECT."
Measurement range
of lead length

Reference line

Note: This line is only displayed when "RECT" or "LINE" was selected for the "DTECT SHAPE." To
display this line, move the cursor to the upper function menu and select "DETAIL." Press the
SET key and select "EXTENSION MEAS" from the popup menu. Then press the SET key.

6-6
 Lead Inspection

Set the evaluation conditions

How to move to the evaluation condition setting screen
There are two methods for getting to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "COND" in the upper function menu MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
on the "MEAS CND" (or "REG COND")
screen and press the SET key. Select 1REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15)
"EVALUATION" on the pop up menu to go 2REGISTER EXIST YES
3DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
to the "EVALUAT COND" screen.
  REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
4MEAS OBJECT ○×××××××××××××××
  LEAD LENGTH ××××××××××××××××

IMG PRE-PROC
REG-COND
EVALUATION
NUM-CALC 6
OUT

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
COND" item on the menu tree screen and OBJECT TYPE COND
press the SET key.   + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
TYPE RUN COND 2CONDITION SET
IMAGE-ADJ 3NUMBER OF OBJ
MEA-CND (CAMERA1) 4DISTANCE
MEAS0 5LEAD WIDTH
POSI-CORRECT 6LEAD LENGTH
7TEST
MEAS01 (INSRECT-LEAD)
IMG PRE-PROC
+ MEAS CND
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "EVALUAT COND" (evaluation conditions) EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT
screen will appear. 1REGISTER NO. 00(0~15) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
For details about the evaluation conditions, 2CONDITION SET AUTO(±10%)
see page 3-17. 3NUMBER OF OBJ 000~128 K= NO

4DISTANCE 000.0~702.0 D= NO

5LEAD WIDTH 000.0~702.0 W= NO

6LEAD LENGTH 000.0~702.0 L= NO

7TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

6-7
 Lead Inspection

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from
the popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numeric calculation."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND"
using the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT"
from the popup menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 16: Set the Input/Output Conditions."

Display the measurement results

6 Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The measurement results will be displayed
on the screen. ■ Example when a straight line is selected as
measurement shape
(TYPE00) F C1 DRK
V*.**
Final evaluation result OK
Measuring time MEAS XXXXms
Measurement program number MEASUREMENT 1 INSPECT-LEAD
Registration number for the
measurement conditions REGISTER N00(0~15)
Number of leads K=005 OK
D=048.0 OK
Distance between leads
(maximum/minimum in pixels) 046.0 OK
Lead width W=017.0OK
(maximum/minimum in pixels) 016.0OK
L=034.0 OK
Lead length
(maximum/minimum in pixels) 032.0 OK

X0∼6 □□□□□□□□  Y0∼7 □□□□□□□□  READY ■□

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

6-8
 Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

Chapter 7: Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

7-1 Outline
This function is used to determine the existence and or size of a workpiece when
the workpiece is always found in the same place or when it has a fixed
measurement position.
Purpose - This function measures the area of the white field after the image has been
converted to binary values (i.e. black and white).
Checking for correctly inserted ball bearings, preventing foreign objects from
becoming mixed in with parts being processed, distinguishing between different
Applications types of waterproof lids, checking the existence of labels on packages, checking the
printing on electric cables, checking for adequate coatings of grease and checking
the existence of frozen foods.

[Measurement result]
- The area of the workpiece
Workpiece 7
Examples

- Checking sequence
Capture an image Convert it to binary Measure (area)

7-1
 Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

7-2 Setting operation

Setting the measurement conditions
How to enter the measurement conditions setting screen

Select "MAIN-COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
(menu tree)-> "TYPE00" ->"MEA-CND OBJECT TYPE COND
(CAMERA1)" -> "MEAS(NEW)," in that order. TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
Then press the SET key to bring up the "MEAS1" TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
screen. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS1
MEAS(NEW)
++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Move to the " MEAS SELECTION" line on the MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"MEASUREMENT1" screen and select "MEAS- 1MEAS SELECTION MEAS-BIN-AREA
BIN-AREA" from the popup menu. NO
POSI-DEVIATION
CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
MEAS-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ
LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
MULTI-POSI
MULTI MATCHES

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the ESC key to return to the OBJECT TYPE COND (menu tree) screen, and select the "MEAS
CND" item shown under "MEAS01(MEAS-BIN-AREA)" to go to the MEA-CND screen.
For details, see "Chapter 8: Setting Examples Using the Menu Tree" in the Introduction and
Hardware.

7-2
 Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

WINDOW MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

Select a window type. On the popup menu, 1WINDOW NUM-OF-MASK 1 NUM-OF-MASK 1
move the cursor any of "NUM-OF- 2REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15) NUM-OF-MASK 2
MASK1,2,4," "BINARY-IMG-MASK," or 3REGISTER EXIST NO NUM-OF-MASK 4
"POLYGON," and press the SET key to BINARY-IMG-MASK
select the item. POLYON

REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09101112131415

4BIN AREA COND ○× × × × × × ××× × × × × × ×

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

NUM-OF-MASK 1 Bring one mask area inside the measuring area.

7
NUM-OF-MASK 2 Bring two mask areas inside the measuring area.
NUM-OF-MASK 4 Bring four mask areas inside the measuring area.
Select this item if the captured image is other than a rectangle, circle, or
ellipse. This function masks the captured image using a stored binary
BINARY-IMG-MASK
image.
- For details, see pages 3-25 to 29.
POLYGON You can manually create any freeform polygon for the measurement area.

REGISTER NO.
Select register number to measure. Number of selectable registers varies with window shape
selected.
NUM-OF-MASK 1 0 to 15
NUM-OF-MASK 2 0 to 7
NUM-OF-MASK 4 0 to 4
BIMARY-IMG-MASK 0 only
POLYGON 0 only

To save the measurement conditions using a different register number, press the SET key and
highlight the number. Change this number by pressing the up and down arrow keys.

REGISTER EXIST
Select whether to register or not.

REGISTER NO. ( BIN AREA COND)

Register setting conditions are shown for each register number. Circles mean that "REGISTER
EXIST" has set to "YES."
Æ Setting (display) of binary area conditions
REGISTER NO. 00 01 02 03
4BIN AREA COND ○ × × When item "3REGISTER EXIST" is
×：No setting set to "YES," a circle is displayed.

7-3
 Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

How to set the register conditions

How to enter the REG-COND setting screen

There are three methods for getting to the REG-COND setting screen.

1) On the "MEA-CND" setting screen, move the MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
cursor to the " BIN AREA COND" and
press the SET key. The cursor will move into 1WINDOW NUM-OF-MASK
IMG PRE-PROC
2REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15)
the table. Move the cursor to the "○" column REG COND
3REGISTER EXIST NO EVALUATION
and press the SET key.
NUM-CALC
Note: If you press the SET key in the "X" OUT
column, the setting will be invalid.  
REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
4BIN AREA COND ○ × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
2) On the "MEA-CND" setting screen, press the
TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper
function menu. Select the "COND" item and
then select the "REG COND" item and press
the SET key.
7
3) On the menu tree, move the cursor to the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
"MEAS CND" item, and press the right arrow OBJECT TYPE COND
key. The sub menu which contains the "REG   + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
TYPE01 2MEAS SHAPE
COND" item will appear. Move the cursor to TYPE RUN COND 3MEAS AREA
this item and press the SET key. IMAGE-ADJ 4THRESHOLD
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5INVERT B/W
MEAS0
POSI-DEVIATION
MEAS01(MEAS-BIN-AREA)
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Set the register conditions

REGISTER NO. REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

The currently selected register number is
1REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15)
displayed.
2MEAS SHAPE RECTANGLE
If you want to set the measurement conditions 3MEAS AREA SET (224,208)∼(287,271)
for a different register number, press the SET 4THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100 (0~255)]
key to highlight the register number currently 5INVERT B/W NO
selected. Then press the up and down arrow
keys to select the register number whose
measurement conditions you want to set.
Press the SET key to confirm your selection.
Note: When the "BINARY-IMG-MASK" or the
"POLYGON" is selected at
" WINDOW" on the "MEA-CND"
screen, the " REGISTER NO." line
will not be displayed and the other item
numbers are decrement by one since
the register number for "BINARY-IMG-
MASK" and "POLYGON" is fixed.
SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

7-4
 Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

MEAS SHAPE
Specify shape of measuring range.

Specify the coordinates for the upper left and lower right corners.
RECTANGLE
The measurement area will be the area enclosed by this rectangle.
Specify the center and the radius. The measurement area will be the
CIRCLE
area enclosed by this circle.
Specify the center and the radius. The measurement area will be the
ELLIPSE
area enclosed by this ellipse.

MEAS AREA
Specify a search area.

When "RECTANGLE" is selected

Specify the upper left and lower right corners of the
rectangular search area.
UP.L

LO.R
When "CIRCLE" is selected
Specify the center and the radius.

Center
Radius

When "ELLIPSE" is selected

Specify the center and the radius.
Center
Radius

THRESHOLD
Specify a threshold value.
Move the cursor to " U.LM" and press the SET key. Then move the cursor to " L.LM" and
press the SET key again. The current value will be highlighted for each item. You can increase
or decrease the value by pressing the up and down arrow keys. Press the ESC key to confirm
the value you want.

The values above can be reset to an appropriate level automatically. Move the cursor to the
upper function menu by pressing the TRG/BRT key and select "AUTO-REG". Then press the
SET key to set the levels automatically.
For details, see page 3-15.

INVERT B/W
Select whether to invert the display of black and white inside the measurement area.

7-5
 Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

Setting the mask details ● When WINDOW has been set to "NUM-OF- MASK 2"
On the "REG COND" screen, move the cursor MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
to the upper function menu by pressing the
TRG/BRT key. Select "DETAIL" by pressing 1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼7)
2MEAS SHAPE RECTANGLE □MASK REGIST.
the left and right arrow keys and then press the □BINARY PROCESS
3MEAS AREA SET (224,208)∼(287,271)
SET key. On the popup menu, you can select 4THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100(0∼255)] □BINRY NOISE FILT
"MASK REGIST.," "BINARY PROCESS," and 5INVERT B/W NO
"BINRY NOISE FILT." The items selected 6MASK NO. 0(0∼1) NO
here will be displayed on the "MEA-CND" 7MASK SHAPE NO RECTANGLE
menu. CIRCLE
8BIMARY PROCESS FIXED ELLIPSE
9BIMARY NOISE FILT NO
MASK NO. FIXED
Select a mask number. THRES-ADJ(VAR-DIFF)
THRES-ADJ(VAR-RATE)
Note: This line is displayed when "NO. OF
MASK 2" or "NO. OF MASK 4" is
NO
selected at " WINDOW" on the "MEA-
EXPD.→CONTR.
CND" screen. CONTR.→EXPD.

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

MASK SHAPE
7 Select mask shape.
- Select "NO," "RECTANGLE," "CIRCLE," or "ELLIPSE."
- When "BINARY-IMG-MASK" is selected on the " WINDOW" line, this line will not appear,
since this is already selected on the "MASK BINARY IMG" screen.
- When "POLYGON" is selected on the " WINDOW" line, specify the polygonal shape of the
mask.

BINARY PROCESS
Select a binary processing method. Move the cursor to "FIXED," "THRES-ADJ (VAR-DIFF)"
{adjustable threshold value (variation difference)}, or "THRES-ADJ (VAR-RATE)" {adjustable
threshold (variation rate)}, and press the SET key to continue.
For details, see page 3-12.
.
BINARY NOISE FILTER
Select a binary noise filter type. Move the cursor to "NO," "EXPD. → CONTR." (expansion →
contraction), or "CONTR. → EXPD" (contraction → expansion), and press the SET key to
continue.
For details, see page 3-13.

Setting example of measurement area and mask area

Measurement area - The inside of the measurement area (excluding

(Rectangle) the mask area) is converted to binary data.

Mask area

7-6
 Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

Set the evaluation conditions

How to move to the evaluation condition setting screen
There are two methods for getting to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "COND" in the upper function menu on MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

the MEAS COND (or REG COND) screen and
press the SET key. Select "EVALUATION" on 1WINDOW BINARY-IMG-MASK IMG PRE-PROC
2REGISTER NO. 0 REG COND
the pop up menu to go to the EVALUAT COND
3REGISTER EXIST YES EVALUATION
screen. 4MASK BINARY IMG REF-IMG NUM-CALC
5BIN IMG MASK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU) OUT

 REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

6BIN AREA COND ○

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
item on the menu tree screen and press the OBJECT TYPE COND
  + TYPE00 1CHNG REG
SET key. 2CONDITION SET
TYPE01
TYPE RUN COND 3REGISTER 00
IMAGE-ADJ 4REGISTER 01
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5REGISTER 02
MEAS0 6REGISTER 03
POSI-DEVIATION 7REGISTER 04
MEAS01(MEAS-BIN-AREA) 8REGISTER 05
IMG PRE-PROC 9REGISTER 06
MEAS CND 0REGISTER 07
REG-COND qTEST
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "EVALUAT COND" (evaluation conditions) EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT
screen will appear. 1CHNG REG [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
For details about the evaluation conditions, 2CONDITION SET AUTO(±10%)
see page 3-17. 3REGISTER 00 000000~245760 A00= NO
4REGISTER 01 000000~245760
5REGISTER 02 000000~245760
6REGISTER 03 000000~245760
7REGISTER 04 000000~245760
8REGISTER 05 000000~245760
9REGISTER 06 000000~245760
0REGISTER 07 000000~245760
qTEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

SET=EXEC ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

7-7
 Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

Set the evaluation conditions

The display details vary with the setting of each window.
• When WINDOW has been set to "NUM-OF-
  MASK 1" and "NUM-OF-MASK 2"
EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT

1CHNG REG    [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]

2CONDITION SET RESET AUTO(+10%) Change the display of items 3 to
3REGISTER00 000000~245760 A00=000200 OK NO 0 from REGISTER00 to 07" to
4REGISTER01 000000~245760 A01=000201 OK NO
5REGISTER02 000000~245760 A02=000202 OK NO REGISTER08 to 15."
6REGISTER03 000000~245760 A03=000203 OK NO
7REGISTER04 000000~245760 A04=000204 OK NO You can set the output destinations
8REGISTER05 000000~245760 A05=000205 OK NO using the up and down keys.
9REGISTER06 000000~245760 A06=000206 OK NO
0REGISTER07 000000~245760 A07=000207 OK NO
(NO, Y0 to Y7, C000 to C127)
qTEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

• When WINDOW has been set to "NUM-OF-MASK 4"

EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT

1CHNG REG    [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]

2CONDITION SET RESET AUTO(+10%)
3REGISTER00 000000~245760 A00=000200 OK NO
4REGISTER01
7 5REGISTER02
000000~245760 A01=000201
000000~245760 A02=000202
OK
OK
NO
NO You can set the output destinations
6REGISTER03 000000~245760 A03=000203 OK NO using the up and down keys.
7TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)
(NO, Y0 to Y7, C000 to C127)

• When WINDOW has been set to "BINARY-IMG-MASK or "POLYGON"

EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT

1CHNG REG    [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]

2CONDITION SET RESET AUTO(+10%)
3REGISTER00 000000~245760 A00=000200 OK NO You can set the output destinations
using the up and down keys.
4TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ) (NO, Y0 to Y7, C000 to C127)

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using the
left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from the
popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numerical calculation."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using the
left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT" from the popup
menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions."

7-8
 Area Measurement by Binary Conversion

Display the measurement results

Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The measurement results will be displayed on
the screen.
(TYPE00) F C1 BRT
V*.**
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
OK
MEAS XXXXms
Measurement MEASUREMENT 1 MEAS-BIN-AREA
program number
Area for registration number 00 A00=005253 OK
" 01 A01=002674 OK
" 02 A02=003200 OK
" 03 A03=001884 OK
" 04 A04=
" 05 A05=
*
" 06 A06=
" 07 A07=
in the measurement condition
(Number of pixels)

*The areas will not be displayed X0∼6□□□□□□□□  Y0∼7□□□□□□□□  READY ■□

for any unspecified registration
numbers. MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE 7

7-9
 Object Counting by Binary Conversion

Chapter 8: Object Counting by Binary Conversion

8-1 Outline
Checks the number of objects (max. 3000 items.) when there is more than one
Purpose object in an image. Measurement of the object’s position is optional.
- When the specified pixel field has been converted to a binary image, the white
areas are measured or identified as separate objects and counted.
Applications Counting the number of food products or parts.

[Measurement result]
- Number of objects/total area

Objects
Examples

- Inspection sequence

Capture an image Convert it to a Measure the number of

binary image objects/total area 8

8-1
 Object Counting by Binary Conversion

8-2 Setting operation

Setting the measurement conditions
How to enter the measurement conditions setting screen

Select "MAIN-COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
(menu tree)-> "TYPE00" ->"MEA-CND OBJECT TYPE COND
(CAMERA1)" -> "MEAS(NEW)," in that order. TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
Then press the SET key to bring up the "MEAS1" TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
screen. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

8
SET=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Move to the " MEAS SELECTION" line on the MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"MEASUREMENT1" screen and select "CNT-BIN- 1MEAS SELECTION CNT-BIN-OBJ
OBJ" from the popup menu. NO
POSI-DEVIATION
CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
MEAS-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ
LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
MULTI-POSI
MULTI MATCHES

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the ESC key to return to the OBJECT TYPE COND (menu tree) screen, and select the "MEAS
CND" item shown under "MEAS01 (CNT-BIN-OBJ)" to go to the MEA-CND screen.
For details, see "Chapter 8: Setting Examples Using the Menu Tree" in the Introduction and
Hardware.

8-2
 Object Counting by Binary Conversion

Setting the measurement conditions

MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

WINDOW
Select a window type. On the popup menu, 1MEAS GRAV CENTER NO NO
move the cursor to "NORMAL," "BINARY- 2WINDOW NORMAL NORMAL YES
IMG-MASK," or "POLYGON," and press the 3REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3) NO BINARY-IMG-MASK
SET key to select the item. 4REGISTER EXIS YES YES POLYGON
5LABEL ORDER SCAN-ORDER
SCAN-ORDER
NORMAL Normal window 6AX.ANGL NO NO SIZE ORDER
7FILT NO
Select this item if the 8CIRC-L
YES CENT-GRAVTY-ORDER
NO
captured image is 9MID-PNT NO NO
other than a YES
rectangle, circle, or
ellipse. This function   REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
BINARY-IMG-MASK 0BIN AREA COND ○ × × ×
masks the captured
image using a stored
binary image.
- For details, see
pages 3-25 to 29.
SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
You can manually
create any freeform
POLYGON
polygon for the
measurement area. 8
REGISTER NO.
Select register number to measure. Number of selectable registers varies with window shape
selected.
NORMAL 0 to 3
BINARY-IMG-MASK 0 only
POLYGON 0 only
To save the measurement conditions using a different register number, press the SET key and
highlight the number. Change this number by pressing the up and down arrow keys.

REGISTER EXIST
Select whether to register or not.

REGISTER NO. ( BIN AREA COND)

Register setting conditions are shown for each register number. Circles mean that "REGISTER
EXIST" has set to "YES."
Æ Setting (display) of binary area conditions
 REGISTER NO. 00 01 02 03
4BIN AREA COND ○ × × When item "3REGISTER EXIST" is
×：No setting set to "YES," a circle is displayed.

8-3
 Object Counting by Binary Conversion

How to set the register conditions

How to enter the REG-COND setting screen

There are three methods for getting to the REG-COND setting screen.

1) On the "MEA-CND" setting screen, move the MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
cursor to the " BIN AREA COND" and
press the SET key. The cursor will move into 1WINDOW NORMAL
IMG PRE-PROC
the table. Move the cursor to the "○" column 2REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)
REG COND
and press the SET key. 3REGISTER EXIST YES EVALUATION
Note: If you press the SET key in the "X" NUM-CALC
OUT
column, the setting will be invalid.   REGISTER NO.
4BIN AREA COND 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

2) On the "MEA-CND" setting screen, press the ○

TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper

function menu. Select the "COND" item and
then select the "REG COND" item and press
the SET key.

3) On the menu tree, move the cursor to the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
"MEAS CND" item, and press the right arrow OBJECT TYPE COND

8 key. The sub menu which contains the "REG   + TYPE00
TYPE01
1REGISTER NO.
2MEAS SHAPE
COND" item will appear. Move the cursor to TYPE RUN COND 3MEAS AREA
this item and press the SET key. IMAGE-ADJ 4THRESHOLD
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5INVERT B/W
MEAS0
POSI-DEVIATION
MEAS01(CNT-BIN-OBJ)
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

REGISTER NO. REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

The currently selected register number is
displayed. 1REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15)
2MEAS SHAPE RECTANGLE RECTANGLE
If you want to set the measurement conditions CIRCLE
3MEAS AREA SET (224,208)∼(287,271)
for a different register number, press the SET 4THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100 (0~255)]
ELLIPSE
key to highlight the register number currently 5INVERT B/W NO NO
selected. Then press the up and down arrow YES
keys to select the register number whose
measurement conditions you want to set.
Press the SET key to confirm your selection.
Note: When the "BINARY-IMG-MASK" or the
"POLYGON" is selected at
" WINDOW" on the "MEA-CND"
screen, the " REGISTER NO." line
will not be displayed and the other item numbers are decrement by one since the register
number for "BINARY-IMG-MASK" and "POLYGON" is fixed.
MEA-CND

1REGISTER NO
2MEAS SHAPE
3MEAS AREA
4THRESHOLD
5INVERT B/W

8-4
 Object Counting by Binary Conversion

MEAS SHAPE
Specify shape of measuring range.
Specify the coordinates for the upper left and lower right corners.
RECTANGLE
The measurement area will be the area enclosed by this rectangle.
Specify the center and the radius. The measurement area will be the
CIRCLE
area enclosed by this circle.
Specify the center and the radius. The measurement area will be the
ELLIPSE
area enclosed by this ellipse.

MEAS AREA
Specify a search area.

When "RECTANGLE" is selected

Specify the upper left and lower right corners of the
rectangular search area. UP.L

LO.R
8
When "CIRCLE" is selected
Specify the center and the radius.
Center
Radius

When "ELLIPSE" is selected

Specify the center and the radius. Center
Radius

THRESHOLD
Specify a threshold value.
Move the cursor to " U.LM" and press the SET key. Then move the cursor to " L.LM" and
press the SET key again. The current value will be highlighted for each item. You can increase
or decrease the value by pressing the up and down arrow keys. Press the ESC key to confirm
the value you want.

The values above can be reset to an appropriate level automatically. Move the cursor to the
upper function menu by pressing the TRG/BRT key and select "AUTO-REG." Then press the
SET key to set the levels automatically.
For details, see page 3-15.

8-5
 Object Counting by Binary Conversion

INVERT B/W
Select whether to invert the display of black and white inside the measurement area.

Setting the mask details

On the "REG COND" screen, move the cursor REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
to the upper function menu by pressing the
TRG/BRT key. Select "DETAIL" by pressing 1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)
2MEAS SHAPE RECTANGLE
the left and right arrow keys and then press the
3MEAS AREA SET (224,208)∼(287,271)
SET key. On the popup menu, you can select 4THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100 (0~255)]
"MASK REGIST.," "BINARY PROCESS," 5INVERT B/W NO
"BINRY NOISE FILT," "BOUNDARY 6MASK NO. 0(0~3) □MASK REGIST.
PROCESS, " and "AREA FILTER." The items 7MASK SHAPE NO NO
□BINARY PROCESS
selected here will be displayed on the "REG □BINRY NOISE FILT
RECTANGLE
8BINARY PROCESS FIXED □BOUNDARY PROCESS
COND" menu. CIRCLE
9BINARY NOISE FILT NO ELLIPSE □AREA FILTER

MASK NO. 0BOUNDARY PROCESS VALID

Select a mask number. qAREA FILTER U.LM245760 L.LM000000(0~245760)

Note: This is available when "NORMAL" is

selected on the " WINDOW" line. VALID NO FIXED
INVALID EXPD.→CONTR. THRES-ADJ (VAR-DIFF)
CONTR.→EXPD. THRES-ADJ (VAR-RATE)
MASK SHAPE
SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
8 Select mask shape.
- Select "NO," "RECTANGLE," "CIRCLE," or "ELLIPSE."
- When "BINARY-IMG-MASK" is selected on the " WINDOW" line, this line will not appear,
since this is already selected on the "MASK BINARY IMG" screen.
- When "POLYGON" is selected on the " WINDOW" line, specify the polygonal shape of the
mask.

BINARY PROCESS
Select a binary processing method. Move the cursor to "FIXED," "THRES-ADJ (VAR-DIFF)"
{adjustable threshold value (variation difference)}, or "THRES-ADJ (VAR-RATE)" {adjustable
threshold (variation rate)}, and press the SET key to continue.
For details, see page 3-12.

BINARY NOISE FILTER

Select a binary noise filter type. Move the cursor to "NO," "EXPD. → CONTR." (expansion →
contraction), or "CONTR. → EXPD" (contraction → expansion), and press the SET key to
continue.
For details, see page 3-13.

BOUNDARY PROCESS
Select whether objects crossing the boundary of the window will be "VALID" or "INVALID."
For details, see page 3-11.

AREA FILTER
This function is used to exclude an object from measurement if its area is outside of the upper or
lower limits. Specify a number from 0 to 245760.

Example of register measurement area and area mask

- The inside of the measurement area
Measurement area
(excluding the mask area) is converted to
(Rectangle)
binary data.
Mask area
(Rectangle)

8-6
 Object Counting by Binary Conversion

Set the evaluation conditions

How to move to the evaluation condition setting screen
There are two methods for getting to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "COND" in the upper function menu on MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

the MEA-CND (or REG COND) screen and
press the SET key. Select "EVALUATION" on 1WINDOW BINARY-IMG-MASK IMG PRE-PROC
the pop up menu to go to the EVALUAT 2REGISTER NO. 0 REG COND
3REGISTER EXIST YES EVALUATION
COND screen.
4MASK BINARY IMG REF-IMG NUM-CALC
5BIN IMG MASK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU) OUT

 REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

6BIN AREA COND ○

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC 8

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
item on the menu tree screen and press the OBJECT TYPE COND
  + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
SET key. 2CONDITION SET
TYPE01
TYPE RUN COND 3NUMBER OF OBJ
IMAGE-ADJ 4TOTAL AREA
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5TEST
MEAS0
POSI-DEVIATION
MEAS01(CNT-BIN-OBJ)
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "EVALUAT COND"(evaluation conditions) EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT
screen will appear. 1REGISTER NO. 0(0~3) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
For details about the evaluation conditions, 2CONDITION SET AUTO(±10%)
see page 3-17. 3NUMBER OF OBJ 0000~3000 K= NO
4TOTAL AREA 000000~245760 A= NO
5TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

8-7
 Object Counting by Binary Conversion

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from
the popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numerical calculation."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT" from the
popup menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions."

Display the measurement results

Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The measurement results will be displayed
on the screen.
(TYPE00) F C1 BRT
V*.**

Final evaluation result OK

Measuring time MEAS XXXXms
Measurement MEASUREMENT 1 CNT-BIN-OBJ
program
8 [K] of registration number
[A] "
0
0
K0=00006
A0=015781
OK
OK
[K] " 1 K1=00020 OK
[A] " 1 A1=087620 OK
[K] " 2 K2=00010 OK
[A] " 2 A2=042680 OK
[K] " 3 K3=
[A] " 3 A3=

in the measurement condition

[K]=NUMBER OF OBJECTS
[A]=TOTAL AREA
(Number of pixels)

- Areas will not be displayed

for unspecified registration X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY
MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE
numbers.

8-8
 Object Identification by Binary Conversion

Chapter 9: Object Identification by Binary Conversion

9-1 Outline
When there are several objects and their positions are random, the presence or
absence of objects and the size of the objects can be determined.
Purpose - The specified pixel area is converted to a binary image. The number of objects,
total size of the white area (the objects) and the area, center of gravity, main axis
angle, fillet diameter, circumference and center of each white area can be
measured.
Counting the number of food products or parts, measuring the angle of rotation or
Applications
the center of gravity of parts, and measuring the size of food products

[Measurement of 6 objects]

[Measurement results]
No.1 No.2
- Object identification (labeling
No.3 and numbering), number of
objects present, total area.
Objects - Area, center of gravity, main
No.4 No.5
No.6 axis angle, fillet diameter,
Examples
circumference, and center of
each object (No.1 to No.6).
9
- Inspection sequence

Image Convert it to Object identification

capture a binary image (labeling and numbering)

Measure the area, center of gravity,

main axis angle, fillet diameter, circumference, and center

9-1
 Object Identification by Binary Conversion

9-2 Setting operation

Setting the measurement conditions
How to enter the measurement conditions setting screen

Select "MAIN-COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
(menu tree)-> "TYPE00" ->"MEA-CND OBJECT TYPE COND
(CAMERA1)" -> "MEAS(NEW)," in that order. TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
Then press the SET key to bring up the "MEAS1" TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
screen. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

9 Move to the " MEAS SELECTION" line on the MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"MEASUREMENT1" screen and select "LABEL- 1MEAS SELECTION LABEL-BIN-OBJ
BIN-OBJ" from the popup menu. NO
POSI-DEVIATION
CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
MEAS-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ
LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
MULTI-POSI
MULTI MATCHES

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the ESC key to return to the OBJECT TYPE COND (menu tree) screen, and select the "MEAS
CND" item shown under "MEAS01 (LABEL-BIN-OBJ)" to go to the "MEA-CND" screen.
For details, see "Chapter 8: Setting Examples Using the Menu Tree" in the Introduction and
Hardware.

9-2
 Object Identification by Binary Conversion

Setting the measurement conditions

MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

MEAS GRAV CENTR
Select whether or not to measure the center 1MEAS GRAV CENTER NO NO
of gravity. 2WINDOW NORMAL NORMAL YES
3REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3) NO BINARY-IMG-MASK
4REGISTER EXIST YES YES POLYGON
5LABEL ORDER SCAN-ORDER
SCAN-ORDER
6AX.ANGL NO NO SIZE ORDER
7FILT NO YES CENT-GRVTY-ORDER
8CIRC-L NO
9MID-PNT NO NO
WINDOW YES
Select a window type. On the popup menu,
move the cursor to "NORMAL," "BINARY-   REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
0BIN AREA COND ○ × × ×
IMG-MASK," or "POLYGON," and press the
SET key to select the item.
NORMAL Normal window
Select this item if the captured image is other than a rectangle, circle, or
ellipse. This function masks the captured image using a stored binary
BINARY-IMG-MASK
image.
- For details, see pages 3-25 to 29.
POLYGON You can manually create any freeform polygon for the measurement area.
REGISTER NO.
Select register number to measure. Number of selectable registers varies with window shape 9
selected.
NORMAL 0 to 3
BINARY-IMG-MASK 0 only
POLYGON 0 only
To save the measurement conditions using a different register number, press the SET key and
highlight the number. Change this number by pressing the up and down arrow keys.

REGISTER EXIST
Select whether or not to register the measurement conditions. When "YES" is selected, items
to will be displayed on the "MEA-CND" menu.

LABEL ORDER
Set the order for displaying the measured results. Select "SCAN-ORDER," "SIZE-ORDER," or
"CENT-GRVTY-ORDER" and then press the SET key.
Assigns label numbers in the order in which objects were scanned
SCAN-ORDER
(from top to bottom) in the measurement range.
Assigns label numbers by the size of the objects found in the
SIZE-ORDER
measurement range, from largest to smallest.
Assigns label numbers by the of center gravity of the objects found
CENT-GRVTY-ORDER
in the measurement range, from heaviest to lightest.
1 2
Object
identification
Binary (in order of
conversion scanning)
3 Island

Object identification 4
3 (in order of area)
2

4 Island

9-3
 Object Identification by Binary Conversion

AX.ANGL (axis angle) ・Main axis angle

Select whether to measure the angle of the longitudinal line Gravity center
(drawn through the gravity center of the workpiece) to the
horizontal.
Main axis angle

FILT (fillet diameter)

Fillet width (vertical)

・Fillet width
Select whether to measure the diameters of horizontal and
vertical fillets on the workpiece.

Fillet width (horizontal)

CIRC-L (peripheral length) ・Peripheral

Select whether to count the number of pixels in the
perimeter of the workpiece.

The number of pixels in

the boundary line of an
object
(stepped are counted as
x √2 pixels)

MID-PNT ・ Center of gravity, main axis angle, and center

(middle point) Center of gravity (X1, Y1)
9 Select whether (0, 0) X1 - Calculated from the area and the position of each object.
- (X1, Y1)=(∑x/N, ∑y/N) N: Area
to measure the Y Main axis angle
center point of - Angle between the longitudinal and horizontal directions
the workpiece.
(511, 479)
The "MID-PNT" refers to the center point of
horizontal or vertical fillet curves.

Gravity Gravity center

Vertical center Center point
fillet
diameter
Spindle Spindle
axis axis
angle angle
Horizontal fillet
diameter
By the combined use of the center point and the center of gravity, a workpiece’
orientation can be measured even when it cannot be evaluated by its spindle axis

REGISTER NO. ( BIN AREA COND)

Register setting conditions are shown for each register number. Circles mean that "REGISTER
EXIST" has set to "YES."
Æ Setting (display) of binary area conditions
 REGISTER NO. 00 01 02 03
0BIN AREA COND ○ × × When item "4REGISTER EXIST" is
×：No setting set to "YES," a circle is displayed.

9-4
 Object Identification by Binary Conversion

How to set the register conditions

How to enter the REG-COND setting screen

There are three methods for getting to the REG-COND setting screen.

1) On the "MEA-CND" setting screen, move the MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
cursor to the " BIN AREA COND" and
1MEAS GRAV CENTER NO IMG PRE-PROC
press the SET key. The cursor will move into
2WINDOW NORMAL REG COND
the table. Move the cursor to the "○" column 3REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3) EVALUATION
and press the SET key. 4REGISTER EXIST YES
DST&ANGL
NUM-CALC
Note: If you press the SET key in the "X" 5LABEL ORDER SCAN-ORDER OUT
column, the setting will be invalid. 6AX.ANGL NO
7FILT NO
8CIRC-L NO
2) On the "MEA-CND" setting screen, press the 9MID-PNT NO
TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper
function menu. Select the "COND" item and
 REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
then select the "REG COND" item and press
0BIN AREA COND ○ × × ×
the SET key.

3) On the menu tree, move the cursor to the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
"MEAS CND" item, and press the right arrow OBJECT TYPE COND
key. The sub menu which contains the "REG   + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
TYPE01
COND" item will appear. Move the cursor to TYPE RUN COND
2MEAS SHAPE
3MEAS AREA
9
this item and press the SET key. IMAGE-ADJ 4THRESHOLD
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5INVERT B/W
MEAS0
POSI-DEVIATION
MEAS01(LABEL-BIN-OBJ)
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

REGISTER NO. REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

The currently selected register number is
1REGISTER NO. 00(0∼15)
displayed.
2MEAS SHAPE RECTANGLE RECTANGLE
If you want to set the measurement conditions 3MEAS AREA SET (224,208)∼(287,271) CIRCLE
for a different register number, press the SET 4THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100 (0~255)] ELLIPSE
key to highlight the register number currently 5INVERT B/W NO NO
selected. Then press the up and down arrow YES
keys to select the register number whose
measurement conditions you want to set.
Press the SET key to confirm your selection.
Note: When the "BINARY-IMG-MASK" or the
"POLYGON" is selected at
" WINDOW" on the "MEA-CND" screen, the " REGISTER NO." line will not be
displayed and the other item numbers are decrement by one since the register number for
"BINARY-IMG-MASK" and "POLYGON" is fixed.
MEA-CND

1MEAS SHAPE
2MEAS AREA
3THRESHOLD
4INVERT B/W

9-5
 Object Identification by Binary Conversion

MEAS SHAPE
Specify shape of measuring range.
Specify the coordinates for the upper left and lower right corners.
RECTANGLE
The measurement area will be the area enclosed by this rectangle.
Specify the center and the radius. The measurement area will be the
CIRCLE
area enclosed by this circle.
Specify the center and the radius. The measurement area will be the
ELLIPSE
area enclosed by this ellipse.

MEAS AREA
Specify a search area.

When "RECTANGLE" is selected

Specify the upper left and lower right corners of the UP.L
rectangular search area.

LO.R

When "CIRCLE" is selected

Specify the center and the radius.
Center
9 Radius

When "ELLIPSE" is selected

Specify the center and the radius.
Center
Radius

THRESHOLD
Specify a threshold value.
Move the cursor to " U.LM" and press the SET key. Then move the cursor to " L.LM" and
press the SET key again. The current value will be highlighted for each item. You can increase
or decrease the value by pressing the up and down arrow keys. Press the ESC key to confirm
the value you want.

The values above can be reset to an appropriate level automatically. Move the cursor to the
upper function menu by pressing the TRG/BRT key and select "AUTO-REG". Then press the
SET key to set the levels automatically.
For details, see page 3-15.

INVERT B/W
Select whether to invert the display of black and white inside the measurement area.

Setting the mask details

On the "REG COND" screen, move the cursor to the upper function menu by pressing the TRG/
BRT key. Select "DETAIL" by pressing the left and right arrow keys and then press the SET key.
On the popup menu, you can select "MASK REGIST.," "BINARY PROCESS," "BINRY NOISE
FILT," "BOUNDARY PROCESS, " and "AREA FILTER." The items selected here will be displayed
on the "REG COND" menu.
See page 8-6.
9-6
 Object Identification by Binary Conversion

MASK NO.
Select a mask number.
Note: This is available when "NORMAL" is selected on the " WINDOW" line.

MASK SHAPE
Select mask shape.
- Select "NO," "RECTANGLE," "CIRCLE," or "ELLIPSE."
- When "BINARY-IMG-MASK" is selected on the " WINDOW" line, this line will not appear,
since this is already selected on the "MASK BINARY IMG" screen.
- When "POLYGON" is selected on the " WINDOW" line, specify the polygonal shape of the
mask.

BINARY PROCESS
Select a binary processing method. Move the cursor to "FIXED," "THRES-ADJ (VAR-DIFF)"
{adjustable threshold value (variation difference)}, or "THRES-ADJ (VAR-RATE)" {adjustable
threshold (variation rate)}, and press the SET key to continue.
For details, see page 3-12.
.
BINARY NOISE FILTER
Select a binary noise filter type. Move the cursor to "NO," "EXPD. → CONTR." (expansion →
contraction), or "CONTR. → EXPD" (contraction → expansion), and press the SET key to
continue.
For details, see page 3-13.

BOUNDARY PROCESS 9
Select whether objects crossing the boundary of the window will be "VALID" or "INVALID."
For details, see page 3-11.

AREA FILTER
This function is used to exclude an object from measurement if its area is outside of the upper or
lower limits. Specify a number from 0 to 245760.

Example of register measurement area and area mask

- The inside of the measurement area

Measurement area
(excluding the mask area) is converted to
(Rectangle)
binary data.
Mask area
(Rectangle)

9-7
 Object Identification by Binary Conversion

Set the evaluation conditions

How to move to the evaluation condition setting screen
There are two methods for getting to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "COND" in the upper function menu on MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
the MEA-CND (or REG COND) screen and
1MEAS GRAV CENTER NO IMG PRE-PROC
press the SET key. Select "EVALUATION" on
2WINDOW NORMAL REG COND
the pop up menu to go to the EVALUAT 3REGISTER NO. EVALUATION
0(0∼3)
COND screen. 4REGISTER EXIST NO
DST&ANGL
NUM-CALC
5LABEL ORDER SCAN-ORDER OUT
6AX.ANGL NO
7FILT NO
8CIRC-L NO
9MID-PNT NO

 REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

0BIN AREA COND ○ × × ×

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
9 item on the menu tree screen and press the OBJECT TYPE COND
SET key.   + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
TYPE01 2CONDITION SET
TYPE RUN COND 3NUMBER OF OBJ
IMAGE-ADJ 4TOTAL AREA
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 5TEST
MEAS0
POSI-DEVIATION
MEAS01(CNT-BIN-OBJ)
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "EVALUAT COND"(evaluation conditions) EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT
screen will appear.
1REGISTER NO. 0(0~3) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
For details about the evaluation conditions, 2CONDITION SET AUTO(±10%)
see page 3-19. 3NUMBER OF OBJ 000~128 K= NO
4TOTAL AREA 000000~245760 A= NO
5LABEL NO. 000(0~000)
6OBJECT AREA 000000~245760R= NO
MAIN AXIS ANGL B=
FILLET WIDTH FX=
FY=
PERIPHERAL CR=
MID POINT CX=
CY=
7TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ) 

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

9-8
 Object Identification by Binary Conversion

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from
the popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numerical calculation."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT" from the
popup menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions."

Display the measurement results

Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The measurement results will be displayed
on the screen.
(TYPE00) F C1 BRT
V*.**
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
OK
MEAS XXXXms
Measurement program MEASUREMENT 1 LABEL-BIN-OBJ
Registration number
in the measurement condition REGISTER NO.0(0~3)
NUMBER OF OBJECTS K=004 OK
TOTAL AREA A=006168 OK
LABEL NUMBER LABEL NUMBER 000（000∼003）
R=001542 OK
OBJECT AREA
CENTER OF GRAVITY
GX=206.0
GY=303.0
OK 9
COORDINATE B=＋028.0°
FX=042
MAIN AXIS ANGLE FY=037
FILLET DIA CR=00138.8
CX=
PERIPHERAL CY=

- CENT OF GRAV, MAIN AXIS

X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY
ANGL, FILLET WIDTH, MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE
PERIPHERAL, or MID POINT
are displayed when
measurement of these
parameters has been specified
("YES" has been selected) on
the "MEAS COND" menu
(page 10-2).

9-9
 Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

Chapter 10: Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

10-1 Outline
The presence or absence of target objects is examined.
･ A simple black and white evaluation is made in the specified pixel area of
binary images.
Purpose ･ The light level in the specified pixel area is averaged, and a decision is made
whether or not it is within the specified range of brightness for gray scale
images.
Checking the presence or absence of packed parts, inspecting the working
Applications condition of LEDs or fluorescent character display tubes, and sorting household
electric appliances

Inspection of 6 points

Number of points (max.):

128 points looking at average
light levels 256 points in binary
images
Point size: 2 m x 2n pixels
     (m, n = 1 to 16)
Examples
･ Inspection sequence
Image capture Binary image Black/white evaluation
conversion of points

Average light Light level evaluation

10
level of points

10-1
 Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

10-2 Setting operation

Setting the measurement conditions
How to enter the measurement conditions setting screen

Select "MAIN-COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
(menu tree)-> "TYPE00" ->"MEA-CND (CAM- OBJECT TYPE COND
ERA1)" -> "MEAS(NEW)," in that order. Then TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
press the SET key to bring up the "MEAS1" TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
screen. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Move to the " MEAS SELECTION" line on the MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"MEASUREMENT1" screen and select "POINT- 1MEAS SELECTION POINT-MEAS
MEAS" from the popup menu. NO
10 POSI-DEVIATION
CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
MEAS-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ
LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
MULTI-POSI
MULTI MATCHES

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the ESC key to return to the "OBJECT TYPE COND" (menu tree) screen, and select the "MEAS
CND" item shown under "MEAS01 (POINT-MEAS)" to go to the "MEA-CND" screen.
For details, see "Chapter 8: Setting Examples Using the Menu Tree" in the Introduction and Hard-
ware.

10-2
 Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

Setting conditions (mode selection)

Select a mode on the " MODE" line. By selecting either "BINARY" or "AVG-GRAYS," the details of
the settings will vary.

When the "BINARY" mode is selected MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK

1MODE BINARY BINARY

BINARY PROCESS 2BINARY PROCESS FIXED AVG-GRAYS
Select a binary processing procedure. Select 3THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)] FIXED
"FIXED," "THRES-ADJ(VAR-DIFF)," or THRES-ADJ(VAR-DIFF)
"THRES-ADJ(VAR-RATE)." 4CHNG-REG CHNG-REG THRES-ADJ(VAR-RATE)
REGISTER NO. 000001002003004 005 006007
5POINT COND × × × × × × × ×

FIXED Does not correct the threshold value.

THRES-ADJ(VAR-DIFF) Effective in preventing binary processing failures since it applies
adjustments according to changes in the lighting conditions for
THRES-ADJ(VAR-RATE) individual workpieces.
For details, see page 3-12.

THRESHOLD
Specify a threshold value. Select this line and press the SET key to enter the "THRESHOLD"
screen. Move the cursor to " U.LM" and " L.LM" each, then press the SET key. The current
value will be highlighted for each item. You can increase or decrease the value by pressing the
up and down arrow keys. Press the ESC key to confirm the value you want.
For details, see page 3-10.

AUTO SETTING
The values above can be reset to an appropriate level automatically. Move the cursor to the 10
upper function menu by pressing the TRG/BRT key and select "AUTO-REG". Then press the
SET key to set the levels automatically.

When the "AVG-GRAYS" mode is selected MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK

1MODE AVG-GRAYS
AVG. GRAY PROC 2AVG.GRAY PROC FIXED FIXED
Select an average gray processing method. GRAY-ADJ(VAR-DIFF)
Select "FIXED," "GRAY-ADJ (VAR-DIFF)," GRAY-ADJ(VAR-RATE)
or "GRAY-ADJ(VAR-RATE)." 3CHNG-REG CHNG-REG
REGISTER NO. 000001002003004 005 006007
4POINT COND × × × × × × × ×

FIXED Does not correct the gray level.

Corrects the gray level by adding a specified threshold value to the
reference for variation in the light level.
GRAY-ADJ(VAR-DIFF)
(Measured light level) - (reference light level) + (specified threshold
value)
Corrects the gray level by multiplying a specified threshold value times
the reference for variation in the light level.
GRAY-ADJ(VAR-RATE)
(Measured light level) / (reference light level) x (specified threshold
value)

CHNG-REG
Changes the display of the registration numbers for the " POINT COND." 000001 002003004 005 006007
Move the cursor to this line and press the SET key. "CHNG-REG" will be × × × × × × × ×
highlighted. Then, press the up and down arrow keys to change the register
number series shown in the table as follows "000 to 007," "008 to 015,"
008009 010011012 013 014015
"016 to 023," ... up to "248 to 255".
× × × × × × × ×
- If the "BINARY" mode was selected, a maximum of 256 points (0 to 255)
can be registered.
- If the "AVG-GRAYS" mode was selected, a maximum of 128 points (0 to 016017 018019020 021 022023
127) can be registered. × × × × × × × ×

10-3
 Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

POINT COND
Points which have been registered are marked with an "O."
- After being registered on the point condition setting screen, an "O" will be displayed in the
corresponding cells.
For details, see next page.

Setting the conditions (by selecting the point conditions)

How to enter the REG COND setting screen

This paragraph describes the setting for each point condition.
There are three ways to bring up the "REG COND" screen.

1) On the "MEA-CND" setting screen, move the MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK
cursor to the " POINT COND" and press
the SET key. The cursor will move into the 1MODE BINARY IMG PRE-PROC
2BINARY PROCESS FIXED REG COND
table. Move the cursor to the "X" column and
3THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)] EVALUATION
press the SET key. NUM-CALC
Note: After being registered, the "X" mark in a 4CHNG-REG CHNG-REG OUT
corresponding cell is changed to "O." REGISTER NO. 000001002003004 005 006007
5POINT COND × × × × × × × ×
2) On the "MEA-CND" setting screen, press the
TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the
upper function menu. Select the "COND" item
and then select the "REG COND" item and
press the SET key.

10
SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

3) On the menu tree, move the cursor to the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
"MEAS CND" item, and press the right arrow OBJECT TYPE COND
key. The sub menu which contains the "REG   + TYPE00 1SIZE
TYPE RUN COND 2EVALUATION
COND" item will appear. Move the cursor to IMAGE-ADJ 3EVAL-SPEC(RATIO %)
this item and press the SET key. MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 4REGISTER NO.
MEAS01(POINT-MEAS)
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

10-4
 Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

Setting the point measurement conditions

SIZE REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

Specify the point size. Highlight the
numbers next to "X" and "Y" and increase 1SIZE Y08 × X08(2~32)
2EVALUATION MAJORITY MAJORITY
or decrease the value using the up and
3EVAL-SPEC(RATIO ％) 050％ AND
down arrow keys. To confirm the new 4REGISTER NO. 000(0~255)NO OR
value, press the SET key twice. When the
settings are complete, press the ESC key.
The point size can be set between 2 and
32, in units of one pixel.

EVALUATION
Set the evaluation condition. Select "MAJORITY," "AND," or "OR."
The details for the evaluation settings are as follows.
2EVALUATION Description
When white occupies more than the specified percentage of pixels in a point,
MAJORITY it is treated as white. Under any other conditions than the above it is treated
as black. The value can be set between 0 and 100%, in units of 1%.
AND When all the pixels are white, this point will be treated as white.
OR When even one pixel is white, this point will be treated as white.

EVAL-SPEC
Select the number and highlight it. Then increase or decrease the number using the up and
down arrow keys. To confirm the new value, press the SET key twice. When the changes are
complete, press the ESC key.

REGISTER NO. 10
When you want to change the number already registered, highlight the number and increase or
decrease the number by pressing the up and down arrow keys. Next, move the cursor to the
"NO" position and press the SET key. A popup menu will appear. Select "YES" on this popup
menu to store this register number.

Specify the position of the point REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
After storing the register number using
" REGISTER NO.," a point will appear 1SIZE Y08 × X08(2~32)
2EVALUATION MAJORITY
on the screen. Move the cursor on the
3EVAL-SPEC(RATIO ％) 050％
" UPPER LEFT" line and press the SET
4REGISTER NO. 000(0~255)YES
key. Then highlight the "MOVE" item and 5UPPER LEFT MOVE(224.208)
press the SET key. Now you can move
the point anywhere on the screen using
the up/down, left/right arrow keys.

10-5
 Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

STORE BLOCK COND

Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu. Select "DETAIL" and press the
SET key. Select "STORE BLCK OF PNTS" from the popup menu and press the SET key. Now, items
to will be displayed on the "REG COND" menu.
This function is used to set a group of points at the same time, after specifying the number of points
horizontally and vertically and their spacing.

REGISTER NO. REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

When "AND" or "OR" is selected on the
1SIZE Y08 × X08(2~32)
" EVALUATION" line, select "YES" at the 2EVALUATION MAJORITY
REGISTER NO" item. Then, " UPPER 3EVAL-SPEC(RATIO ％) 050％ STORE BLCK OF PNTS
LEFT" will be displayed. 4REGISTER NO. 000(0~255)YES
NO
5UPPER LEFT MOVE(224.208)
YES
6BLOCK ARRANGEMENT Y001 × X001
UPPER LEFT
7BLOCK SPACING Y004 × X004
Specify the coordinates of the upper left 8STORE BLCK OF PTS EXEC
corner of the block you want to register. 9DEL BLOCK OF PTS EXEC
0MOVE BLOCK OF PTS MOVE(224.208)

BLOCK ARRANGEMENT
Enter the number of points along the X
(horizontal) and Y (vertical) axes.

BLOCK SPACING
Specify the distance between the points in
the horizontal and vertical rows.
SEL=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

STORE BLCK OF PTS

Select "EXEC" and press the SET key to register the block.
10 DEL BLOCK OF PTS
Delete all the points that were registered at the same time.

MOVE BLOCK OF PTS

Move the group of points that were registered at the same time.
■ Example of a block registration
Set the starting point in item 5 above. X X

Enter 002 (vertical) · 003 (horizontal) in item "6BLOCK ARRANGEMENT,"

and enter the vertical (Y) and horizontal (X) intervals in item
"7BLOCK SPACING." Then select item "8STORE BLOCK OF PTS"
to store the settings for the block.

10-6
 Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

Set the evaluation conditions

How to move to the evaluation condition setting screen
There are two methods for getting to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "COND" in the upper function menu on MEA-CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK
the MEA-CND (or REG COND) screen and
press the SET key. Select "EVALUATION" on 1MODE BINARY IMG PRE-PROC
2BINARY PROCESS FIXED RED COND
the pop up menu to go to the EVALUAT
3THRESHOLD SET [U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)] EVALUATION
COND screen. NUM-CALC
4CHNG-REG CHNG-REG OUT
REGISTER NO. 000001002003004 005 006007
5POINT COND × × × × × × × ×

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
COND" item on the menu tree screen and OBJECT TYPE COND
  + TYPE00 1PAGE CHNG
press the SET key. TYPE01 2P001
TYPE RUN COND 3P002
IMAGE-ADJ
MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
4P003
5P004
10
MEAS0 6P005
POSI-CORRECT 7P006
MEAS01(POINT-MEAS) 8P007
IMG PRE-PROC 9P008
MEAS CND 0TEST
REG-COND
EVALUATION COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

10-7
 Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

The "EVALUAT COND"(evaluation conditions) screen will appear.

For details about the evaluation conditions, see page 3-17.
Acceptance (OK/NG) criteria
WHITE: Acceptable when a majority of the inspected
pixels are white.
・When MODE has been set to "BINARY" BLACK: Acceptable when a majority of the inspected
EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 DRK pixels are black.
1PAGE CHNG ˚ [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT] Ex.: When the point to be inspected is 8 X 8 (64 pixels)
2P000 WHITE OK NO
and WHITE is specified, if 33 white pixels are
detected, the point is accepted.
3P001 WHITE OK NO
4P002 WHITE OK NO
You can set the output destinations using the up
5P003 WHITE OK NO
and down keys. (NO, Y0 to Y7, C000 to C127)
6P004 WHITE OK NO
7P005
Not displayed for unregistered point numbers.
8P006
9P007
0TEST EXEC (WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

Average light level for each point

・When MODE has been set to AVG-GRAYS
EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 DRK
①PAGE CHNG [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
②CONDITION SET REST(+10%)
③P000 200~210 200 OK NO
④P001 200~210 200 OK NO
⑤P002 200~210 200 OK NO You can set the output destinations using the up
⑥P003 200~210 200 OK NO and down keys. (NO, Y0 to Y7, C000 to C127)
⑦P004 200~210 200 OK NO
⑧P005    
10 ⑨P006     Average light level for each point
⑩P007    
⑪TEST  EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from
the popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numerical calculation."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT" from the
popup menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions."

10-8
 Existence Inspection by Point Measurement

Display the measurement results

Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The measurement results will be displayed on
the screen. When MODE has been set to BINARY
(TYPE00) F C1 DRK
V*.**
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
OK
MEAS XXXXms
Measurement program number MEASUREMENT 1 POINT-MEAS
Evaluation of the correct black or white
color detected at registration No.000 P000=WHITE OK
001 P001=WHITE OK
002 P002=WHITE OK
003 P003=WHITE OK
004 P004=WHITE OK
005 P005=
006 P006=
007 P007=

- Areas will not be displayed for

unspecified registration numbers.
X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY
MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

When MODE has been set to AVG-GRAYS

(TYPE00) F C1 DRK
V*.**

OK
MEAS XXXXms
MEASUREMENT 1 POINT-MEAS 10
P000=115 OK
P001=120 OK
P002=114 OK
P003=118 OK
P004=116 OK
P005=115 OK
P006=
P007=

X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE 

10-9
 Multiple Positional Measurement

Chapter 11: Multiple Positional Measurements

11-1 Outline
The IV-S30J can detect up to 128 workpieces whose images exceed the specified
matching level (gray search) or threshold value (edge detection) from the reference image.
Purpose The positional deviation measurement needs to have a number of positions registered for
-
measurement. However, this measurement only requires you to register one position and
reduces the set up time.

Applica- Measure the position of workpieces with a complicated light level that cannot be converted
tion into binary images.

● Gray search
Reference image

Four workpieces
detected

[Measurement results]
- Number of images detected
- Coordinates and degree of match detected for each image

● Edge detection
11
Example
[Measurement results]
- Number of images detected
- Coordinates detected

L1 L2 L3

This is useful for obtaining the distance between the coordinates of a position.
- L1 to L3 can be calculated by measuring distances and angles.

11-1
 Multiple Positional Measurement

11-2 Setting operation

Setting the measurement conditions
How to enter the measurement conditions setting screen

Select "MAIN-COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
(menu tree)-> "TYPE00" ->"MEA-CND OBJECT TYPE COND
(CAMERA1)" -> "MEAS(NEW)," in that order. TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
Then press the SET key to bring up the "MEAS1" TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
screen. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Move to the " MEAS SELECTION" line on the MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"MEASUREMENT1" screen and select "MULTI- 1MEAS SELECTION MULTI-POSI
POSI" from the popup menu. NO
POSI-DEVIATION
CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
MEAS-BIN-AREA
11 CNT-BIN-OBJ
LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
MULTI-POSI
MULTI MATCHES

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the ESC key to return to the "OBJECT TYPE COND" (menu tree) screen, and select the
"MEAS CND" item shown under "MEAS01 (MULTI-POSI)" to go to the "MEAS CND" screen.
For details, see "Chapter 8: Setting Examples Using the Menu Tree" in the Introduction and
Hardware.

11-2
 Multiple Positional Measurement

DTECT PRECISION MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK

Select detection precision. You can select one
1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD STANDARD
of two levels (standard/high), according to 2REGISTER NO. 0(0~3) HIGH
your conditions, the desired precision level for 3MODE GRAY-SRC
detection results, and the detection speed. 4DETECT ORDER SCAN-ORDER
For details, see page 3-9.
 REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
REGISTER NO. 5DTECT OBJECT S ×××
4 registers are available for the multiple
NO
position measurement (Registers 0 to 3). SCAN-ORDER GRAY-SRC
If you want to set the measurement conditions MATCH LVL EDGE DTECT
for a different register number, press the SET
key to highlight the register number currently
selected. Then press the up and down arrow
keys to select the register number whose
measurement conditions you want to set.
Press the SET key to confirm your selection.
SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
MODE
Select a mode.
The details of each mode are as follows.
NO No measurement is made.
Uses the gray search function to detect a shape in the captured images that
GRAY-SRC
matches the reference image.
Uses the edge detection function to look for shapes in the captured images that
EDGE DTECT
have a value larger than the specified threshold value.

DETECT ORDER (when GRAY-SRC is selected)

When "GRAY-SRC" is selected on line " MODE," select "SCAN-ORDER" or "MATCH LVL" on
the " DETECT ORDER" line.
SCAN-ORDER (in the order scanned): Searches in the order scanned. 11
MATCH LVL (degree of match): Searches by comparing levels with the reference image.

REGISTER NO. ( DTECT OBJECT)

Shows the specified mode(s) for each register.
S: gray search E: edge detection ×: means no setting
00 01 02 03
S E S ×

11-3
 Multiple Positional Measurement

How to set the register conditions

How to enter the REG-COND setting screen

There are three methods for getting to the REG-COND setting screen.

1) On the "MEAS CND" setting screen, move the MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK
cursor to " DTECT OBJECT" and press the
1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
SET key. The cursor will move into the table. 2REGISTER NO. 0(0~3)
Move the cursor to the "S" or "E" column and 3MODE GRAY-SRC
press the SET key. 4DETECT ORDER SCAN-ORDER

Note: If you press the SET key in the "X"

column, the setting will be invalid.  REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
5DTECT OBJECT S E S×

About "S" See pages 11-5 to 7.

IMG PRE-PROC
About "E" See pages 11-7 to 9. REG-COND(S)
REG-COND(E)
2) On the "MEAS CND" setting screen, press the EVALUATION
DST&ANGL
TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper
NUM-CALC
function menu. Select the "COND" item and OUT
then select the "REG-COND(S)" or "REG-
COND(E)" item and press the SET key.

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

About "REG-COND(S)"
See pages 11-5 to 7.

About "REG-COND(E) "

See pages 11-7 to 9.

3) On the menu tree, move the cursor to the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 DRK
"MEAS CND" item, and press the right arrow OBJECT TYPE COND
11 key. The sub menu which contains the "REG-    TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
COND(S)" and "REG-COND(E)" items will TYPE RUN COND
appear. Move the cursor to either of these IMAGE-ADJ
items and press the SET key. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
About "REG-COND(S)" MEAS01(MULTI-POSI)
IMG PRE-PROC
See pages 11-5 to 7. MEAS CND
REG-COND(S)
About "REG-COND(E)" REG-COND(E)
EVALUATION COND
See pages 11-7 to 9. + DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

11-4
 Multiple Positional Measurement

[1] Set the register conditions for a gray search

Set a reference image REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 DRK
Move the cursor to " REF-IMG AREA" and
1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)
press the SET key. When the SET item is
highlighted, press the SET key again to bring up 2REF-IMG AREA SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
the setting screen. 3SEARCH AREA   SET (216.200)∼(295.279)

4MATCH LVL(CONTR) +05000

5MATCH LVL +07000

Object to measure

Search area

Search direct

SEL=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Set the coordinates for " UP.L" and " LO.R." RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
The rectangle inside the solid lines is the
1UP.L (224.208)
reference image. 2LO.R (287.271)
3MOVE
4REFERENCE IMG

11

X:224 Y:208

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Register a reference image RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT

After setting the reference image area, store an MDL 0
image in the controller as a reference image. 1UP.L (224.208)
Select " REFERENCE IMG" using the up/ 2LO.R (287.271)
3MOVE
down arrow keys and select "REG" from the 4REFERENCE IMG CONTRAST SRCH
popup menu. REG
DISP

X:224 Y:208

SET=DECISION ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

11-5
 Multiple Positional Measurement

Select a reference image REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

Move the cursor to the function menu on the
1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)
"REG COND" screen by pressing the TRG/BRT 2REFERENCE IMG 015(000~026)
key. Move the cursor to "DETAIL." Press the ※
3REF-IMG AREA SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
4SEARCH AREA   ■REFERENCE IMG
SET key on the "REFERENCE IMG" line in the SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
5DIRECT COORD CENTER (234.219) ■DETECT CRD
popup menu. The white square on the left will 6CONTR.PIXEL 3 ■CONTR.PIXL
change to a black square. Then, the 7MATCH LVL(CONTR) +05000
" REFERENCE IMG" item will appear on the 8MATCH LVL +07000
screen.
※ Make □ to ■ on the
You can use the same procedures to show
popup menu, the
"DETECT CRD" (detection coordinates) and
respective item will be
"CONTR.PIXL" (contraction pixels) on the added to the "REG
screen. COND" menu.
On the " REFERENCE IMG" line, select a
reference image from the reference images
already registered.
Ex : 015 (000 to 026)
Select reference image No. 15 from the
SEL=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
26 registered reference images (000 to
026).

SEARCH ARE
Specify the search area (inside the dotted lines) on the " SEARCH AREA (MDL0)" line, using the
same procedures used for setting the reference image area.
■An example

Object to measure

11
Search area

DTECT COORD (detection coordinates) REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
Select whether to use the detection coordinates
1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)
as the center of the reference area or to allow 2REFERENCE IMG 015(000~026)
the point to be set freely. 3REF-IMG AREA SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
4SEARCH AREA   SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
5DTECT COORD CENTER (234.219) CENTER
CONTR.PIXEL (contraction pixels) 6CONTR.PIXEL 3 SET
7MATCH LVL(CONTR) +05000
1: Search the image in units of 2 pixels. 8MATCH LVL +07000
2: Search the image in units of 4 pixels.
3: Search the image in units of 8 pixels.

SEL=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

11-6
 Multiple Positional Measurement

Set degree of match REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)

MATCH LVL (CONTR) 2REFERENCE IMG 015(000~026)
Specify the degree of match used for detection 3REF-IMG AREA SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
in the contracted images (detects contracted 4SEARCH AREA   SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
5DIRECT COORD CENTER (234.219)
shapes in images whose value is larger than 6CONTR.PIXEL 3
the specified reference value). 7MATCH LVL(CONTR) +05000
8MATCH LVL +07000
MATCH LVL
Specify a degree of match used for detection in
the original images of the contracted images
that were detected in the search at line
" MATCH LVL" (detects original images which
are larger than the specified value).

SEL=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

[2] Setting the register conditions for edge detection

MEAS SHAPE
Select a measurement shape. REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

RECTANGLE Select a pattern to be 1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3) RECTANGLE (NO ARFT)

(NO ARTF) 2MEAS SHAPE RECTANGLE (NO ARFT) RECTANGLE (ARFT)
used for image 3SEARCH AREA SET (224.208)∼(287.271) LINE
RECTANGLE processing. 4DTECT MODE   CHNG POINT CIRC-L
(ARTIF)  See pages 3-4 to 3-8. 5SEARCH DIRECT HORIZ (→) ELIP-L
LINE (straight line) 6THRESHOLD SET (D:050 E:2 F:04)
CHNG POINT
CIRC-L (circle) DRK→BRT
ELIP-L (ellipse) BRT→DRK
CENT(BRT)
11
NO ARTF/ARTIF: Select whether to detect CENT(DRK)
edge or not with average
HORIZ (→)
density. HORIZ (←)
See page 3-15. VERT(↓)
VERT(↑)

SEL=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

11-7
 Multiple Positional Measurement

SEARCH AREA
Select " SEARCH AREA" and press the SET key to go to the setting screen.

When "RECTANGLE" is selected RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT

Highlight " UP.L" and press the SET key.
The X and Y axes will appear in the search 1UP.L (224.208)
area. Move the X/Y axes using the up/down/ 2LO.R (287.271)
left/right arrow keys to identify the upper left 3MOVE

corner. When correct, press the SET key.

- To return to the previous coordinates, press
the ESC key.
Next, highlight " LO.R" and press the SET
key. Identify the lower right corner the same
way.

DTECT MODE
Select an image processing method for the
edges.
CHNG POINT
DRK → BRT X：224 Y：208
BRT → DRK See page 3-14. SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
CENT (BRT)
CENT (DRK)

SEARCH DIRECT
Specify a search direction. The direction for searching varies with each detection shape.

When "RECTANGLE" is selected

→)
Horizontal (→ Scan the reference line from left to right（→）
←)
Horizontal(← Scan the reference line from left to right（←）
↓)
Vertical (↓ Scan the reference line from top to bottom（↓）
11
↑)
Vertical (↑ Scan the reference line from bottom to top（↑）

When "LINE" is selected

Start point → End point Scan along a straight line from the starting point to the end point
End point → Start point Scan along a straight line from the end point to the starting point

When "CIRC-L" or "ELIP-L" is selected

Clockwise direction Scan around the circumference clockwise
Counter-clockwise direction Scan around the circumference counter-clockwise

For details, see page 3-14.

11-8
 Multiple Positional Measurement

THRESHOLD THRESHOLD VAL AUTO-REG RESET F C1 BRT

Enter the threshold value for binary conversion.
1GRYS. 050 （0∼255）
Move the cursor to " THRESHOLD" and press 2EDGE.W 2 （1∼8）
the SET key. Then highlight the "SET" position 3FLAT.W 04 （1∼16）
on this line and press the SET key and the "REG
COND" setting screen will appear.
GRAY
Edge Flat
width width

Light level

Density difference

A B

Automatic setting
Select "AUTO-REG" from the upper function COORD
menu on the THRESHOLD setting screen. The
controller will set the optimum value
SET=CHNG ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
automatically.

Example of register
Shown below is an example detected with " MEAS SHAPE" set to "LINE," and " DETECT
MODE" set to "CHNG POINT."

11
Set the evaluation conditions
How to move to the evaluation condition setting screen
There are two methods for getting to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "COND" in the upper function menu on MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
the "MEAS COND (or REG COND)" screen 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
and press the SET key. Select "EVALUATION" 2REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)
on the pop up menu to go to the "EVALUAT 3MODE GRAY-SRC
4DTECT ORDER SCAN-ORDER
COND" screen.
REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09101112131415
5DTECT OBJECT S

IMG PRE-PROC
REG-COND(S)
REG-COND(E)
EVALUATION
DST&ANGL
NUM-CALC
OUT

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

11-9
 Multiple Positional Measurement

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 DRK
item on the Menu tree screen and press the OBJECT TYPE COND
SET key.    TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
TYPE RUN COND 2CONDITION SET
IMAGE-ADJ 3NUMBER OF OBJ
4DTECT NUMBER
MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
5MATCH LVL
MEASO
6TEST
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS01(MULTI-POSI)
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND(S)
REG-COND(E)
EVALUATION COND
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "EVALUAT COND"(evaluation conditions) screen will appear.

For details about the evaluation conditions, see page 3-17.

- When "GRAY-SRC" is selected on line " EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT
MODE." 1REGISTER NO. 0(0~3) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
2CONDITION SET AUTO(–10%)
3NUMBER OF OBJ 000~128 K= NO
4DTECT NUMBER 000~(0~000)
5MATCH LVL -10000~+1000 M0= NO
X COORD. X0=
Y COORD. Y0=
6TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

11

- When "EDGE DTECT" is selected on line " EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT
MODE." 1REGISTER NO. 0(0~3) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
2CONDITION SET AUTO(–10%)
3NUMBER OF OBJ 000~128 K= NO
4DTECT NUMBER 000~(0~000)

X COORD. X0=
Y COORD. Y0=
5TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from
the popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numerical calculations."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT" from the
popup menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions.

11-10
 Multiple Positional Measurement

Display the measurement results

Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The measurement results will be dis-
played on the screen.
● An example of the display when "gray search" is selected.
(TYPE00) F C1 BRT
V*.**
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
OK
MEAS XXXXms
Measuring program number MEASUREMENT 1 MULTI-POSI

Register number REGISTER NO.0(0~3)

Number of detected images K=004 OK
Numbered in the order detected (range) DETECT NO.000(000∼003)
*1 Degree of match M=+09870 OK
Detected point coordinates X=236.0
Y=163.0
- Move the cursor to "CHG-REG (change register)"
and press the up key. The measurement result
display will change in the following order: Register *2
No. 0 (detection No. 000 -> 001-> (ooo) -> (ooo) ->
Register No. 3 (ooo) -> Register No. 0 (ooo) ->
(ooo), and so will the measurement screen. Press
the down key to change the display, moving through
the items in reverse order.
X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY □
MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

* 1 The detection order can be set to either "SCAN-ORDER " or "MATCH LVL" on item "4DETECT
ORDER" on the "MEAS CND" screen. - See page 11-3.
* 2 The inspection number corresponds to the image of the solid line.

● An example of the display when "gray search" is selected.

Register number REGISTER NO
Number of points detected K=006 OK
Numbered in the order detected
(range) *3 X=102.0
（000∼005）
DTECT NO.000 11
Y=257.0
Detected point coordinate.

*3 Coordinates of the detected point.

11-11
 Multiple Degree of Match Inspection

Chapter 12: Multiple Degree of Match Inspection

12-1 Outline
Using the gray search function, the IV-S30J can detect up to 128 workpieces whose
Purpose captured image exceeds the required degree of match with the reference image.

Applica- Inspect (or count) workpieces that have complicated light level and cannot be converted
tion into binary images.

Reference image

Exam- Four workpieces

ple detected

[Measurement results]
- Number of images detected
- Degree of match, density (average/absolute difference), and detected coordinates

12

12-1
 Multiple Degree of Match Inspection

12-2 Setting operation

Setting the measurement conditions
How to enter the measurement conditions setting screen

Select "MAIN-COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
(menu tree)-> "TYPE00" ->"MEA-CND OBJECT TYPE COND
(CAMERA1)" -> "MEAS(NEW)," in that order. TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
Then press the SET key to bring up the "MEAS1" TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
screen. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Move to the " MEAS SELECTION" line on the MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"MEASUREMENT1" screen and select "MULTI 1MEAS SELECTION MULTI MATCHES
MATCHES" from the popup menu. NO
POSI-DEVIATION
CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
MEAS-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ
LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS
MULTI-POSI

12 MULTI MATCHES

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Press the ESC key to return to the "OBJECT TYPE COND" (menu tree) screen, and select the "MEAS
CND" item shown under "MEAS01 (MULTI MATCHES)" to go to the "MEAS CND" screen.
For details, see "Chapter 8: Setting Examples Using the Menu Tree" in the Introduction and
Hardware.

12-2
 Multiple Degree of Match Inspection

DTECT PRECISION MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK

Select detection precision. You can select one
1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD STANDARD
of two levels (standard/high), according to 2REGISTER NO. 0(0~3) HIGH
your conditions, the desired precision level for 3MODE YES
detection results, and the detection speed. 4MATCHING AVG-GRAYS NO
5DETECT ORDER SCAN-ORDER
For details, see page 3-9. YES

REGISTER NO.  REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

6DTECT OBJECT S ×××
4 registers are available for the multiple
degree of match inspection (Registers 0 to 3).
If you want to set the measurement conditions SCAN-ORDER AVG-GRAYS
for a different register number, press the SET MATCH LVL DIFF.ABS
key to highlight the register number currently
selected. Then press the up and down arrow
keys to select the register number whose
measurement conditions you want to set.
Press the SET key to confirm your selection.
SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
MODE
Select detection precision.

MATCHING
Select a density for comparison when inspecting the image. The details are as follows.
Description
Average
Obtain average light level of the image in the area detected using the gray search.
light level
Calculate the difference of the absolute values from the image detected using the
Difference gray search and the reference image. The result is light level difference. By
absolute obtaining this value, you can get an idea of the total change in light level.
value Total light level difference = Σ(Ni — Nt)
Ni : Light level of the captured image (contraction 3)
Nt : Light level of the reference image (contraction 3)

DETECT ORDER
Select "SCAN-ORDER" or "MATCH LVL" on the " DETECT ORDER" line.
12
SCAN-ORDER (in the order scanned): Searches in the order scanned.
MATCH LVL (degree of match): Searches by comparing levels with the reference image.

DTECT OBJECT
"S" will be displayed for the objects to be detected.

00 01 02 03
S × × ×

12-3
 Multiple Degree of Match Inspection

How to set the register conditions

How to enter the REG-COND setting screen

There are three methods for getting to the REG-COND setting screen.

1) On the "MEAS CND" setting screen, move MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK
the cursor to the " DETECT OBJECT" and IMG PRE-PROC
press the SET key. The cursor will move into 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
2REGISTER NO. 0(0~3) REG-COND
the table. Move the cursor to the "S" column 3MODE NO EVALUATION
and press the SET key. 4MATCHING AVG-GRAYS DST&ANGL
Note: If you press the SET key in the "X" 5DETECT ORDER SCAN-ORDER NUM-CALC
column, the setting will be invalid. OUT

 REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

6DTECT OBJECT S × × ×
2) On the "MEAS CND" setting screen, press the
TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper
function menu. Select the "COND" item and
then select the "REG COND" item and press
the SET key.

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

3) On the menu tree, move the cursor to the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
"MEAS CND" item, and press the right arrow OBJECT TYPE COND
key. The sub menu which contains the "REG   + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
TYPE RUN COND
COND" item will appear. Move the cursor to IMAGE-ADJ
this item and press the SET key. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS01(MULTI MATCHES)
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND
12 EVALUATION COND
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Register a reference image REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT

After setting the reference image area, store
1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)
an image in the controller as a reference
image. 2REF-IMG AREA SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
3SEARCH AREA   SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
Select " REF-IMG AREA" using the up/
down arrow keys and select "REG" from the 4MATCH LVL(CONTR) +05000
5MATCH LVL +07000
popup menu.
Object to measure
Search area
Search direct

SEL=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

12-4
 Multiple Degree of Match Inspection

Set the coordinates for " UP.L" and " RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
LO.R." The rectangle inside the solid lines is MDL 0
the reference image. 1UP.L (224.208)
2LO.R (287.271)
3MOVE
4REFERENCE IMG

X:224 Y:208

SET=MOVE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Register a reference image RECTANGLE RESET RETURN F C1 BRT

After setting the reference image area, store MDL 0
an image in the controller as a reference 1UP.L (224.208)
image. 2LO.R (287.271)
3MOVE
Select " REFERENCE IMG" using the up/ 4REFERENCE IMG CONTRAST SRCH
down arrow keys and select "REG" from the REG
popup menu. DISP

X:224 Y:208
12
SET=DECISION ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Select a reference image

Move the cursor to the function menu on the REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
"REG COND" screen by pressing the TRG/
BRT key. Move the cursor to "DETAIL." 1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)
2REFERENCE IMG 001(000~001)
Press the SET key on the "REFERENCE 3REF-IMG AREA SET (191.210)∼(255.273)
IMG" line in the popup menu. The white 4SEARCH AREA   SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
square on the left will change to a black 5DTECT COORD CENTER (223.241) ■REFERENCE IMG ※
6CONTR.PIXL (MDL0) 3 ■DETECT CRD
square. Then, the " REFERENCE IMG" 7MATCH LVL(CONTR) +05000 ■CONTR.PIXL
item will appear on the screen. 8MATCH LVL +07000
On the " REFERENCE IMG" line, select ※ Make □ to ■ on the popup menu,
a reference image from the reference the respective item will be added to
images already registered. the "REG COND" menu.
Ex : 015 (000 to 026) SEL=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
Select reference image No. 15 from
the 26 registered reference images
(000 to 026).

12-5
 Multiple Degree of Match Inspection

SEARCH AREA
Specify the search area (inside the dotted lines) on the " SEARCH AREA" line, using the same
procedures used for setting the reference image area.

■An example

Object to measure

Search area

DTECT COORD (detection coordinates) REG COND   SCREEN COND SAVE DETAIL F C1 BRT
Select whether to use the detection
coordinates as the center of the reference 1REGISTER NO. 0(0∼3)
2REFERENCE IMG 015(000~026)
area or to allow the point to be set freely. 3REF-IMG AREA SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
4SEARCH AREA   SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
5DTECT COORD CENTER (223.241) CENTER
CENTER: The center of the rectangular area 6CONTR.PIXEL 3 SET
will automatically be used for the 7MATCH LVL(CONTR) +05000
detection coordinates. 8MATCH LVL +07000

SET: You can specify any position in the

rectangular area to be used for the
detection coordinates.

12 SEL=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Set degree of match

MATCH LVL (CONTR)
Specify the degree of match used for detection in the contracted images (detects contracted
shapes in images whose value is larger than the specified reference value).

MATCH LVL
Specify a degree of match used for detection in the original images of the contracted images that
were detected in the search at line " MATCH LVL" (detects original images which are larger
than the specified value).

12-6
 Multiple Degree of Match Inspection

Set the evaluation conditions

How to move to the evaluation condition setting screen
There are two methods for getting to the evaluation condition setting screen.

1) Select "COND" in the upper function menu on MEAS CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
the "MEAS COND (or REG COND)" screen IMG PRE-PROC
and press the SET key. Select 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
2REGISTER NO. 0(0~3) REG-COND
"EVALUATION" on the pop up menu to go to 3MODE YES EVALUATION
the "EVALUAT COND" screen. 4MATCHING AVG-GRAYS DST&ANGL
5DETECT ORDER SCAN-ORDER NUM-CALC
OUT

 REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

6DTECT OBJECT S ×××

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

2) Move the cursor to the "EVALUATION COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
item on the menu tree screen and press the OBJECT TYPE COND
SET key.   + TYPE00 1REGISTER NO.
TYPE RUN COND 2CONDITION SET
IMAGE-ADJ 3NUMBER OF OBJ
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 4DTECT NUMBER
MEAS0 5MATCH LVL
POSI-CORRECT 6GRAY LVL
MEAS01(MULTI MATCHES) 7TEST
IMG PRE-PROC
MEAS CND
REG-COND
EVALUATION COND
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC 12
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

The "EVALUAT COND"(evaluation conditions) EVALUAT COND SCREEN COND SAVE EDIT SEL F C1 BRT
screen will appear. 1REGISTER NO. 0(0~3) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
For details about the evaluation conditions, 2CONDITION SET AUTO(–10%)
see page 3-17. 3NUMBER OF OBJ 000~128 K= NO
4DTECT NUMBER 000~(0~000)
5MATCH LVL -10000~+1000 M0= NO
6GRAY LVL 000.0~255.0 G0= NO
X COORD. X0=
Y COORD. Y0=
7TEST EXEC(WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)

SET=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

12-7
 Multiple Degree of Match Inspection

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from
the popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numerical calculations."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT" from the
popup menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions.

Display the measurement results

Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The measurement results will be displayed on
the screen.
■ Display example
(TYPE00) F C1 BRT
V*.**
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
OK
MEAS XXXXms 
Measuring program number MEASUREMENT 1 MULTI-MATCHES
Register number REG.NO (0~3)
Number of detected images K=004 OK
Numbered in the order detected (range) DTECT NO.000(000~003)
Degree of match M=+09870 OK
Light level (average/absolute value) G=228.3
X=236.0
Detected coordinate
Y=163.0

X0∼6 □□□□□□□□ Y0∼7 □□□□□□□□ READY □

12 MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

12-8
 Distance and Angle Measurement

Chapter 13: Distance and Angle Measurement

13-1 Outline
You can specify the settings for distance and angle measurement on the "MEAS COND" menu in the
positional deviation measurement, degree of match inspection, object identification by binary
conversion (select "YES" for center of gravity measurement), multiple position measurement, and
multiple degree of match inspection.
See page 4-3, 5-4, 9-5, 11-4, and 12-4.

The distance and angle of the centers of the detected points can be measured using
the center detection function and the edge detection function in a gray scale search
and the center of gravity detection function, which is a part of the labeling process.
Purpose - This function can measure the following distances and angles: distance between two
points, X coordinate distance, Y coordinate distance, the angle between three points,
the horizontal angle of two points, and the vertical angle of two points.
- The following points and lines can be set: center point, circle center point, gravity
center, point where two straight lines cross, line passing through two points.
Applications Measurement for installed electronic components
[Measuring an IC package]

Reference image a

Search area
(reference image b)
Examples Search area
(reference
image a)

Reference image b

Reference images a and b are recorded when the crosshair cursor is placed on
the edge of the IC package.
- Measuring sequence
1 Obtain the center points of images a and b by running a 2 point gray scale
search.
2 Determine the distance between the two center points. 13
- For details about measuring the distance between two points, X coordinate distance, and Y
coordinate distance manually, see the MANL-MEAS (manual measurement) section (page 2-13) for
the crosshair cursor display.

13-1
 Distance and Angle Measurement

13-2 Setting operation

Setting distance and angle conditions
Select "MAIN-COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE COND" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 DRK
(menu tree) -> "TYPE00" -> "MEA-CND OBJECT TYPE COND
(CAMERA1)" -> "MEAS (NEW)," in that order. TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
Then press the SET key to bring up the "MEAS1" TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
screen. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW)
++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=NEW REGISTRATION ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Move to the " MEAS SELECTION" line on the MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK
"MEASUREMENT1" screen and select any of 1MEAS SELECTION CHK-DEG-MATCH NO
"POSI-DEVIATION," "CHK-DEG-MATCH," POSI-DEVIATION
"LABEL-BIN-OBJ," "MULTI-POSI," or "MULTI CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
MATCHES" from the popup menu. MEAS-BIN-AREA
For details, see "Chapter 8: Setting Examples CNT-BIN-OBJ
LABEL-BIN-OBJ
Using the Menu Tree" in the Introduction and POINT-MEAS
Hardware. MULTI-POSI
MULTI MATCHES

13

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

13-2
 Distance and Angle Measurement

How to display the distance and angle conditions setting screen

There are two methods for displaying the distance and angle conditions setting screen.

1) On the "MEASUREMENT 1", "MEAS CND", or MEASUREMENT 1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"REG COND" screen, press the TRG/BRG
key to move the cursor to the upper function 1MEAS SELECTION POSI-DEVEATION
IMG PRE-PROC
menu. Select "COND' using the left and right MEAS
keys and press the SET key. Select EVALUATION
"DST&ANGL" from the popup menu. DST&ANGL
NUM-CALC
OUT

2) On the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
screen, select "TYPE00" -> "MEA- OBJECT TYPE COND
CND(CAMERA1)" -> "MEAS01(POSI- TYPE00
DEVIATION)" -> "DISTANCE&ANGLE TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
COND," in that order. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS01(POSI-DEVIATION)
IMG PRE-PROC
+ MEAS CND
EVALUATION COND
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND

Setting the distance and angle conditions DIST&AGL COND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

1OBJ DST AUX

OBJ 2DISTANCE NO 00(0~15) DST
Select object type you want to measure. The 3DESTANCE NO ANGL
object types available are: "AUX" (auxiliary),
"DST" (distance), and "ANGL" (angle). The [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
setting details are different for each type.
"AUX": See page 13-4.
"DST": See page 13-6. REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415 13
"ANGL": See page 13-7. DISTANCE ××××××××××××××××

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNK

13-3
 Distance and Angle Measurement

(1) When "AUX" is selected. DIST&AGL COND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

1OBJ AUX NO
AUXILIARY NO. 2AUXILIARY NO. 01(0~15) MID-PNT
Enter a register number. The register numbers 3AUXILIARY CIRC-C CIRC-C
available are 0 to 15. 4COND.1 REG NO MDL 0 GRAV
5COND.2 REG NO MDL 0 LINE-2P
6COND.3 REG NO MDL 0 INTERSECTN

[TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]

7AUX JUDGEMENT1 000.0~511.0 X= NO
8AUX JUDGEMENT2 000.0~479.0 Y=
9RUN A TEST EXEC
AUXILIARY
Select an auxiliary point.
Selection Description Measurement position Display on the screen
NO Do not select auxiliary
point.
MID-PNT The center point is the 3AUXILIARY MID-PNT
Point 1 (X1, Y1)
coordinate half way 4COND.1 REG NO MDL 0
between points 1 and 2 5COND.2 REG NO MDL 0
that are specified on 4 Point 2 (X2, Y2) [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
6AUX JUDGEMENT1 000.0~511.0 X= NO
and 5 (COND. 1 and 7AUX JUDGEMENT2 000.0~479.0 Y=
2). Center point
8RUN A TEST EXEC
X1+X2 Y1+Y2
2 , 2

CIRC-C The center of the circle Point 1 3AUXILIARY CIRC-C

is the central coordinate Point 2 4COND.1 REG NO MDL 0
of three points 5COND.2 REG NO MDL 0
positioned on the 6COND.3 REG NO MDL 0
[TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
circumference of the 7AUX JUDGEMENT1 000.0~511.0 X= NO
circle that are specified 8AUX JUDGEMENT2 000.0~479.0 Y=
between 4 and 6 Center of the circle Point 3
9RUN A TEST EXEC
(conditions 1 to 3).
GRAV the center of gravity
Point 1 (X1, Y1) 3AUXILIARY GRAV
between points 1 to 3 Point 2 (X2, Y2)
4COND.1 REG NO MDL 0
that are specified 5COND.2 REG NO MDL 0
beween 4 and 6 is 6COND.3 REG NO MDL 0
Point 3 (X3, Y3)
calculated as the mean [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
of the three coordinates 7AUX JUDGEMENT1 000.0~511.0 X= NO
Center of Gravity
13 (conditions 1 to 3). X1+X2+X3 Y1+Y2+Y3
8AUX JUDGEMENT2 000.0~479.0
9RUN A TEST EXEC
Y=
3 , 3

LINE-2P The line passing Slice through the Y axis

through two points is (Y axis coordinate)
the line that passes Zero position (0, 0) 512
3AUXILIARY LINE-2P
through points 1 and 2
X axis 4COND.1 REG NO MDL 0
specified in items 4 5COND.2 REG NO MDL 0
and 5 (COND.1/2). Y
area
Image display

＋ Slope ( )
In this system, the X [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
480

Point 1 AUX.1:SLOPE ANGL 000.0~511.0 d1=

angle of the slope is ＋ AUX.2:Y INDENT 000.0~479.0 Y=
referred to as a Point 2 6RUN A TEST EXEC
negative angle if it is W
from the horizontal (X (Units used above: Pixel)
axis), and as a positive Y axis
Coordinates (511, 479)
angle if it is CCW from Line passing through
the horizontal (X axis). two points

INTERS- The intersection of two

3AUXILIARY INTERSECTN
ECTN lines is the point where Line 2 4COND.1 AUX NO
Line 1
lines 1 and 2, specified 5COND.2 AUX NO
in items 4 and 5 [TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
(COND.1/2),cross. 6AUX JUDGEMENT1 000.0~511.0 X= NO
7AUX JUDGEMENT2 000.0~479.0 Y=
8RUN A TEST EXEC
Intersection

13-4
 Distance and Angle Measurement

COND. 1, COND. 2, ( COND.3)

Specify conditions for the auxiliary points that were selected in the " AUXILIARY" item.

How to enter COND.1 and COND.2.

4COND.1 REG NO MDL 0

5COND.2 REG NO MDL 0

A B
A: Enter a register number from one of the measurement programs already registered.
B: Select a model: 0 or 1.

AUX JUDGEMENT1, AUX JUDGEMENT2

Specify judgment conditions for X and Y.
[TEST RESULT]: When executing a test from the " RUN A TEST" line the result will be
displayed here.
[OUTPUT]: Specify a destination for the output of test results: "NO," "Y," or "C."

RUN A TEST
Press the SET key to execute a test.

13

13-5
 Distance and Angle Measurement

(2) When "DST" is selected.

DISTANCE NO. DIST&AGL COND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

Enter a register number. The register numbers
1OBJ DST
available are 0 to 15. 2DISTANCE NO. 01(0~15)
NO
DIST-BETW-2PT
3DISTANCE DIST-BETW-2PT DIST-BETW-X
4COND.1 REG NO MDL 0 DIST-BETW-Y
5COND.2 REG NO MDL 0
[TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
6DISTANCE EVALUAT 000.0~702.0 NO

7RUN A TEST EXEC

REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

DISTANCE ○×××××××××××××××

DISTANCE SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Select an distance.

NO Do not select distance.

The distance
between 2 The distance between 2 points
points 2 2
(X2-X1) +(Y2-Y1)

Point 1 (X1, Y1)

Point 2 (X2, Y2)

The distance
The distance between X
between X
coordinates (｜X2-X1｜)
coordinates

Point 1 (X1, Y1)

Point 2 (X2, Y2)
13
The distance Point 1 (X1, Y1)
between Y
coordinates

The distance between Y

Point 2 (X2, Y2)
coordinates (｜Y2-Y1｜)

COND. 1 COND. 2
Specify conditions for the distance that were selected in the " DISTANCE" item.

DISTANCE EVALUAT
Specify judgment conditions for distance.
[TEST RESULT]: When executing a test from the " RUN A TEST" line the result will be
displayed here.
[OUTPUT]: Specify a destination for the output of test results: "NO," "Y," or "C."

RUN A TEST
Press the SET key to execute a test.

13-6
 Distance and Angle Measurement

(3) When "ANGL" is selected.

DIST&AGL COND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

ANGL NO.
Enter a register number. The register numbers 1OBJ ANGL
available are 0 to 15. 2ANGL NO. 00(0~15) NO
3ANGL 3PT-ANGL 3PT-ANGL
4COND.1 REG NO MDL 0 2PT-H-ANGL
5COND.2 REG NO MDL 0 2PT-V-ANGL
6COND.3 REG NO MDL0
[TEST RESULT] [OUTPUT]
7ANGL EVALUATION -180.0~+180.0¡ B= ¡ NO

8RUN A TEST EXEC

REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

ANGL DISTANCE
○×××××××××××××××
Select the angle specifying method.

NO Do not select angle.

Point 1 is the point of inter section
of the two lines. Relative to the line +Angle (∼+180.0 )
Point 2
between points 1 and 2, the line
Point 2
between points 1 and 3 will be said Point 3
3PT-A-
to be at a positive angle if the angle Point 1 +Angle
NGL (-180.0 ∼)
is measured in a counterclockwise
direction, and it will be at a negative Point 1

angle if it is measured in a Point 3

clockwise direction.
When a 2-point horizontal angle is
specified, relative to the horizontal
line, the line from point 2 that Point 2

intersects point 1 will be said to at a +angle

2PT-H-
positive angle if the angle is
ANGL Horizontal line
measured in a counterclockwise Point 1
direction and at a negative angle if
it is measured in a clockwise
direction.
When a 2-point vertical angle is
specified, relative to the vertical
13
line, the line from point 2 that Vertical line
intersects point 1 will be said to at a Point 2
2PT-V- +angle
positive angle if the angle is
ANGL Point 1
measured in a counterclockwise
direction and at a negative angle if
it is measured in a clockwise
direction.

COND. 1, COND. 2, COND.3

Specify conditions for the angle that were selected in the " ANGL" item.

ANGL EVALUATION
Specify judgment conditions for angle.
[TEST RESULT]: When executing a test from the " RUN A TEST" line the result will be
displayed here.
[OUTPUT]: Specify a destination for the output of test results: "NO," "Y," or "C."

RUN A TEST
Press the SET key to execute a test.

13-7
 Distance and Angle Measurement

Numeric calculation setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to show the popup menu. Select "NUM-CALC" from
the popup menu.
- Select "NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 14: Numerical calculation."

Output condition setting

- Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function menu, and highlight "COND" using
the left and right arrow keys. Press the SET key to display the popup menu. Select "OUT" from the
popup menu.
- Select "OUT-COND" on the menu tree.
See "Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions."

Display the measurement results

Return to the operation screen and press the TRG/BRT key. The measurement results will be
displayed on the screen.
To display the measurement results, select "COND-CHG" or "DIST&ANG COND…" on the lower menu
bar and press the right arrow key. On the popup menu, select which item you want to display: "AUX,"
"DST," or "ANGL." Then press the SET key. On the "CHNG-REG" item, press the up and down arrow
keys and the display will change.

Example of the results displayed for a distance measurement

(TYPE00) F C1 DRK
V*.**
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
OK
MEAS XXXXms
Measurement program number MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION

Measurement object MXR

Distance of distance number 00 00:100.0 OK
" 01 01:100.0 OK
" 02 02:050.0 OK
" 03 03:360.0 OK
" 04 04:250.0 OK
" 05 05:
" 06 06:
" 07 07:
(Number of pixels)
*Areas will not be displayed for
unspecified registration numbers.
13 MEA-CND AUX
DST&ANG COND･･･ DST
X0∼6 □□□□□□□□ Y0∼7 □□□□□□□□ NUMERIC CALC ANGL

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

Example of the displayed of angle results

Measurement object ANGL

Angle of angle number 00 00:＋080.0゜ OK
" 01 01:＋070.0゜ OK
" 02 02:＋050.0゜ OK
" 03 03:＋088.2゜ OK
" 04 04:＋00 6.5゜OK
" 05 05:
" 06 06:
" 07 07:

Example of the displayed of auxiliary results

Measurement object AUX

Angle of auxiliary number 00 00: (259.0, 178.0) OK
" 01 01: (466.0, 178.0) OK
" 02 02: (361.0, 228.0) OK
" 03 03: (132.0, 298.0) OK
" 04 04: (362.5, 178.0) OK
" 05 05:
" 06 06:
" 07 07:

13-8
 Numerical Calculations

Chapter 14 Numerical Calculations

14-1 Outline
Numeric calculation function of the IV-S30J consists of "numeric calculations," which is set individually
for each measurement program, and "final numeric calculations," which are set according to object
type. The N00 to N15 results of the calculations which are set individually for each measuring
program may be used according to the "TYPE" and "FORMULA" settings of the final numerical
calculation.

14-2 The individual numerical calculations for each measuring program

How to display the numerical calculation conditions setting screen
There are two methods for displaying the numerical calculation conditions setting screen.

1) Select "MAIN COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 DRK
COND" (menu tree) -> "TYPE00" -> "MEA- OBJECT TYPE COND
CND (CAMERA1)" -> "MEAS(NEW)," in that TYPE00 1MEAS SELECTION
order. On the " MEAS SELECTION" line, TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
select any of the measurement programs. MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
Note: When " MEAS SELECTION" is left set MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
to "NO," you cannot specify a numerical MEAS(NEW)
calculation function. ++ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM. CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/0
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

On either the MEAS CND, or REG-COND When the position deviation measurement is
screen, press the TRG/BRT key to move the selected
cursor to the upper function menu. Select MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK

"COND" and then from the popup menu, select 1MEAS SELECTION POSI-DEVIATION IMG PRE-PROC
the "NUM-CALC" item. MEAS
EVALUATION
Note: The items shown in the popup menu will DST&ANGL
vary with the measurement program NUM-CALC
OUT
selected.

2) Open the sub menu for "MEAS0" or "MEAS1" SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
on the menu tree, and select "NUM-CALC." OBJECT TYPE COND
TYPE00 N00
Then press the SET key.
TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ N01
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 14
MEAS0(POSI-DEVIATION) N02
IMG PRE-PROC
+ MEAS CND N03
EVALUATION COND
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND N04
NUM-CALC
OUT-COND N05
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS(NEW) N06
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC N07
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Note

- Numeric calculation errors (deviation from the exact value) after digitizing the image
Since the IV-S30J` uses 64-bit, floating-point arithmetic operations in its calculations, small
quantization errors may occur when converting the images into numbers.

14-1
 Numerical Calculations

Setting details
The setting details and procedures for numerical calculations are the same for all measurement
programs with the exception of the point measurement program. In this section we explain the use of
the numerical calculations menu [NUMERIC CALC] for positional measurements.

"CHG-CALC"
Move the cursor to the "CHG-CALC" item. - [NUMERIC CALC] screen on positional deviation
Each time you press the SET key the display measurement
in the left most column will alternate between NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
"AN00 to AN07" and "AN08 to AN15." [N00-N07]
C F E D
CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY)
RUN A TEST TYPE FORMULA
Pressing the SET key will store the setting N00 C ＋0000002.0000
details as well as run a test
The numerical results of the tests will be N01 X 0X0＊N00 Y0
＋0000400.0000∼＋0000410.0000 ＋0000406.0000 OK
displayed at position [F] and the OK or NG
N02
judgment will be displayed at position [E]. A
N03 CRD-X B
A: TYPE CRD-Y OBJECT TYPE
Select the type of data being calculated. N04 DEV-x CALC RESULT
The details displayed for each measuring DEV-y CNST
N05 MATCH M SUM
program.
ANGL-B AVG
See page 14-5 to 14-8. N06
NUM-CAL[NC] CBP
CNST[C] CBM
N07
NO DEL
SET=EXEC ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
B: FORMULA
Select the formula to apply. Select formula using the left and right arrow keys and enter
numerical values using the up and down arrow keys.
The details displayed for "FORMULA" will depend on the "TYPE" selected.
Item selections Selection on line
CRD-X, CRD-Y, DEV-x, DEV-y, OBJECT TYPE, CALC RESULT, CNST, SUM, AVG, CBP,
MATCH M, ANGL B CBM, DEL
NUM-CAL [NC] ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN, MAX, MIN, DEL

CNST [C] +0000000.0000 (second line is not displayed)

For details about the items that can be selected with other measurement programs, see
pages 14-5 to 14-8.

C: UPR&LOW LIMIT
14 Enter the upper and lower limits for making a judgment.

D: OUTPUT
Setting the output of the calculation results. Select an output target: "NO," "Y," or "C."
The output can be set to Y0 to Y7 or C000 to C107.
- The number of styles may be set as follows, depending on the selections made in items A and
B.
OBJECT TYPE Model 0 Model 1
CRD [X Y] 00X0 to 07X0 / 00Y0 to 07Y0 00X1 to 07X1 / 00Y1 to 07Y1
DEV [x y] 0x0 to 7x0 / 0y0 to 7y0 0x1 to 7x1 / 0y1 to 7y1 Corresponds to
page 14-4.
MATCH [M] 00M0 to 07M0 00M1 to 07M1
ANGL [B] 0B to 7B
ABS / SQRT / TAN / ATAN (00 to 14) These are the
NUM-CAL [NC] same as for the
MAX/MIN (00 to 14)
other
CNST [C] -9999999.9999 to +9999999.9999 measurement
The numbers from 00 to 07 in front of the characters are registration programs.

14-2
 Numerical Calculations

Setting procedure Setting the headings on the [NUMERIC CALC]

(numerical calculation conditions) screen.
Specify the output for the
N00 to N15
results of the calculations

Select the data to be calculated TYPE

Enter the number of styles FORMULA

(Select an arithmetic function)

Set the judgment output conditions OUTPUT

Carry out a calculation 1RUN A TEST

Enter the upper and lower limits UPR & LOW LIMIT

Not done
All recording is finished

Done
Previous menu "RETURN"
Output error
An error will be output if there are too many digits as well as if there is an attempt to divide by zero.

Order of calculation
The calculation results are produced in order, from N00 to N15.

Parallel output based on the output conditions

It is possible to use the parallel output for the evaluation results from the calculations by selecting the
PC function in the output conditions (the final output conditions are taken from the output conditions
set for each measurement program)

Types and number of styles of entered for each measurement program

The table shown below contains the numeric formulas that can be assigned in "TYPE" and
"FORMULA" on the "NUMERIC CALC" screen, for each measurement program.

Measurement program
Input types Symbol Positional deviation Degree of mat ch
Lead inspection
measur ement inspection
Model 0: 0M0 to 7M0 Model 0: 00M0 to 15M0
Degree of match M
Model 1: 0M1 to 7M1 Model 1: 00M1 to 15M1

Coodinate X
Model 0: 0X0 to 7X0
Model 1: 0X1 to 7X1
Model 0: 00X0 to 15X0
Model 1: 00X1 to 15X1
14
Model 0: 0Y0 to 7Y0 Model 0: 00Y0 to 15Y0
Coodinate Y
Model 1: 0Y1 to 7Y1 Model 1: 00Y1 to 15Y1
Model 0: 0x0 to 7x0
Deviation x
Model 1: 0x1 to 7x1
Model 0: 0y0 to 7y0
Deviation y
Model 1: 0y1 to 7y1
Model 0: 0B0 to 7B0
Angle B
Model 1: 0B1 to 7B1
Model 0: 00G0 to 15G0
Light level G
Model 1: 00G1 to 15G1
Number of objects K 00K to 31K
MAX: MXD 00MXD to 15MXD
Distance
MIN: MND 00MND to 15MND
MAX: MXW 00MXW to 15MXW
Lead width
MIN: MNW 00MNW to 15MNW

Lead length MAX: MXL 00MXL to 15MXL

/Lead width 2 MIN: MNL 00MNL to 15MNL
Numeric
N N0 to N15 N0 to N15 N0 to N15
culculation results

14-3
 Numerical Calculations

Measurement program
Input types Symbol BGA/CSP Area measurement by binary Counting quantities
inspection conversion by binary conversion
Number of masks= 1: 00A to 15A
Total area A 0A to 3A Number of masks= 2: 0A to 7A 0A to 3A
Number of masks= 4: 0A to 3A
Number of objects K 0K to 3K 0K to 3K
MAX: MXR 0MXR to 3MXR
Area of each label
MIN: MNR 0MNR to 3MNR
Distance between MAX: XDX 0XDX to 3XDX
gravity centers X MIN: NDX 0NDX to 3NDX
Distance between MAX: XDY 0XDY to 3XDY
gravity centers Y MIN: NDY 0NDY to 3NDY
MAX: XFX 0XFX to 3XFX
Fellet diameter X
MIN: NFX 0NFX to 3NFX
MAX: XFY 0XFY to 3XFY
Fellet diameter Y
MIN: NFY 0NFY to 3NFY
Numerical
calculation result N N0 to N15 N0 to N15 N0 to N15

Measurement program
Input types Symbol Label measurement by
Point measur ement
binary conversion
Total area A 0A to 3A
Number of objects K 0K to 3K

Area of each label R 0R000 to 0R127 3R000 to 3R127

X coordinate of 0GX000 to 0GX127 3GX000 to
GX
gravity center 3GX127
Y coordinate of 0GY000 to 0GY127 3GY000 to
GY
gravity center 3GY127
0B000 to 0B127 3B000 to 3B127
Main axis angle B
0FX000 to 0FX127 3FX000 to
Fellet diameter X FX
3FX127
0FY000 to 0FY127 3FY000 to
Fellet diameter Y FY
3FY127
Perimeter of each 0CR000 to 0CR127 3CR000 to
CR
object 3CR127
0CX000 to 0CX127 3CX000 to
Center point X CX
3CX127
0CY000 to 0CR127 3CY000 to
Center point Y CY
3CY127
Average light level G 000G to 127G

14 Counting white
WC (Count all the objects registered)
objects
Number of (Corresponds to the whole number
RC
registers of registers)
Numerical N N0 to N15 N0 to N15
calculation results

Measurement program Distance and

Input types Symbol angle
Multiple positions Multiple degree of
measurements
measurement match inspection
Number of objects K 0K to 3K 0K to 3K
Degree of match M 0M000 to 3M127 0M000 to 3M127
Coordinate X 0X000 to 3X127 0X000 to 3X127
Coordinate Y 0Y000 to 3Y127 0Y000 to 3Y127
Density G 0G000 to 3G127
Auxiliary 1 H1 00H1 to 15H1
Auxiliary 2 H2 00H2 to 15H2
Distance D 00D to 15D
Angle B 00B to 15B
Numerical calculation
N N0 to N15 N0 to N15 N0 to N15
result

14-4
 Numerical Calculations

[1] Display lists on the "NUMERIC CALC" screen

This section displays the "NUMERIC CALC" screen for each measuring program.
The details displayed for "FORMULA" will depend on the "TYPE" selected.

(1) Positional deviation measurement

See page 14-2.

(2) Degree of match inspection

NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT The details displayed for "FORMULA" will
[N00-N07] depend on the "TYPE" selected.
CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY) Selection of type Selection of formula
TYPE FORMULA MATCH M
N00 OBJECT TYPE, CALC RESULT,
MATCH M CRD-X
CNST, SUM, AVG, CBP, CBM,
CRD-X CRD-Y
N01 DEL
CRD-Y LVL G
LVL G
N02 ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN, MAX,
NUM-CAL[NC] NUM-CAL[NC]
MIN, DEL
CNST[C]
N03
NO CNST[C] +0000000,000
N04

(3) Lead inspection

NUMERIEC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT The details displayed for "FORMULA" will
[N00-N07] depend on the "TYPE" selected.
CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY) Selection of type Selection of formula
TYPE FORMULA
N00 OBJ-K OBJECT TYPE,
OBJ-K
DISTANCE MAX MXD/MIN MND CALC RESULT,
DISTANCE MAX MXD
N01 LEAD WIDTH MAX MXW/MIN MNW CNST, SUM, AVG,
DISTANCE MIN MND
LEAD-LENGTH MAX MXL/MIN MNL CBP, CBM, DEL
LEAD WIDTH MAX MXW
N02
LEAD-WIDTH MIN MNW ABS, SQRT, TAN,
LEAD-LENGTH MAX MXL NUM-CAL[NC] ATAN, MAX, MIN,
N03
LEAD-LENGTH MIN MNL DEL
N04 NUM-CAL[NC] CNST[C] +0000000,000
CNST[C]
N05 NO

N06

(4) Area measurement by binary conversion

NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT The details displayed for "FORMULA" will 14
[N00-N07] depend on the "TYPE" selected.
CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY) Selection of type Selection of formula
TYPE FORMULA OBJECT TYPE, CALC
N00 TOTAL-AREA-A TOTAL-AREA-A RESULT, CNST, SUM, AVG,
NUM-CAL[NC] CBP, CBM, DEL
N01 CNST[C]
NO
ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN, MAX,
N02
NUM-CAL[NC]
MIN, DEL

N03 CNST[C] +0000000,000

14-5
 Numerical Calculations

(5) Object counting by binary conversion

NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT The details displayed for "FORMULA" will
[N00-N07] depend on the "TYPE" selected.
CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY) Selection of type Selection of formula
TYPE FORMULA OBJECT TYPE, CALC
N00 TOTAL-AREA-A TOTAL-AREA-A
RESULT, CNST, SUM, AVG,
OBJ-K OBJ-K
CBP, CBM, DEL
N01 NUM-CAL[NC]
CNST[C] ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN, MAX,
N02 NUM-CAL[NC]
MIN, DEL

N03 CNST[C] +0000000,000

N04

N05

N06

N07

SET=EXEC ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

(6) Object identification of binary conversion

NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT The details displayed for "FORMULA" will
[N00-N07] depend on the "TYPE" selected.
CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY) Selection of type Selection of formula
TYPE FORMULA TOTAL-AREA-A
N00 OBJ-K
TOTAL-AREA-A
OBJ-K OBJCT-AREA-R
N01 OBJECT TYPE, CALC
OBJECT-AREA-R C-GRAVS GX/GY
RESULT, CNST, SUM, AVG,
C-GRAVS X GX X FILLET-W FX/FY
N02 CBP, CBM, DEL
C-GRAVS Y GY AX.ANGL[B]
X FILLET-W FX LB-CIRCUM[CR]
N03
Y FILLET-W FY MID-PNT CX/CY
N04 AX.ANGL[B] ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN,
LB-CIRCUM[CR] NUM-CAL[NC]
MAX, MIN, DEL
N05 MID-PNT X CX
MID-PNT Y CY CNST[C] +0000000,000
N06 NUM-CAL[NC]
CNST[C]
N07
NO

SET EXEC ESC BACK SEL CHNG IMG TRG FUNC

14

14-6
 Numerical Calculations

(7) Point measurement

When "BINARY" is selected on the "1MODE" When "AVG-GRAYS" is selected on the "1MODE"
NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

[N00-N07] [N00-N07]
CHG-CALC CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY) 1RUN A TEST (SET KEY)

TYPE FORMULA TYPE FORMULA

N00 N00 AVG-GRAYS[G]
WHT.CNT/REG.NO[WRC]
NUM-CAL[NC] OBJ TYPES REG.LIST
N01 N01 NUM-CAL[NC]
CNST[C]
NO CNST[C]
N02 N02
NO

N03

The details displayed for "FORMULA" will

depend on the "TYPE" selected.
Selection of type Selection of formula Selection of type Selection of formula

WHT.CNT[WC], OBJECT TYPE, CALC

WHT.CNT/REG.NO[WRC] REG.NO[WRC], NUM-CAL, AVG-GRAYS[G] RESULT, CNST, SUM,
CNST,DEL AVG, CBP, CBM, DEL

ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN, WHT.CNT[WC],

NUM-CAL[NC]
MAX, MIN, DEL WHT.CNT/REG.NO[WRC] REG.NO[WRC], NUM-CAL,
CNST,DEL
CNST[C] +0000000,000
ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN,
NUM-CAL[NC]
MAX, MIN, DEL

CNST[C] +0000000,000

(8) Multiple positional measurement

NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT The details displayed for "FORMULA" will
[N00-N07] depend on the "TYPE" selected.
CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY) Selection of type Selection of formula
TYPE FORMULA
OBJ-K
N00 OBJ-K OBJECT TYPE, CALC RESULT,
MATCH M
MATCH M CNST, SUM, AVG, CBP, CBM, DEL
CRD X/Y
N01 CRD-X
CRD-Y ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN, MAX,
N02 NUM-CAL[NC]
NUM-CAL[NC] MIN, DEL
CNST[C]
N03 CNST[C] +0000000,000
NO
N04 14
(9) Multiple degree of match inspection
NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT The details displayed for "FORMULA" will
[N00-N07] depend on the "TYPE" selected.
CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY) Selection of type Selection of formula
TYPE FORMULA OBJ-K
N00 OBJ-K MATCH M OBJECT TYPE, CALC RESULT,
MATCH M LVL G CNST, SUM, AVG, CBP, CBM, DEL
N01 LVL G CRD X/Y
CRD-X
N02 CRD-Y ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN, MAX,
NUM-CAL[NC]
NUM-CAL[NC] MIN, DEL
N03
CNST[C]
CNST[C] +0000000,000
NO
N04

N05

14-7
 Numerical Calculations

(10) Distance and angle measurement

NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT The details displayed for "FORMULA" will
[N00-N07] depend on the "TYPE" selected.
CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY) Selection of type Selection of formula
TYPE FORMULA DST[D]
N00 DST[D] OBJECT TYPE, CALC RESULT,
ANGL[B]
ANGL[B] CNST, SUM, AVG, CBP, CBM, DEL
AUX[H1/H2]
N01 AUX H1
AUX H2 ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN, MAX,
N02 NUM-CAL[NC]
NUM-CAL[NC] MIN, DEL
CNST[C]
N03 CNST[C] +0000000,000
NO
N04

N05

N06

N07

SET=EXEC ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

14

14-8
 Numerical Calculations

14-3 Final numerical calculations

Final numerical calculations can be set at item "FINAL NUM-CALC" on the menu tree.
The setting procedure, error output settings, calculation sequence and parallel output based on the
output conditions are exactly the same as those used for item "14-2 The individual numerical
calculations for each measuring program."

How to display the final numerical calculation SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C2 BRT
screen. OBJECT TYPE COND AN00
Open the sub menu for "TYPExx" on the menu tree TYPE00
and select "FINAL NUM. CALC." Then press the TYPE RUN COND AN01
SET key. IMAGE-ADJ
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA1) AN02
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
AN03
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
AN04
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
AN05
TYPE(NEW)
AN06

AN07

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

Settings on the final numerical calculation screen.

The display positions of each item selected are the NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
same as in section "14-2 The individual numerical [N00-N07]
C D F E
calculation for each measurement program." CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY)
See the next page for the display details.
TYPE FORMULA
AN00 N ＋0000002.0000

AN01 AN 0X0＊N00 Y0
＋0000400.0000∼＋0000410.0000 ＋0000406.0000 OK
AN02
A
B
AN03 MEAS-CAL-RESULT[N]
A-CAL-RESULT[AN] OBJECT TYPE
AN04 NUM-CAL[NC] CNST
CNST[C] SUM
AN05 NO AVG
CBP
AN06
CBM 14
DEL
AN07

SET=EXEC ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

14-9
 Numerical Calculations

"CHG-CALC"
Move the cursor to the "CHG-CALC" item. Each time you press the SET key the display in the
left most column will alternate between "AN00 to AN07" and "AN08 to AN15."

RUN A TEST
Pressing the SET key will store the setting details as well as run a test
The numerical results of the tests will be displayed at position [F] and the OK or NG judgment
will be displayed at position [E].

A: TYPE
Select the type of data being calculated.

B: FORMULA
A number of style settings are used. The style type is selected using the left and right keys and
the numerical values are entered using the up and down keys.
The details displayed for "FORMULA" will depend on the "TYPE" selected.
Selected of type Formula
MEAS-CAL-RESULT[N] OBJECT TYPE, CNST, SUM, AVG, CBP,
A-CAL-RESULT[AN] CBM, DEL
NUM-CAL[NC] ABS, SQRT, TAN, ATAN, MAX, MIN, DEL
CNST[C] +0000000,000 (second line is not displayed)
Note: When "SUM" (total) or "AVG" (average) is selected for calculating the results, specify the
range from 0 to 15.

C: UPR&LOW LIMIT
Enter the upper and lower limits for making a judgment

D: OUTPUT
Setting the output of the calculation results.
Based on the settings at items "TYPE" and "FORMULA," the number of styles may be entered
as follows.
OBJECT TYPE Number of styles
01N00 to 01N15 (Calculation result for measurement 0, camera 1: N00 to 15)
02N00 to 02N15 (Calculation result for measurement 0, camera 2: N00 to 15)
MEAS-CAL-RESULT [N]
10N00 to 10N15 (Calculation result for measurement 1: N00 to 15)
(Results of the calculations
20N00 to 20N15 (Calculation result for measurement 2: N00 to 15)
for measurements)
30N00 to 30N15 (Calculation result for measurement 3: N00 to 15)
14 40N00 to 40N15 (Calculation result for measurement 4: N00 to 15)
A-CAL-RESULT [AN]
(Results of final calculations) AN00 to AN15
NUM-CAL [NC] ABS / SQRT / TAN / ATAN (00 to 15)
(Numerical calculations) MAX/MIN (00 to 15)
CNST [C] (Constant) -9999999.99 to +9999999.99

14-10
 Numerical Calculations

14-4 Setting examples

The example below shows the settings used to evaluate and output the X-Y coordinates (differences)
of the detection points in images 0 and 1, using the evaluation calculation. (Degree of match
inspection See Chapter 5: Output See Chapter 15: PC Function.)
Image 0 X coordinate difference
Object to be measured

Point detected in image 1

Point detected in image 0 (register number 01, model 0)
(register number 00, model 0)

Y coordinate difference Image 1

(1) Image setting

After specifying the images, return to the "MEA CND" screen for the degree of match inspection.

(2) Operations on the "MEA CND" screen

Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the MEA CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
upper function menu. Select "COND" and press
1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD IMG PRE-PROC
the SET key. Select "NUM-CALC" from the popup REG COND
2REGISTER NO. 00(0~15)
menu and then press the SET key. 3MODE
EVALUATION
1P-SCH
DST&ANGL
4SEARCH YES
NUM-CALC
5MATCHING AVG-GRAYS OUT

REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415

6MDL 0 S ×××××××××××××××
7MDL 1 ××××××××××××××××

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

(3) Operations on the "NUMERIC CALC" screen

1. Select position "A" (2nd cell in the "TYPE"
NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE
[N00-N07]
F C1 BRT
14
column) on the "N00" line using the up and CHG-CALC
1RUN A TEST (SET KEY)
down arrow keys. Select "CRD-X" from the
popup menu and then press the SET key. TYPE FORMULA
N00
2. Move the cursor to position "B" (2nd cell in the OBJECT TYPE
B CALC RESULT
"FORMULA" column) and press the SET key. N01 A
"00X0" will be displayed in the "FORMULA" CNST
MATCH M
N02 SUM
column. Select a digit using the left and right CRD-X
AVG
arrow keys. Press the SET key. Then change N03
CRD-Y
CBP
the selected digit "01X0" by using the up and LVL G
CBM
down keys. N04 NUM-CAL[NC]
DEL
CNST[C]
N00 X 01X0
N05 NO
＋0000000.00∼＋0000000.00

N06
"01X0" is referring to the X coordinate of
register number 01 (image 1) and model 0. N07

SET=EXEC ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

14-11
 Numerical Calculations

Press the SET key, the cursor will move to the right. Press the SET key again and a popup
menu will appear. Select the "-" and press the SET key.
- The cursor will appear to the right of the "-." Press the SET key and a popup menu will appear.
Select a "TYPE" and press the SET key.
00X0 will be displayed in the formula field.
N00 X 01X0−00X0
＋0000000.00∼＋0000000.00

00x0 refers to the X coordinate of the detection point in model 0, stored in register NO.00 (image
0).

3. Move the cursor to the 2nd line using the up and down arrow keys and set the upper limit value
using the left and right arrow keys. Then press the SET key. Then select a digit to change using
the left and right arrow keys. Repeat this procedure to set the value to +160.0000 and then press
the SET key.
+0000000.0000~+0000160.0000

Upper limit
Move the cursor to the lower limit using the left and right keys, and press the SET key. Select a
digit using the left and right keys Enter the number +140.00 using the up and down keys, and
press the SET key.
+0000140.0000~+0000160.0000

Lower limit
+0000140.0000 to +0000160.0000 will be displayed in the lower and upper limit fields.

4. Move the cursor to the "N01" line and the "TYPE" column using the up/down keys.
- As described in steps 2 to 3, enter 01Y0 to 00Y0 in the formula field, and inter +0000090.0000
to +0000095.0000 in the upper and lower limit fields.
N00 X 01X0−00X0
＋0000140.00∼＋0000160.00
N01 Y 01Y0−00Y0
＋0000090.00∼＋0000095.00

5. Move the cursor to the " RUN A TEST" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
Press the SET key once more. Then the settings will be stored, and the test will be executed.
The evaluation result (OK/NG) of the calculations will be displayed.
N00 X 01X0−00X0
＋0000140.00∼＋0000160.00 ＋0000147.00 OK
N01 Y 01Y0−00Y0
＋0000090.00∼＋0000095.00 ＋0000091.00 OK
14
OK: When the test result based on the calculations is within the specified range
NG: When the test result based on the calculations is outside of the specified range

6. Press the ESC key to return to the "MEA-CND" setting screen.

14-12
 Numerical Calculations

(4) Operation on the "OUTPUT COND" screen

1. On the "MEA CND" setting screen, press the MEA CND SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK
TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper
function menu. Select the "COND" item and 1DTECT PRECISION STANDARD
2REGISTER NO. 00(0~15) IMG PRE-PROC
then select the "OUT" item and press the SET REG COND
3MODE 1P-SCH
key. 4SEARCH EVALUATION
YES
DST&ANGL
5MATCHING AVG-GRAYS
NUM-CALC
OUT
REGISTER NO. 0001020304 05 060708 09 101112131415
6MDL 0 S ×××××××××××××××
7MDL 1 ××××××××××××××××

2. Select the "INPUT00" line and row 0. Then OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
press the SET key. Select "NUM-CAL[NC]"
Column No.
from the popup menu and press the SET key.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT
INPUT00
LOGIC
INPUT01 MATCH M
LOGIC CRD-X
INPUT02 CRD-Y
LOGIC LVL G
INPUT03 NUM-CAL[NC]
3. Move the cursor to the "LOGIC" line on the DEL
LOGIC AUX.RLY-C
same row and press the SET key. Select " " INPUT04
from the popup menu and press the SET key. LOGIC
INPUT05

The logical condition will be displayed in the left most column of the LOGIC row under INPUT 0.
[PAGE0] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUTPUT
INPUT0 N00
LOGIC

- N00 refers to the N00 calculation result, that was entered on the "NUMERIC CALC" screen.

4. Select the "INPUT00" line and row 1. Then press the SET key. Set "NUM-CAL[NC]" using the
same procedures as in Steps 2 and 3 above. Since "N00" will appear first, press the SET key
and change "N00" to "N01," using the up/down/left/right arrow keys.
[PAGE0] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUTPUT
INPUT0 N00 N01
LOGIC

5. Move the cursor to the "OUT" row using the left and right arrow keys, and press the SET key. 14
Select "AUX-RLY" from the popup menu and press the SET key.

6. A list of auxiliary relays will be displayed. Select "C000" using the up and down arrow keys and
press the SET key.
AUX-RLY Use place
The output coil for INPUT 0 will be displayed.
[PAGE0] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUTPUT C000 MEAS1/OUTPUT COND
C000 C001 NO
INPUT0 N00 N01
C002 NO
LOGIC C003 NO
C004 NO
7. Press the ESC key to move to the "MEA-CND" setting screen. C005 NO
C006 NO
C007 NO

14-13
 Numerical Calculations

(5) Operations on the "FINAL OUTPUT COND" screen

1. Select "FINAL OUTPUT COND" on the "SELECT OBJECT TYPE SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND
COND" screen, to display the final output conditions screen. OBJECT TYPE COND
TYPE00
TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
+ MEAS0
POSI-CORRECT
MEAS (NEW)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

2. Move the cursor to "INPUT00" and row 0, and OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
press the SET key. Select "AUX. RLY-C."
from the popup menu and press the SET key.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT
INPUT00
LOGIC
INPUT01 AUX.RLY-C OUTPUT Y
LOGIC EXT-INP X AUX.RLY-C
INPUT02 TMR TM TMR TM
LOGIC CNTR CN CNTR CN
INPUT03 DEL
AN
LOGIC
OUTPUT Y
INPUT04
LOGIC
INPUT05
LOGIC
INPUT06
LOGIC
INPUT07
LOGIC

SET=SELECT TYPE SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

The following logical symbol will be displayed in the left most column of INPUT 0.
[PAGE0] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUTPUT
INPUT0 C000
LOGIC

3. Move the cursor to the "OUT" row using the left and right arrow keys, and press the SET key.
14 Select "OUTPUT Y" from the popup menu and press the SET key.

4. Now, a list of the Y outputs will be displayed. Select "Y0" using the up and down arrow keys, and
press the SET key.
The output coil for INPUT 0 will be displayed.
[PAGE0] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUTPUT Y OUTPUT Use place
INPUT0 C000 Y00
Y0 FINAL OUTPUT COND
LOGIC Y1 NO
Y2 NO
5. Press the TRG/BRT key to move the cursor to the upper function Y3 NO
menu. Then select "SCREEN" and press the SET key. Select "OPS- Y4 NO
MENU" from the popup menu and press the SET key. Y5 NO
Select the operation screen. Y6 NO
Y7 NO

14-14
 Numerical Calculations

(6) Degree of match inspection

Press the TRG/BRT key, and the will calculate the X-Y coordinates of the detection points in images 0
and 1, and then evaluate and output the results.

(TYPE00) F C1 BRT
V*.**
OK
MEAS XXXXms
MEASUREMENT 1 CHK-DEG-MATCH

REGISTER N00(0~15)
M0=+09735 OK
X0= 090.0 OK
Y0= 092.0 OK
G0= 018.0 OK

X0∼6 Y0∼7 READY

MNU-CHG MAIN-COND CHG-MEA COND-CHG CHNG-REG SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE

If the difference in the X and Y coordinates is within the range set on the numeric
calculation menu, Y0 will be turned ON, and a filled box will be displayed. If the
difference is not within the range, Y0 will be turned OFF, and an empty box will be
displayed.
N00 N01 C000
Output conditions - If the result is within the range,
N00 and N01 will be turned ON
Y00
(OK), the auxiliary relay C000
C000
will be turned ON, and output
Final output conditions Y00 will be turned ON.

14

14-15
 PC Function

Chapter 15: PC Function

15-1 Outline
The PC function is designed to create a ladder circuit program based on the data (coordinates,
distance, degree of match, and results of numerical calculations) obtained from the measurements
and calculations made by the IV-S30J. Then it outputs the results of the calculations performed by the
circuit.
Use of the PC function enables the IV-S30J to output measurement results to an external equipment
such as a lamp by itself, without the need for an external PC.

15-2 Operation cycle

The operation cycle of the IV-S30J is outlined below. This flowchart contains only the operations
related to the PC function, and does not show communications with external devices.
Power ON
Power ON sequence

Input refresh

Ladder circuit calculation (final output conditions)

Ex. : X0 C000 Y00
X1
PC scan
C001 Y01
cycle

Output refresh

Has a measurement start NO

input signal been received?
YES
Image processing for measurement 0 using camera 1

Ladder circuit calculation

(based on output conditions for measurement 0 of camera 1)
Ex. : 0M0 N01 C000
0X0 N02 C001

C000

Measurement processing for measurement 0 using camera 2

15
Ladder circuit calculation
(based on output conditions for measurement 0 of camera 2)

Measurement processing for measurement 1

Ladder circuit calculation (based on output conditions for measurement 1)

Measurement
Measurement processing for measurement 2 processing
cycle
Ladder circuit calculation (based on output conditions for measurement 2)

Measurement processing for measurement 3

Ladder circuit calculation (based on output conditions for measurement 3)

Measurement processing for measurement 4

Ladder circuit calculation (based on output conditions for measurement 4)

15-1
 PC Function

[1] Power ON sequence

The parallel output terminals (Y0 to Y7) are reset, and the data memories (input relays, output relays,
auxiliary relays, timer and counter) are cleared.

[2] PC scan cycle

In the PC scan cycle, the following three operations (1) to (3) are repeated cyclically.
(1) Input refresh
The ON/OFF data from the parallel input terminals (X0 to X7) is written into the data memory (input
relays).
(2) Ladder circuit calculation (final output conditions)
The calculations are executed by the ladder circuit program which contains the data from input
relays, output relays, auxiliary relays (incl. output which are obtained by the ladder circuit program
calculation in the measurement processing cycle), timer and counter.
(3) Output refresh
The ON/OFF data of the output relays, obtained in calculation (2), is output to the parallel output
terminals (Y0 to Y7).
- The processing time for the three steps described above is called "1PC scan time," and ranges
from 0.3 to 3.0 ms, depending on the settings.

[3] Measurement processing cycle

When the measurement start input signal is given, the measurement processing is carried out, and the
calculations of the ladder circuit program for measurements 0 to 3 are executed.
(1) Measurement processing (measurement 0 to 4)
- The coordinates, distance, and degree of match are determined by the measurement programs. If
the numerical calculation conditions have been set, calculations will be executed.
- Each measurement obtained is judged to be OK or NG, based on the criteria entered by the user.
If it is OK, 1 (ON) will be used as the input condition for the following calculation on the ladder
circuit, and if it is NG, 0 (OFF) will be used.
(2) Ladder circuit calculation (based on output conditions for measurements 0 to 4)
- The values obtained from the measurement processing are used as the input conditions for the
ladder circuit. Calculations will be executed by a ladder circuit. The output relays are the auxiliary
relays that will be used for calculation by the ladder circuit in the PC scan cycle.

The relationship between the ladder circuit in the measurement processing

cycle and the ladder circuit in the PC scan cycle
Measurement processing cycle ladder circuit (measurement output conditions)
Measurement 0 - camera 1
(Positional deviation Measurement 1 Measurement 2
measurement) (Binary area measurement) (Point measurement)

0M0 C000 00A C001 P000 C002

Degree Auxiliary Total Auxiliary Point Auxiliary

of match relay area relay relay
15

PC scan cycle C000 C001 C002 Y00

ladder circuit
(final output conditions) External
output

Notes
- 128 auxiliary relays, C000 to C127, can be set. However, identical auxiliary relay numbers
cannot be used for measurement 0 using camera 1, and measurement 0 using camera 2, or
for measurement 1, measurement 2, measurement 3 and measurement 4.
- The auxiliary relays C110 to C127 are special relays. The special relays are used on the PC
scan cycle ladder circuit. Do not use them for the measurement processing cycle ladder
circuit.

15-2
 PC Function

15-3 Ladder circuit program creation

[1] Procedure for creating measurement output condition and a ladder circuit
A separate ladder circuit can be created for positional deviation measurement, degree of match
inspection, lead inspection, area measurement by binary conversion, object counting by binary
conversion, object identification by binary conversion, point measurement, multiple position
measurement, and multiple degree of match inspection.
The procedure for creating a ladder circuit for positional deviation measurement is given below. A
ladder circuit can be created the same way for other measurement just change the input contact point
setting.
(1) How to display the output conditions setting screen.
There are two methods for displaying the output conditions setting screen, as follows.
SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
1. On the menu tree, open the sub menu at OBJECT TYPE COND
"MEAS01(POSI-DEVIATION)." Press the SET TYPE00 INPUT0
key on the "OUT-COND" line. TYPE RUN COND LOGIC
IMAGE-ADJ INPUT1
MEA-CND(CAMERA1) LOGIC
MEAS0 INPUT2
POSI-CORRECT LOGIC
MEAS0(POSI-DEVIATION) INPUT3
IMG PRE-PROC LOGIC
MEAS CND INPUT4
REG-COND(S) LOGIC
REG-COND(S) INPUT5
EVALUATION COND LOGIC
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND INPUT6
NUM-CALC LOGIC
OUT-COND INPUT7
MEAS(NEW) LOGIC
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

MEASUREMENT1 SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 DRK

2. On the screen used for selecting the 1MEAS SELECTION 0(0~7) IMG PRE-PROC
measurement program, or on the screens REG-COND(S)
used for setting the measurement conditions EVALUATION
or the register conditions, press the TRG/BRT DST&ANGL
NUM-CALC
key to move the cursor to the upper function OUT
menu. Then, move the cursor to the "COND"
and press the SET key. Select "OUT" from the
popup menu.

15

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

15-3
 PC Function

(2) How to specify the input conditions for ladder circuit diagrams
1. While "CHANGE INPUT" is selected, each OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
press of the SET key will change the display in INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT Column No. 0 to 7
the left most row. The display will cycle
through the following choices: "INPUT00 to 0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT
INPUT00 00M0
INPUT07," "INPUT08 to INPUT15," and LOGIC
"INPUT16 to INPUT19." When the input group INPUT01
LOGIC
you want is displayed, press the down arrow MATCH M
INPUT02 Row No.
key to move the cursor to the ladder circuit LOGIC CRD-X
display section. INPUT03 CRD-Y Ladder circuit
LOGIC DEV-x display area
INPUT04
2. Move the cursor to a line number (INPUTxx) LOGIC
DEV-y
and a row using the up/down/left/right arrow ANGL-B
INPUT05
NUM-CAL[NC]
keys, and press the SET key. Select a type to LOGIC
INPUT06 AUX.RLY-C
input from the popup menu.
LOGIC
The input types for each measurement INPUT07 This display varies with each
program are shown on pages 16-6 to 16-7. LOGIC measurement program.
- Page 16-9 to 16-10.
Note: "00M0" means the following:
SET=SELECT TYPE SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
MATCH M0 (0~1)
00M0
- CRD-X (0~1)
- CRD-Y (0~1)
- DEV-x0 (0~1)
- DEV-y0 (0~1)
- ANGL-B0 (0~1)
- NUM-CAL[NC]00 (0~15)
- AUX.RLY-C000 (0~127)

- 0 to 3: BGA/CSP inspection, object counting by binary conversion, object

identification by binary conversion, multiple position measurement,
degree of match inspection.
- 0 to 7: Positional deviation measurement
- 0 to 15: Degree of match inspection, lead inspection, area measurement
by binary conversion, distance and angle measurement
- 0 to 127: Point measurement (average)
- 0 to 255: Point measurement (binary conversion)

3. After selecting an input type, press the SET OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
key and move the cursor to a logic line. INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT
0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT
INPUT00 00M0
LOGIC
INPUT01
LOGIC
INPUT02
LOGIC
INPUT03
15 LOGIC
INPUT04
LOGIC
INPUT05
LOGIC DEL
INPUT06
LOGIC
INPUT07
LOGIC

SET=SELECT LOGIC SYMBOL SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

15-4
 PC Function

4. Press the SET key and select a logic symbol from the popup menu.
Logic symbol Function
a contact on a series circuit (ON, when the evaluation result is OK)

b contact on a series circuit (OFF, when the evaluation result is OK)

Deletes a contact on the cursor. (Contacts after the deleted contact will not be
brought forward.)
Note: This symbol cannot be used on the first row.
Used to create an OR circuit.
Used to create an OR circuit
Deletes the contact on the cursor. (Contacts after the deleted contact will be
brought forward.)
DEL When a contact exists only on the first row, if the contact is deleted, also the
output relay will be deleted.

(3) How to specify the output conditions for ladder circuit diagrams
Move the cursor to the "OUT" row for the desired OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
line number and press the SET key. Press the
INPUT00-07
SET key while the cursor is on "AUX-RLY" and  CHANGE INPUT
select the auxiliary relays you want to use from 0   1  2  3  4  5  6  7  OUT
the table that is displayed. INPUT00 00M0
LOGIC
Note: Only the lines which have a specified input INPUT01
AUX-RLY
signal can be selected for output. LOGIC
AUX-RLY Use place
INPUT02
LOGIC
Creation example: C000 NO
INPUT03
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT C001 NO
LOGIC
INPUT00 00M0 C000 C002 NO
INPUT04
LOGIC C003 NO
LOGIC
INPUT05 C004 NO
LOGIC C005 NO
INPUT06 C006 NO
LOGIC C007 NO
INPUT07

(4) Creating a ladder circuit is complete

Create a ladder circuit for the page numbers registered in step (1), repeating the operations in
steps (2) and (3).

Creation example:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT
INPUT0 00M0 C001 C000
LOGIC
INPUT1 0X0
LOGIC
INPUT2 N01 N02 C001
15
LOGIC
INPUT3 N03 N04
LOGIC

Note: Output relays cannot be used in series on a ladder circuit. Change circuit a to circuit b.

Circuit a Circuit b

C001 C010 C001 C010

C011 C001 C011

15-5
 PC Function

Kinds of input signals in each measurement program

Measurement program
Kind of input Symbol Positional deviation Degree of match Lead Point
measurement inspection inspection measurement
Degree of Model 0: 00M0 to 07M0 Model 0 : 00M0 to 15M0
match M Model 1: 00M1 to 07M1 Model 1 : 00M1 to 15M1
Model 0: 00X0 to 07X0 Model 0 : 00X0 to 15X0
Coordinate X Model 1: 00X1 to 07X1 Model 1 : 00X1 to 15X1
Model 0: 00Y0 to 07Y0 Model 0 : 00Y0 to 15Y0
Coordinate Y Model 1: 00Y1 to 07Y1 Model 1 : 00Y1 to 15Y1
Model 0: 0x0 to 7x0
Deviation x Model 1: 0x1 to 7x1
Model 0: 0y0 to 7y0
Deviation y
Model 1: 0y1 to 7y1

Angle B 0B to 7B

Model 0 : 00G0 to 15G0

Light level G
Model 1 : 00G1 to 15G1
Number of K
objects 00K to 15K

Distance D 00D to 15D

Lead width W 00W to 15W
Lead length
/ lead width 2 L 00L to 15L

Binary point P000 to P255

Average light
level point P000 to P127
Numerical
calculation results N N0 to N15 N0 to N15 N0 to N15 N0 to N15

Auxiliary relay N C000 to C127

Measurement program
Kind of input Symbol
Symbol Area measurement Object counting Object
by binary conversion by binary identification by
conversion binary conversion
Number of masks=1: 00A to 15A
Total area A Number of masks=2: 0A to 7A 0A to 3A 0A to 3A
Number of masks=4: 0A to 3A
Number of objects K 0K to 3K 0K to 3K
15 Area of each 0R000 to 0R127
label R …3R000 to 3R127
Fillet diameter X FX
Fillet diameter Y FY
Distance between
gravity centers X DX
Distance between
gravity centers Y DY
Numerical
calculation results N N0 to N15 N0 to N15 N0 to N15
Auxiliary relay C C000 to C127

15-6
 PC Function

Measurement program
Kind of input Symbol
Multiple positions measurement Multiple degree of match inspections
Number of objects K 0K to 3K 0K to 3K
Numerical calculation results N N0 to N15 N0 to N15
Auxiliary relay C C000 to C127

Kind of input Symbol Distance and angle measurement *

Auxiliary H 00H to 15H

Distance D 00D to 15D
Angle B 00B to 15B
Numerical calculation results N N0 to N15
Auxiliary relay C C000 to C127
* The measurement programs that can use these inputs are the positional deviation measurement,
degree of match measurement, object identification by binary conversion (center of gravity: YES)
multiple positions measurement, and multiple degree of match inspections.

15

15-7
 PC Function

Auxiliary relay C000 to C127

The functions of the auxiliary relays (C000 to C127), which can be used for input and output signals, are
explained below.
Relay No. Function
(relay name) Use for input signals Use for output signals
C000 to C109 - Relays for internal calculation
(internal - For the final output conditions, relays also used for output in the measurement
calculation) processing cycle can be used.
C110 Normally OFF

C111 - When C111 is ON, C000 to C109 are cleared.

- Turned ON when all of the evaluation items have
been judged OK, and turned OFF if any single item
has been judged NG.
C112 (Final
- If C116 is not used, OK/NG will be displayed on
evaluation
the operation screen which correspond to ON/OFF
result)
of C112. *
- If an error occurs (C118 is turned ON),C112 will be
turned OFF (NG).
- When C113 is ON, continuous measurements will
C113 be executed.
(Continuous Ex.: When X0 is ON, continuous measurements will
measurement be executed. X0 C113
start input)

Output the CCD trigger status to C114, regardless of

the Yes/No setting for the start of the measurement.
- When "binary conversion" is specified, if the white
area is 50% or more of the image, C114 will be
C114 turned ON, and if it is less than 50 %, C114 will be
(CCD trigger turned OFF.
status output) - When the "average light level" is specified, C114
will be turned ON when the image is within the
specified level range, and turned OFF when it is out
of the range.
- The same signal as the READY signal is output
C115 internally.
- If an output signal is passed to C116, the display of
the OK/NG result on the operation screen will
depend on the ON/OFF state of C116.
Ex.: "OK" is displayed on the operation screen
C116 when C000 is ON, and "NG" when the C000
(programmable
is OFF. C000 C116
output)

- If C116 relay is not used, the display of the OK/NG

result will depend on of the final evaluation result
(C112). *
15 - Turned OFF when the illumination exceeds the
upper or lower warning level of the illuminance
C117 monitor set on the "MONITOR LIGHT LVL" menu.
(Illuminance Warning light levels can be set for each of the
monitor error) cameras 1 and 2 separately. This relay is turned
OFF when either one of them exceeds the upper or
lower level.
C118 - Turned ON when a measurement processing error
(measurement occurs.(However, except the end code 34/35/36/3E.
operation error) - See page 20-4.)
C119 - Turned ON upon termination of measurement
(measurement processing, and turned OFF when a measurement
termination) start input signal is given.
- They are turned ON to reset counters CN0 to CN7.
C120 to C127 correspond to CN0 to CN7. Create a
C120 to C127 - Do not use these relays for input signals. circuit for sending an output signal to one of these
(counter reset) relays on the row following a row that contains a
counter instruction. (Counter instruction - See
page 16-14.)
* OK/NG displayed on the operation screen - See page 1-10.

15-8
 PC Function

[2] A list of the "OUTPUT COND" screen displays

Shown below are the "OUTPUT COND" screen displays for each program.

(1) Positional deviation measurement

See page 15-4.
(2) Degree of match inspection (3) Lead inspection
OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07 INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT  CHANGE INPUT

0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT 0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT
INPUT00 INPUT00
LOGIC MATCH M LOGIC OBJ-K
INPUT01 CRD-X INPUT01 DST-D
LOGIC CRD-Y LOGIC LEAD WIDTH W
INPUT02 LVL G INPUT02 LEAD LENGTH L
LOGIC NUM-CAL[NC] LOGIC NUM-CAL[NC]
INPUT03 INPUT03
AUX.RLY-C AUX.RLY-C
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT04 INPUT04
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT05 INPUT05
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT06 INPUT06
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT07 INPUT07
LOGIC LOGIC
SET=SELECT TYPE SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC SET=SELECT TYPE SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

(4) Area measurement by binary conversion

OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT

0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT
INPUT00
LOGIC TOTAL-AREA-A
INPUT01 NUM-CAL[NC]
LOGIC AUX.RLY-C
INPUT02
LOGIC
INPUT03
LOGIC
INPUT04
LOGIC
INPUT05
LOGIC
INPUT06
LOGIC
INPUT07
LOGIC 15
SET=SELECT TYPE SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

15-9
 PC Function

(5) Object counting by binary conversion (6) Object identification by binary conversion
OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07 INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT  CHANGE INPUT

0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT 0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT
INPUT00 INPUT00
LOGIC TOTAL-AREA-A LOGIC TOTAL-AREA-A
INPUT01 OBJ-K INPUT01 OBJ-K
LOGIC NUM-CAL[NC] LOGIC OBJECT-AREA-R
INPUT02 AUX.RLY-C INPUT02 NUM-CAL[NC]
LOGIC LOGIC AUX.RLY-C
INPUT03 INPUT03
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT04 INPUT04
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT05 INPUT05
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT06 INPUT06
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT07 INPUT07
LOGIC LOGIC

SET=SELECT TYPE SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC SET=SELECT TYPE SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

(7) Point measurement

When "BINARY" is selected in "MODE" line. When "AVG-GRAY" is selected in "MODE" line.
OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07 INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT  CHANGE INPUT

0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT 0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT
INPUT00 INPUT00
LOGIC BIN-PNT-P LOGIC AVG-GRAY G
INPUT01 NUM-CAL[NC] INPUT01 NUM-CAL[NC]
LOGIC AUX.RLY-C LOGIC AUX.RLY-C
INPUT02 INPUT02
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT03 INPUT03
LOGIC LOGIC
INPUT04 INPUT04
(8) Multiple positional measurement (9) Multiple degree of match inspections
OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07 INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT  CHANGE INPUT

0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT 0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT
INPUT00 INPUT00
LOGIC OBJ-K LOGIC OBJ-K
INPUT01 NUM-CAL[NC] INPUT01 NUM-CAL[NC]
LOGIC AUX.RLY-C LOGIC AUX.RLY-C
INPUT02 INPUT02
LOGIC LOGIC
15 INPUT03 INPUT03
LOGIC LOGIC

(10) Distance and angle measurement

OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT

0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT
INPUT00
LOGIC AUX-H
INPUT01 DST-D
LOGIC ANGL-B
INPUT02 NUM-CAL[NC]
LOGIC AUX.RLY-C
INPUT03
LOGIC
INPUT04
LOGIC
INPUT05
LOGIC

15-10
 PC Function

[3] Procedure for creating the final output conditions in a ladder circuit
This section describes the ladder circuit creation procedures for each object type number.

(1) How to display the final output conditions setting screen

1. Select an object type from 00 to 15 on the SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
menu tree and then move the cursor to "FINAL
OBJECT TYPE COND
OUTPUT COND." Press the SET key. TYPE00 INPUT0
TYPE RUN COND LOGIC
IMAGE-ADJ INPUT1
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA1) LOGIC
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2) INPUT2
FINAL NUM.CALC LOGIC
FINAL OUTPUT COND INPUT3
OBJ-TYPE I/O LOGIC
OBJ-TYPE SYS. INPUT4
TYPE(NEW) LOGIC
INPUT5
LOGIC
INPUT6
LOGIC
INPUT7
LOGIC

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

2. The "OUTPUT COND" screen will appear. OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT
0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT

INPUT00
LOGIC
INPUT01
LOGIC
INPUT02
LOGIC
INPUT03
LOGIC
INPUT04
LOGIC
INPUT05
LOGIC
INPUT06
LOGIC
INPUT07
LOGIC

SET=EXEC SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

15

15-11
 PC Function

(2) How to specify the input conditions for ladder circuit diagrams
1. While "CHANGE INPUT" is selected, each OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
press of the SET key will change the display in INPUT00-07
the left most row. The display will cycle  CHANGE INPUT Column No. 0 to 7

through the following choices: "INPUT00 to 0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT

INPUT00 00M0
INPUT07," "INPUT08 to INPUT15," "INPUT16 LOGIC
to INPUT23," and "INPUT24 to INPUT31." INPUT01
When the input group you want is displayed, LOGIC
INPUT02 Row No. AUX.RLY-C
press the down arrow key to move the cursor LOGIC EXT-INP X
to the ladder circuit display section. INPUT03 TMR TM
Ladder circuit
LOGIC CNTR CN display area
INPUT04
2. Move the cursor to a line number (INPUTxx) LOGIC
AN
and a row using the up/down/left/right arrow OUTPUT Y
INPUT05
keys, and press the SET key. Select a type to LOGIC
input from the popup menu. INPUT06
LOGIC
INPUT07
LOGIC

SET=SELECT TYPE SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

3. After selecting an input type, press the SET OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
key and move the cursor to a logic line. INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT
4. Press the SET key and select a logic symbol 0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7 OUT
INPUT00 00M0
from the popup menu. LOGIC
INPUT01
LOGIC
INPUT02
LOGIC
INPUT03
LOGIC
INPUT04
LOGIC
INPUT05
LOGIC DEL
INPUT06
LOGIC
INPUT07
LOGIC

SET=SELECT LOGIC SYMBOL SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

Logic symbol Function

a contact on a series circuit (ON, when the evaluation result is OK)
15 b contact on a series circuit (OFF, when the evaluation result is OK)
Deletes a contact on the cursor. (Contacts after the deleted contact will not be
brought forward.)
Note: This symbol cannot be used on the first row.
Used to create an OR circuit.
Used to create an OR circuit
Deletes the contact on the cursor. (Contacts after the deleted contact will be
brought forward.)
DEL When a contact exists only on the first row, if the contact is deleted, also the
output relay will be deleted.

15-12
 PC Function

(3) How to specify the output conditions for ladder circuit diagrams
Move the cursor to "OUT" and press the SET key. Select a target for the output signals from the
popup menu. Detail of the registration table that will appear varies, depending on the target selected
for output.
When "OUTPUT Y" is selected When "AUX.RLY-C" is selected
OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07 INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT  CHANGE INPUT
0   1  2  3  4  5  6  7  OUT 0   1  2  3  4  5  6  7  OUT
INPUT00 00M0 INPUT00 00M0
LOGIC LOGIC OUTPUT Y
INPUT01 OUTPUT Y INPUT01
AUX-RLY-C
LOGIC AUX-RLY-C LOGIC Y OUTPUT Use place
AUX-RLY Use place TMR TM
INPUT02 TMR TM INPUT02
LOGIC CNTR CN
LOGIC Y0 NO CNTR CN C000 NO
INPUT03 DEL
INPUT03 Y1 NO DEL C001 NO
LOGIC LOGIC
Y2 NO C002 NO
INPUT04 INPUT04
Y3 NO C003 NO
LOGIC LOGIC
Y4 NO C004 NO
INPUT05 INPUT05
Y5 NO LOGIC C005 NO
LOGIC
Y6 NO INPUT06 C006 NO
INPUT06
Y7 NO LOGIC C007 NO
LOGIC
INPUT07 INPUT07
LOGIC LOGIC

SET=SELECT OUTPUT RELAY SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC SET=SELECT OUTPUT RELAY SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

When "TMR TM" is selected When "CNTR CN" is selected

OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT OUTPUT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

INPUT00-07 INPUT00-07
 CHANGE INPUT  CHANGE INPUT
0   1  2  3  4  5  6  7  OUT 0   1  2  3  4  5  6  7  OUT
INPUT00 00M0 INPUT00 00M0
LOGIC OUTPUT Y LOGIC OUTPUT Y
INPUT01 INPUT01
AUX-RLY-C AUX-RLY-C
LOGIC TM TIME REG Use place LOGIC TM TIME REG Use place
TMR TM TMR TM
INPUT02 INPUT02
LOGIC CNTR CN CNTR CN
TM0 NO LOGIC CN0 NO
INPUT03 DEL INPUT03 DEL
TM1 NO CN1 NO
LOGIC LOGIC
TM2 NO CN2 NO
INPUT04 INPUT04
TM3 NO CN3 NO
LOGIC LOGIC
TM4 NO CN4 NO
INPUT05 INPUT05
LOGIC TM5 NO CN5 NO
LOGIC
INPUT06 TM6 NO CN6 NO
INPUT06
LOGIC TM7 NO LOGIC CN7 NO
INPUT07 INPUT07
LOGIC LOGIC

SET=SELECT OUTPUT RELAY SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC SET=SELECT OUTPUT RELAY SEC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
15
Creation example:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT
INPUT00 00M0 C000
LOGIC

15-13
 PC Function

Kind of Data
output memory Function
signal No.
External Y0 to Y7 Output to the parallel I/F, general purpose serial I/F and computer link.
output
instructions Y8 to Y15 Output to the general purpose serial I/F or computer link
A timer terminal will be turned ON for a set amount of time (set value
000 to 999, unit 10 ms) after the timer instruction is input.
(Decrementing type)
When the timer instruction input is turned OFF, the timer terminal will
be turned OFF.
[Ex.] C001 TM0 Timer instruction
Timer 0250 Timer set value
TM0 to TM7 (2.5 sec.)
instructions TM0 Y00
Output instruction
(external output)
Timer terminal

C001 2.5 sec. 2.5 sec.

TM0
[Y00]
While the counter reset relay is OFF, if a counter instruction input is
cycled from OFF to ON, the number of times you set (set value 000
to 999), the counter terminal will be turned ON. (Decrementing type)
When the counter reset relay is turned ON, the counter terminal is
turned OFF.
Create a circuit to turn the counter reset relay ON and OFF on the
row following a row that containing a counter instruction.
[Ex.]
C002 CN0 Counter instruction
Counter 0003 Counter set value
instructions CN0 to CN7 X5 C120
Resetting the CN0
CN0 Y01
Output instruction
(external output)
Counter terminal
X5
[C120]
C002 1 2 3 4 5

CN0
[Y01]
Deletion The output relay on the row where the cursor is located will be deleted.
- See page 16-8 for details about the auxiliary relays C000 to C127.
15

15-14
 PC Function

(4) Creating a ladder circuit is complete

Create a ladder circuit for the page numbers registered in step (1), repeating the operations in
steps (2) and (3).

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT
INPUT0 C000 C001 Y00
LOGIC
INPUT1 X0
LOGIC
INPUT2 C001 X1 TM0
LOGIC 0150
INPUT3 TM0 Y01
LOGIC

Note: Output relays cannot be used in series on a ladder circuit. Change circuit a to
circuit b.

Circuit a Circuit b

C001 C010 C001 C010

C011 C001 C011

15

15-15
 PC Function

15-4 Program examples (shape and positional deviation inspection)

(1) Outline
The positional deviation measurement (one point search) in measurement 0 allows the degree of
match and coordinates to be measured, and the result, OK or NG, is output.
Reference image (registration No.0)

Object to be measured

＋ Reference image
registration window
Search area

＋
＋

Shape NG Positional deviation NG

(degree of match NG) (X coordinate, Y coordinate NG)

Evaluation Coordinate (model 0-X): 200.0 to 250.0

condition Coordinate (model 0-Y): 150.0 to 200.0
(acceptable Degree of match (model 0): +09500 to +10000
range)

(2) Output conditions and ladder circuit for measurement 0 using camera 1
When the X coordinate, Y coordinate and degree of match are within acceptable ranges, the
auxiliary relay C000 is turned ON.
00X0 00Y0 00M0 C000
OK
Coordi- Coordi- Degree
nate X nate Y of match

(3) Final output conditions and ladder circuit

C119 C000 Y00

NG output
15 Measurement OK
termination
C118 Y01
Measurement operation
error output
Measurement operation error
C117 Y02
Illuminance monitor
error output
Illuminance monitor error

15-16
 PC Function

15-5 Examples of a final output conditions ladder circuit

(1) Circuit for keeping the external output ON until the next external trigger is received

C119 C000 Y00

NG output
Measurement OK
termination

External trigger input

READY

External output
(Y00)

(2) Circuit for controlling the ON time of the external output using the timer

C119 TM0
0010 10ms×10＝100ms
Measurement
termination
C119 C000 TM0 Y00
NG output
OK

External trigger input

READY

100ms
External output
(Y00)

(3) An example of a circuit that can output a signal when the IV-S30 is operating normally.

C110 Y00
Output while operation is normal
Normally OFF

Start the system System error Restart the system 15

Y00
The system will restart automatically
if it detects a system error.

15-17
 PC Function

15-6 PC monitor screen

Move the cursor to "SCREEN-CHG" on the (TYPE00) F C1 DRK
operation screen and press the SET key. A
popup menu will appear and you can select OK
MEAS XXXXms
"PC-MNTR" or "PC-MNTR 2", and press the
1 X00∼ 06 □□□□□□□□
SET key. Then the PC monitor screen will be 2 Y000∼007 □□□□□□□□   READY■
displayed. 3 C000∼007 □□□□□□□□
However, before you can display this screen,
4 [NUMERIC CALC] [TMR] [CNTR]
you have to set "YES" on the " PC-MNTR" 5 AN00＝NOT SET TM0:NOT SET CN0:NOT SET
on the "TYPE RUN COND" menu. 6 AN01＝NOT SET TM1:NOT SET CN1:NOT SET
AN02＝NOT SET TM2:NOT SET CN2:NOT SET
See page 2-11. AN03＝NOT SET TM3:NOT SET CN3:NOT SET
AN04＝NOT SET TM4:NOT SET CN4:NOT SET
AN05＝NOT SET TM5:NOT SET CN5:NOT SET
The ON ( ) or OFF ( ) status of the input AN06＝NOT SET TM6:NOT SET CN6:NOT SET
relays (X00 to X07) is displayed. AN07＝NOT SET TM7:NOT SET CN7:NOT SET

The ON ( ) or OFF ( ) status of the output OPS-MAIN

relays (Y00 to Y15) is displayed. PC-MNTR 2
7
MNU-CHG MAIN-COND SEL-OUT SEL-AUX SEL-NUM SCREEN-CHG CHG-TYPE
The ON ( ) or OFF ( ) status of the
auxiliary relays (C000 to C127) is
Change the output Change the Change the final
displayed. relay address auxiliary relay numerical calculation
address address
The results (AN00 to AN15) of the final
numerical calculations are displayed.

The current timer value is displayed.

The current counter value is displayed.

Menu bar

Menu bar Description

Change the output relay address (Y00 to Y15) with the up and down keys
SEL-OUT
(in units of 8 points).
Change the auxiliary relay address (C000 to C127) with the up and down
SEL-AUX
keys (in units of 8 points).
Change the final numerical calculation address (AN00 to AN15) with the up
SEL-NUM and down keys (in units of 8 points).

The other data displayed is the same as on the operation screen. See page 1-10.

15

15-18
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

Chapter 16: Setting the Input/Output Conditions

16-1 Outline
This section describes the input and output settings on the IV-S30J when connecting it for
communication with other equipment (a personal computer or a programmable controller).

How to display the "I/O CONDITIONS" setting screen

To display the "I/O CONDITIONS" screen, select SELECT SYSTEM COND F C1 BRT
"MAIN COND" -> "SYS-CND" -> "I/O
SYS-CND
CONDITIONS," in that order. I/O CONDITIONS 1MEAS INP I/F
COMM.SET 2OUT I/F(PARAL.)
COMPUTER LINK 3MANL TYPE CHNG
GAIN-OFFSET 4PARALLEL INP X5
5PARALLEL INP X6
6STROBE OUT
7’READY’ON

How to set the input and output conditions

The items you will need to set depend on whether I/O CONDITION SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
you selected "PARALLEL+SERIAL" or "TRIG
CCD START" on the " MEAS INP I/F" line. 1MEAS INP I/F PARALLEL+SERIAL

2OUT I/F(PARAL.) NO PARALLEL+SERIAL

3MANL TYPE CHNG NO
TRIG CCD START
4PARALLEL INP X6 EXT-INP

5PARALLEL INP X7 EXT-INP

6STROBE OUT NO
7’READY’ON CAPTURE COMPLETE

When you want to select the " PARALLEL I/O CONDITION SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
+SERIAL" on the "MEAS INP I/F" line.
1MEAS INP I/F PARALLEL+SERIAL NO
PC-LINK
MEAS INP I/F 2OUT I/F(PARAL.) NO
NO
SERIAL
Select "PARALLEL+SERIAL" for the 3MANL TYPE CHNG NO
YES
interface, in order to allow an external device 4PARALLEL INP X5 EXT-INP EXT-INP
to provide trigger signals for the IV-S30J. REG REF
5PARALLEL INP X6 EXT-INP COMRARE-IMGS
6STROBE OUT NO AREA EVAL CORECT
7’READY’ON CAPTURE COMPLETE
EXT-INP
NO
CHNG-IMG-OUT-CAM
Y0 CAM-MEAS
CAPTURE COMPLETE
Y1 2 IMAGES
MEAS-COMPLETE
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7 16
SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

16-1
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

OUT I/F(PARAL.)
Select a signal output interface, in order to output the measured results externally. The choices
are: "NO," "PC-LINK" or "SERIAL."
NO No connection. (No output.)
PC-LINK Connect to the parallel input on a programmable controller.
SERIAL Connect to a standard serial port.

MANL TYPE CHNG

The object type can be changed manually using the remote keypad on the operation screen.
NO Means that you cannot change the object type manually on the operation screen.
Means that you will be allowed to change the object type manually on the operation
screen. Move the cursor to the "CHG-TYPE" item on the operation screen, and select the
YES
object type No., displayed on the upper part of the screen, using the up and down keys.
- See page 1-10.

PARALLEL INP X5
Select the type of input terminal (INPUT) X5.
External input: The PC function uses the terminal as an external input
EXT-INP
signal. -See Chapter 15.
When X5 is turned from OFF to ON, and gray search is selected, the
reference image will be registered in the SDRAM. When edge
detection is selected, the reference coordinates will also be registered.
- To store the reference image in flash memory
Select the SAVE key on any sub menu or use a general purpose
serial command.
- Available measurement programs (gray scale search) Positional
REG REF deviation measurement, the degree of match
inspection, multiple positions measurement, multiple degree of match
inspections for register No. 0, model 0
- Applicable measurement program (edge detection) Positional
deviation measurement
- If a reference image has not been specified, an "UNABLE
REGISTER REF.IMG" (X5 reference image register error (code3E))
will occur.
On the operation screen, when parallel input X5 is turned ON, the
COMPARE-IMGS controller will transfer a previously registered reference image into its
flash memory for use in performing calculations that compare images.
Total area evaluation correction
- When X5 is ON, the upper and lower limits for the total area
AREA EVAL CORECT evaluation conditions will be corrected automatically.
- Measurement programs: Area measurement, object counting, and
object identification by binary conversion

16

16-2
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

PARALLEL INP X6
Select the type of input terminal (INPUT) X6.
Input/output condition Setting details
The PC function uses the terminal as an external input signal.
EXT-INP
- See Chapter 15.
- Every time X6 is switched from OFF to ON, the selected camera will
change. - page 2-4.
CHNG-IMG-OUT-CAM - When the object type measurement condition is "CAMERA 1" only.
"CAMERA 2" only, you are not allowed to change the camera used for
output.
- On starting a measurement, if X6 is OFF "CAMERA 1" will execute the
CAM-MEAS
measurement, and if X6 is ON Camera 2 will execute the measurement.
- Before starting a measurement, you must set the following parameters.
- MEASURE 0 CAMERA 1 conditions
Measurement execution: = Gray scale search conditions
- MEASURE 1 CAMERA 2 conditions
= Area conditions (dummy)
Image selection: Camera 1 and 2 are through modes.
- When "2 IMAGES (overlap)" is selected, overlap processing will be
executed according to the following timing.
Note: Even if "2 IMAGES (overlap)" has not been selected, and regardless
of which mode Camera 1 and Camera 2 are in, when a trigger (X0:
2 IMAGES Manual trigger) is received, the measurement will be executed.

Camera 1 Through image

Camera 2 Through image

Freeze image

Overlap input X6

Monitor output Camera 2 Overlapped image

STROBE OUT
When the strobe output setting is specified as "Y*" and the shutter is opened, the output (Y*)
will be turned ON. When the shutter is closed, the output will be turned OFF.
Y*= Y0 to Y7
Note: When you want to use the strobe output, specify a shutter speed between 1/30 and
1/250 seconds.

Ë Strobe output timing

Shutter Minimum 4 ms
(1/250 sec.) 16

Strobe output
(Y*) Maximum
2 ms
'READY'ON
Set the time to turn ON the READY output signal.
(When the measurement start input source is set to parallel, the object type change signal will
also be parallel, and results will be output as parallel signals.)
When the controller stops capturing the image, the READY
At the end of an image capture
signal turns ON.
When the controller stops measuring, the READY signal turns
At the end of a measurement
ON.

16-3
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

When you want to select the "TRIG CCD START" on the "MEAS INP I/F" line.
The display details and items offered for selection on line will depend on the selections made on
the " START CCD SAMPL" line.

When "AUTO(EDGE or LEVEL)" is selected I/O CONDITION SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

1MEAS INP I/F TRIG CCD START AUTO(EDGE)

2START CCD SAMPL AUTO(EDGE) AUTO(LEVEL)
3OUTPUT OBJ TYPE PARALLEL PARALLEL PARALLEL
4MANL TYPE CHNG NO SERIAL SERIAL
5PARALLEL INP X5 EXT-INP
NO
6PARALLEL INP X6 EXT-INP YES
7’READY’ON NO

NO
EXT-INP EXT-INP
Y0
CHNG-IMG-OUT-CAM REG REF
Y1 CAM-MEAS COMRARE-IMGS
Y2 2 IMAGES AREA EVAL CORECT
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

When "PARALLEL" is selected I/O CONDITION SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

1MEAS INP I/F TRIG CCD START AUTO(EDGE)

2START CCD SAMPL PARALLEL AUTO(LEVEL)
3OUTPUT OBJ TYPE PC-LINK PARALLEL
4MANL TYPE CHNG NO SERIAL
5PARALLEL INP X5 EXT-INP
NO NO
6PARALLEL INP X6 EXT-INP YES PC-LINK
SERIAL
7’READY’ON NO

NO
EXT-INP EXT-INP
Y0 REG REF
CHNG-IMG-OUT-CAM
Y1 CAM-MEAS COMRARE-IMGS
Y2 2 IMAGES AREA EVAL CORECT
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

When "SERIAL" is selected I/O CONDITION SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT

1MEAS INP I/F TRIG CCD START AUTO(EDGE)

2START CCD SAMPL SERIAL AUTO(LEVEL)
16 3MANL TYPE CHNG NO
PARALLEL
SERIAL
4PARALLEL INP X5 EXT-INP
NO
5PARALLEL INP X6 EXT-INP YES
6’READY’ON NO

NO
Y0 EXT-INP EXT-INP
CHNG-IMG-OUT-CAM REG REF
Y1
CAM-MEAS COMRARE-IMGS
Y2 2 IMAGES AREA EVAL CORECT
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

The details of the individual items on the "I/O CONDITION" menu are the same as described on
pages 16-1 to 16-3.
16-4
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

16-2 Measurement start input and result output settings

The combinations of various settings for item " MEAS INP I/F," item " START CCD SAMPL," and
item " ( )OUT I/F (PARAL.)" on the "I/O CONDITIONS" screen (page 16-1 to 4) are explained
below.
Measurement
start input interface Result output
- Parallel Parallel → (1)
Computer link/parallel → (2)
General purpose serial/parallel → (3)
- General purpose
serial General purpose serial/parallel → (4)

- CCD trigger Object type

Start sampling change Result output
Parallel (Parallel) Parallel → (5)
Computer link/parallel → (6)
General purpose serial/parallel → (7)
General purpose (General purpose
serial serial) General purpose serial/parallel → (8)

Auto Parallel Parallel → (9)

General purpose
serial General purpose serial/parallel → (10)

The time required to change object types is calculated differently according to the type of
measurement start input I/O, as follows:

Measurement start input I/F Time to change object type

Parallel Included in the measurement execution time
General-purpose serial Not included in the measurement execution time
CCD trigger Not included in the measurement execution time

16

16-5
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(1) Measurement start input = parallel, object type change = parallel, result output = parallel

■ Setting order 1 (→ 2) ■ Configuration example

［I/O CONDITIONS］ Camera 1 (image capturing)
PARALLEL+SERIAL
1MEAS INP I/F TRIG CCD START Monitor
Camera 2 (image capturing)
2OUT I/F(PARAL.) NO
PC-LINK Remote keypad
SERIAL

REMOTE RS232C/RS422 CAMERA2 CAMERA1 VIDEO

USB

Controller

Power supply
POWER
OUTPUT

IV-S3＊M 0V READY COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

COM ＋24V X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
INPUT

(24 V DC)

Warning lamp External trigger X0

(photo sensor or
proximity sensor)
External output
(Y0 to Y7) Type selection switch
-See page 16-5.

- The conditions for outputting the results to the output signals Y0 to Y7 are set by the PC function. (See
"Chapter 15 PC Function.")

■ Time chart
10 ms
or more

Measurement
start input
(X0)
10 ms 10 ms
or more or more
Type selection
input

Specified object type number Specified object type number

READY output
When you set the READY Image
ON signal to "CAPTURE End of the measurement
Image capture disposition
COMPLETE."
- See page 16-3.

When you set the

READY ON signal to Image
"MEAS COMPLETE." Image capture disposition
- See page 16-3.

PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P

16 condition
CCCC measurement CCCCCCCC measurement CCCCC

When the object type is Parallel output is valid for PC control

changed, all Y output and after the measurement result is
auxiliary relays turn OFF. determined.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7) Result output Result output

Note: When the READY signal is turned ON, the measurement start input will be enabled. To detect the
end of the measurement, you have to create a ladder circuit pointing at the Y output for auxiliary
relay C119 (end of the measurement).

Custom：Final output condition

C119 Y00

End of the measurement

16-6
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(2) Measurement start input = parallel, object type change = parallel, result output = computer
Iink/parallel
■ Setting order 1 (→ 2) ■ Configuration example
［I/O CONDITIONS］ Camera 1 (image capturing)
PARALLEL+SERIAL
1MEAS INP I/F TRIG CCD START Camera 2 (image capturing)
Monitor
2OUT I/F(PARAL.) NO
PC-LINK Remote keypad Data
SERIAL (Computer link)

REMOTE RS232C/RS422 CAMERA2 CAMERA1 VIDEO

USB

Controller
POWER
OUTPUT

IV-S3＊M 0V READY COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

COM ＋24V X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0

Power supply
INPUT

Programmable (24 VDC)

controller
Object type change
(parallel IF)
-See page 16-5. External trigger X0
(photo sensor or
proximity sensor)

- The data in a specified block No., set in item " SET SERIAL BLOCK" on the "OBJ-TYPE I/O"
screen, will be output through the computer link. See page 16-23.

■ Time chart 10 ms
or more

Measurement
start input
(X0) 10 ms 10 ms
or more or more
Type selection
input
See page
16-5.
Specified object type number Specified object type number

READY output
(While measuring or setting = L)
a READY signal is turned ON at the
conclusion of the result output.
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the end
of a measurement

PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P

condition C C C C measurement C C C C C C C C measurement CCCCC
When the object type is Parallel output is valid for
changed, all Y output and PC control after the
auxiliary relays turn OFF. measurement result is 16
determined.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7) Result output Result output

Result Result
Computer link output output output

When a Sharp PC is used, a write enable command (EWR) is transmitted from the IV-S30J to the
PC in the following cases.
- When the power is applied to the IV-S30J.
- When a write mode nonconformity error (code 10(H)) occurs after a result write command (WRG)
is transmitted (when the power is disconnected from the PC).
- When the output method is changed from the "OUT I/F (PARAL.)" to the "COMPUTER LINK."

16-7
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(3) Measurement start input = parallel, object type change = parallel, result output = general
purpose serial/parallel
■ Setting order 1 (→ 2) ■ Configuration example
［I/O CONDITIONS］ Camera 1 (image capturing)
1MEAS INP I/F PARALLEL+SERIAL
TRIG CCD START Camera 2 (image capturing)
Monitor
2OUT I/F(PARAL.) NO
Personal computer
PC-LINK
SERIAL Data

REMOTE RS232C/RS422 CAMERA2 CAMERA1 VIDEO

USB

Controller
POWER
OUTPUT

IV-S3＊M 0V READY COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

COM ＋24V X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0

Power supply (24 VDC)

INPUT

Type selection switch

- See page 16-4 External trigger X0
(photo sensor or
proximity sensor)

- The data in a block No., set in item " SET SERIAL BLOCK" on the "OBJ-TYPE I/O" screen, will
be output from the IV-S30J to the personal computer. See page 16-23.

Time chart
10 ms
or more

Measurement
start input
(X0) 10 ms 10 ms
or more or more
Type selection
input
See page
16-5.
Specified object type number Specified object type number

READY output
(While measuring or setting = L)
a READY signal is turned ON at the
conclusion of the result output.
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the end
of a measurement

PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P

16 condition C C C C measurement
When the object type is
C C C C C C C C measurement
Parallel output is valid for
CCCCC

changed, all Y output and PC control after the

auxiliary relays turn OFF. measurement result is
determined.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7) Result output Result output

Result Result
Serial output output output

Note - Result output: The data to be sent to the personal computer will be response of
general-purpose serial command (code 11(H)).

16-8
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(4) Measurement start input = general-purpose serial, object type change = general-purpose
serial, result output = general-purpose serial/parallel

■ Setting order 1 (→ 2) ■ Configuration example

［I/O CONDITIONS］ Camera 1 (image capturing)
1MEAS INP I/F PARALLEL+SERIAL
TRIG CCD START Camera 2 (image capturing)

Personal computer
Command, response
Monitor

Remote key pad

REMOTE RS232C/RS422 CAMERA2 CAMERA1 VIDEO

USB

Controller
POWER
OUTPUT

IV-S3＊M 0V READY COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

COM ＋24V X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
INPUT

Power supply (24 VDC)

- See Chapter 17: Communications (General Purpose Serial Interface for details about the
measurement execution commands (codes 10,11,12 and 14(H)).

■ Time chart
5 ms
or less

Result Result
Serial output output
Measurement READY signal is Measurement
trigger turned ON at the trigger
command conclusion of the command
result output.
READY output
(While measuring or setting = L)
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is
valid at the end of a
measurement
P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P
PC calculation C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C
condition
When the object type is changed, Parallel output is valid for PC
all Y output and auxiliary relays turn OFF. control after the measurement
result is determined.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7) Result output Result output

16

16-9
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(5) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = parallel, object type change =
parallel, result output = parallel
■ Setting order 1 → 2 (→ 3) ■ Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
1MEAS INP I/F PARALLEL+SERIAL
TRIG CCD START 
Camera 2 (image capturing) Monitor

2START CCD SAMPL AUTO(EDGE) Remote keypad

AUTO(LEVEL)
PARALLEL
SERIAL REMOTE RS232C/RS422
USB
CAMERA2 CAMERA1 VIDEO

Controller
POWER

Power supply
OUTPUT

3OUT I/F(PARAL.)
IV-S3＊M 0V READY COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
COM ＋24V X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0

NO
INPUT

(24 VDC)
PC-LINK Start sampling input
SERIAL Warning lamp X0
(photo sensor or
External output proximity sensor)
(Y0 to Y7)
Type selection switch
-See page 16-5.
Note 1: When the settings listed in section "16-3 CCD trigger" have not been made, a "CCD TRIG NOT
SET. (error 34)" will occur.
Note 2: Start sampling input (X0)
1. Sampling will be performed while this terminal is ON. When it is turned OFF, the sampling
will stop.
During sampling, O will flash in the upper right corner of the operation screen.
2. After the measurement is terminated, the sampling will be restarted when the X0 terminal
is changed from OFF to ON.

■ Time chart
Measurement
start input
(X0) Start accd sampling by turning ON
measurement start input (X0). Halt CCD
sampling by
CCD trigger turning OFF
cycle measurement
start input
(X0).
Type selection
input
See page Specified object type number
16-5.

CCD trigger Black White Black

16 window
(not highlighted)
Trigger Trigger
READY output
(While measuring or setting = L)
Measurement result
is valid at the end
of a measurement
PC calculation P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P P
condition C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C
When the object type is changed, Parallel output is valid for PC
all Y output and auxiliary relays control after the measurement
turn OFF. result is determined.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7) Result output Result output

16-10
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(6) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = parallel, object type change =
parallel, result output = computer link/parallel
When the start sampling input (X0) is turned ON, the CCD trigger is enabled. (Sampling starts)
■ Setting order 1 → 2 (→ 3) ■ Configuration example
1MEAS INP I/F Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
PARALLEL+SERIAL
TRIG CCD START 
Camera 2 (image capturing)
Monitor
2START CCD SAMPL AUTO(EDGE)
AUTO(LEVEL) Remote keypad Data
PARALLEL (Computer link)
SERIAL
REMOTE RS232C/RS422 CAMERA2 CAMERA1 VIDEO

Controller
USB

3OUT I/F(PARAL.) NO Power supply

POWER

IV-S3＊M 0V READY COM

COM ＋24V X7
Y7
X6
Y6
OUTPUT

X5
Y5
X4
Y4
X3
Y3
X2
Y2
X1
Y1
X0
Y0

INPUT

PC-LINK Programmable (24 VDC)

SERIAL controller Object type change
(parallel I/F) Start sampling
-See page 16-5. input X0

Note 1: When the settings listed in section "16-3 CCD trigger" have not been made, a "CCD TRIG
NOT SET. (error 34)" will occur.
Note 2: Start sampling input (X0)
1. Sampling will be performed while this input terminal is ON. When it is turned OFF, the
sampling will stop. During sampling, O will flash in the upper right corner of the operation
screen.
2. After the measurement is terminated, the sampling will be restarted when the X0 terminal
is changed from OFF to ON.
■ Time chart
Measurement
start input
(X0) Halt CCD
Start CCD sampling by turning ON sampling by
measurement start input (X0). turning OFF
measurement
CCD trigger start input
(X0).
cycle
Type selection
input Specified object type number
See page
16-5. Result Result
output output
Computer link

CCD trigger Black White Black

window
(not highlighted)
Trigger Trigger
READY signal is turned ON
at the end of
READY output the result output.
(While measuring or setting = L)

Terminate
measurement 16
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the
end of a measurement

PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P

C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C
condition
When the object type is changed, Parallel output is valid for PC control after
all Y output and auxiliary relays the measurement result is determined.
turn OFF.

Parallel output Result output Result output

(Y0 to Y7)

When a Sharp PC is used, a write enable command (EWR) is transmitted from the IV-S30J to the
PC in the following cases.
- When the power is applied to the IV-S30J.
- When a write mode nonconformity error (code 10(H)) occurs after a result write command (WRG)
is transmitted (when the power is disconnected from the PC).
- When the output method is changed from the "OUT I/F (PARAL.)" to the "COMPUTER LINK."

16-11
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(7) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = parallel, object type change =
parallel, result output = general purpose serial/parallel
When the start sampling input (X0) is turned ON, the CCD trigger is enabled. (Sampling starts)
■ Setting order 1 → 2 (→ 3) ■ Configuration example
1MEAS INP I/F Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
PARALLEL+SERIAL
TRIG CCD START 
Camera 2 (image capturing)
Monitor
2START CCD SAMPL AUTO(EDGE) Personal
AUTO(LEVEL) computer Object type change,
PARALLEL data
SERIAL
REMOTE RS232C/RS422 CAMERA2 CAMERA1 VIDEO
USB

Controller
3OUT I/F(PARAL.) NO POWER

IV-S3＊M 0V READY COM

COM ＋24V X7
Y7
X6
Y6
OUTPUT

X5
Y5
X4
Y4
X3
Y3
X2
Y2
X1
Y1
X0
Y0

INPUT

PC-LINK Power supply (24 VDC)

SERIAL External trigger (photo
sensor or proximity sensor)

Note 1: When the settings listed in section "16-3 CCD trigger" have not been made, a "CCD TRIG
NOT SET. (error 34)" will occur.
Note 2: Start sampling input (X0)
1. Sampling will be performed while this input terminal is ON. When it is turned OFF, the
sampling will stop.
During sampling, O will flash in the upper right corner of the operation screen.
2. After the measurement is terminated, sampling will be restarted when the X0
terminal is changed from OFF to ON.
■ Time chart
Measurement
start input
(X0)
Start CCD sampling by turning ON Halt CCD
measurement start input . sampling by
turning OFF
CCD trigger measurement
cycle start input
(X0).

Type selection Specified object type number

input
See page Result Result
16-5. output output
Computer link

CCD trigger Black White Black

window
(not highlighted)
Trigger Trigger
READY signal is turned ON
at the end of
the result output.
READY output
16 (While measuring or setting = L)

Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the
end of a measurement

PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P

condition C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C
When the object type is changed, Parallel output is valid for PC control after
all Y output and auxiliary relays the measurement result is determined.
turn OFF.
Parallel output Result output Result output

Note: Result output: The data in the block No., set in item " SET SERIAL BLOCK" on the "OBJ-
TYPE I/O" screen, will be transmitted to the personal computer. See page 16-23.

16-12
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(8) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling, object type change = general purpose
serial, result output = general purpose serial/parallel
The CCD trigger is enabled after a measurement execution command is entered.
■ Setting order 1 → 2 ■ Configuration example

1MEAS INP I/F Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)

PARALLEL+SERIAL
TRIG CCD START 
Camera 2 (image capturing)

2START CCD SAMPL AUTO(EDGE) Personal computer

AUTO(LEVEL) Sampling start,
PARALLEL object type change
SERIAL
Data
Remote key pad

REMOTE RS232C/RS422 CAMERA2 CAMERA1 VIDEO

USB

Controller
POWER
OUTPUT

IV-S3＊M 0V READY COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

COM ＋24V X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
INPUT

Power supply (24 VDC)

- See Chapter 17 for details about the measurement execution commands (codes 10, 11, 12 and
14(H)).
- When one of the measurement execution commands (codes 10, 11, 12 and 14(H)) is normally
received during sampling, the sampling will stop.
Note: When the settings listed in section "16-3 CCD trigger" have not been made, a "CCD TRIG
NOT SET. (error 34)" will occur.

■ Time chart
Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement
trigger Result trigger Result trigger trigger
Serial command output output command command
command
Start CCD
sampling by
turning ON
measurement
start input
CCD trigger
cycle Stop CCD sampling
by measurement
command.
CCD trigger
Black White Black
window
(not highlighted)
Trigger Trigger
READY output READY signal is turned ON
at the conclusion
(While measuring of the result output.
or setting = L)

Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the
16
end of a measurement

PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P

condition C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

When the object type is changed, Parallel output is valid for PC control after
all Y output and auxiliary relays the measurement result is determined.
turn OFF.
Parallel output
Result output Result output

Note: Result output: The data in the block No., set in item " SET SERIAL BLOCK" on the
"OBJ-TYPE I/O" screen, will be transmitted to the personal computer. See page 16-
23.

16-13
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(9) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = auto, object type change, result
output = parallel
■ Setting order 1 → 2 (→ 3) ■ Configuration example
1MEAS INP I/F PARALLEL+SERIAL Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
TRIG CCD START 
Camera 2 (image capturing) Monitor
2START CCD SAMPL AUTO(EDGE)
AUTO(LEVEL) Remote key pad
Select one of
these. PARALLEL
SERIAL
REMOTE RS232C/RS422 CAMERA2 CAMERA1 VIDEO
USB

Controller
3OUTPUT OBJ TYPE PARALLEL
POWER
OUTPUT

Start sampling input

Power supply
IV-S3＊M 0V READY COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
COM ＋24V X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
INPUT

SERIAL (24 VDC) X0

(photo sensor or
Warning lamp
proximity sensor)
External output
(Y0 to Y7) Type selection switch

Measurement is started when the CCD trigger level is ON.

Measurement is started when a CCD trigger signal is received.

Black White
Work

CCD trigger

Edge
Measurement
Level

■ Time chart (when auto mode (edge) is selected for as the CCD sampling start)
Restarts CCD sampling automatically after
measurement is completed.
CCD trigger
cycle

Type selection
input Specified object type number
See page
16-5.

CCD trigger Black White Black White Black

window
16 (not highlighted)
Trigger Trigger

READY output
(While measuring
or setting = L)

Measurement result is valid

at the end of a measurement
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P
condition CCCC during measurement CCCCCCCCC during measurement CCCCC

When the object type is changed, all Y Parallel output is valid for PC control after
output and auxiliary relays turn OFF. the measurement result is determined.

Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7) Result output Result output

16-14
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

■ Time chart (when auto mode (level) is selected for as the CCD sampling start)
Restarts CCD sampling automatically after
measurement is completed.
CCD trigger
cycle

Type selection
input Specified object type number
See page
16-5.

CCD trigger
Black White Black White Black
window
(not highlighted)
Trigger Trigger Trigger

READY output
(While measuring
or setting = L)
Measurement result
is valid at the end of
a measurement
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation P Halt PC operation P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P
condition C C C C during measurement C during measurement C C C C during measurement C C C C C
When the object type is Parallel output is valid for PC control after
changed, all Y output and the measurement result is determined.
auxiliary relays turn OFF.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7) Result output Result output Result output

16

16-15
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(10) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = auto, object type change = general
purpose serial, result output = general purpose serial/parallel

The general purpose serial command (code 55(H)) is used to change the object type.
■ Setting order 1 → 2 (→ 3) ■ Configuration example
1MEAS INP I/F PARALLEL+SERIAL Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
TRIG CCD START 
Camera 2 (image capturing)
2START CCD SAMPL AUTO(EDGE)
AUTO(LEVEL) Personal computer
Select one of
these. PARALLEL Data
SERIAL Monitor

Remote key pad

3OUTPUT OBJ TYPE PARALLEL
SERIAL
Controller

Power supply (24 VDC)

Measurement is started when the CCD trigger level is ON.
Measurement is started when a CCD trigger signal is received.

Black White
Work

CCD trigger

Edge
Measurement
Level

16

16-16
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

■ Time chart (when auto mode (edge) is selected for as the CCD sampling start)
Restarts CCD sampling automatically after
measurement is completed.

CCD trigger
cycle
When a trigger signal is input during
sending object type change command,
this command will be invalid.
Serial Result Result
Type output Type output

CCD trigger Black White Black White Black

window
(not highlighted) Turn ON READY
signal by termination
Trigger of result output. Trigger
READY output
(While measuring
or setting = L)

Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the end of
a measurement

PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P

condition C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C during measurement CCCCC

When the object type is changed, Parallel output is valid for PC control after
all Y output and auxiliary relays turn OFF. the measurement result is determined.

Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7) Result output Result output

Note: Result output; The data in the block No., set in item "5SET SERIAL BLOCK" on the "OBJ-
TYPE I/O" screen, will be transmitted to the personal computer. - See page 16-23.

■ Time chart (when auto mode (level) is selected for as the CCD sampling start)
Restarts CCD sampling automatically
after measurement is completed.
CCD trigger
cycle
When a trigger signal is input during
sending object type change command,
this command will be invalid.
Serial Result Result
Type output Type output

CCD trigger Black White Black Whi-

window te
(not highlighted)
Trigger Trigger Trigger 16
READY output
(While measuring
or setting = L)

Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid
at the end of a measurement

PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P P P

condition C C C C during measurement C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C
When the object type is changed, Parallel output is valid for
all Y output and auxiliary relays PC control after the
turn OFF. measurement result is
determined.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7) Result output Result output

16-17
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

16-3 CCD trigger

[1] Outline
This function samples a specified part (trigger window) of an image captured by the CCD camera at a
high rate, and starts the measurement when the sampled image changes. Therefore, moving objects
can be measured without requiring an external trigger, such as a photo sensor.
To use this function, set the input/output the CCD trigger on the "I/O CONDITIONS" menu (pages 16-1
to 16-17), and set item " TRIG CCD START" and item " CCD TRIG COND" on the "OBJ-TYPE I/O"
screen.
- There are four methods for starting the measurement when there is a change in a sampled image, i.e.
a "BIN" (binary method), an "AVG-GRAYS" (average light level method), "GRAY-SRC" (gray search)
and "EDGE DTECT" (edge detection).
When a sampled binary image changes (the white area exceeds 50%), the
measurement is started.
Binary method - A change in a binary image means a change in a binary image from black
(background) to white (workpiece) or from white (background) to black
(workpiece).
Average light When the average light level of a sampled image enters a specified
level method range, the measurement is started.
When the degree of match exceeds the specified value (threshold value), the
Gray search measurement will start after the trigger event is detected.
- This is useful when workpieces have complicated shading and cannot be
converted to binary or use a fixed brightness range.

Edge detection Detects edge with gray search function, and the measurement is started.

- The trigger window can be set in any position for each object type.
In the past, the position of an external sensor had to be adjusted every time the object type was
changed. However, since this function eliminates the necessity of physical position adjustments, the
changeover time can be reduced.
Object type 1 Object type 2
Feeding direction Feeding direction

Trigger window

- The internal CCD trigger can be used with camera 1. (It cannot be used with camera 2.)
- An image that can be used to set the sample window conditions is obtained when the display mode
is switched from the through mode to the freeze mode.

[2] Setting procedure

How to display the setting screen
On the menu tree, select "TYPE00" and then F C1 BRT
16 "OBJ-TYPE I/O," to display the OBJ-TYPE I/O
SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND

OBJECT TYPE COND

screen. TYPE00
TYPE RUN COND
IMAGE-ADJ
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

16-18
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

Setting methods
TRIG CCD START OBJ-TYPE I/O SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
Select a triggering method for the CCD camera
1TRIG CCD START NO
used to capture images. The choices are: "BIN," 2CCD TRIG COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU) BIN
"AVG-GRAYS," "GRAY-SRC," and "EDGE 3SHUTTER SPEED AVG-GRAYS
DTECT." 4SERIAL OUTPUT GRAY-SRC
EDGE DTECT
For details, see page 16-18. 5CAM NO
Then the " CCD TRIG COND" line will appear. 6CALIBRATION

CCD TRIG COND

Select the trigger conditions from the sub menu on
this line.
The items in the sub menu will depend on the
selection made on the " TRIG CCD START" line.
Note: When "NO" was selected on the " TRIG
CCD START" line, the " CCD TRIG
COND" line will not appear and the following
line numbers will each be one less.
SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
(1) When "BIN" or "AVG-GRAYS" is selected on the
" TRIG CCD START" line
Capture an image
Press the SEL key to move the cursor to the "F" position on the upper function menu. Then press the
up or down arrow key to change the image mode from "T" to "F", to capture an image.

SIZE When "BIN" is selected

Specify the size of the window used for the CCD CCD TRIG COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
trigger.
1SIZE Y008(4~480)×X008(4~512)
While " SIZE" is selected, press the SET key. 2EVALUATION MAJORITY MAJORITY
The three digits for the X-axis will be 3EVAL-SPEC(RATIO %) 050 AND
highlighted. Change the X-axis value using the 4UP.L COORD MOVE(248.232) OR
5THRESHOLD VAL SET [U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)]
up and down arrow keys. 6INVERT B/W NO
To change value for an individual digit, press the
SET key again. The cursor will move to the left
most digit. Adjust each digit using the up/down/
When "AVG-GRAYS" is selected
left/right arrow keys. CCD TRIG COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
When the value is correct, press the SET key.
Now all three digits will be highlighted again. 1SIZE Y008(4~480)×X008(4~512)
2UP.L COORD MOVE(248.232)
Next, press the left or right arrow key to move 3THRESHOLD VALUE [U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)]
the cursor to the next three digits for the Y-axis. MEAS.AVG.GRA=000.0
Adjust this value the same way you adjusted the
X-axis value.

EVALUATION
Select an evaluation condition, "MAJORITY", "AND," or "OR," from the popup menu.
2EVALUATION Description
Based on the number of pixels in an area, the controller will decide that the whole
area is white if the specified percentage of pixels in that area is white. If the
16
percentage of white pixels is less than this amount, the area will be treated as
MAJORITY
black.
Specify the percentage (%), from 0 to 100% (in units of one percent) in the
"3EVAL-SPEC (RATIO%)" item.
AND Treat as white only when all of the pixels in an area are white.
OR Treat as white if one or more of the pixels in an area is white.

EVAL-SPEC(RATIO %)
when "MAJORITY" is selected on the " EVALUATION" line, enter the ratio % used to determine
the color of an area.

UP.L COORD
Specify the upper left corner coordinates of the CCD trigger window. By changing these values, the
position of the CCD trigger window will be moved.
16-19
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

THRESHOLD VAL THRESHOLD VAL AUTO-REG RESET F C1 BRT

Specify the threshold value for binary conversion.
1U.LM 050 （0∼255）
Select this line and press the SET key. The 2L.LM 100 （1∼255）
"THRESHOLD VAL" setting screen will appear.
For details, see pages 3-10.

INVERT B/W

NO Do not reverse black and white areas.

The area detected by binary
YES
conversion will be displayed as white.

SET=CHNG ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

(2) When "GRAY-SRC" is selected on the " TRIG CCD TRIG COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
CCD START" line. 1REF-IMG AREA SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
REF-IMG AREA 2SEARCH AREA   SET (216.200)∼(295.279)
SEARCH AREA 3DIRECT CRD CENTER (255.239)
For details, see 4CONTR.PIXEL 3
DETECT CRD 5MATCH LEVEL +07000~+10000
pages 5-5 to 5-7.
CONTR. PIXEL

MATCH LEVEL
Specify the range for the degree of match
While " MATCH LEVEL" is selected, press the
SET key. The five digits for the lower limit will be
highlighted. Change the number using the up and
down arrow keys.
To change the value of individual digits, press the
SET key again. The cursor will move to the left
most digit. Adjust the value of each digit using the
up/down/left/right arrow keys.
When the value is correct, press the SET key. All SEL=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC
five digits will be highlighted again.
Then, press the left or right arrow key to move the cursor to the next five digits, which are the upper
limit. Adjust this number the same way.

(3) When "EDGE DTECT" is selected on the " TRIG CCD TRIG COND   SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
CCD START" line.
1SEARCH AREA SET (224.208)∼(287.271)
SEARCH AREA 2DTECT MODE   CHNG POINT
DTECT MODE For details, see 3SEARCH DIRECT HORIZ (→)
SEARCH DIRECT 4THRESHOLD VAL SET (D:050 E:2 F:04)
pages 11-7 to 11-9.
THRESHOLD VAL
16

SEL=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

16-20
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

16-4 Setting for serial communications

When "PARALLEL+SERIAL" (general purpose serial) has been specified in item " MEAS INP I/F"
on the "I/O CONDITIONS" menu (page 16-1), and when "SERIAL" or "PC-LINK" has been specified
in item " OUT I/F (PARAL.)" the serial communication conditions must be set on the "COMM.SET"
screen.

Set the items to match the communication conditions of the other device.

Select "MAIN COND" -> "SYS-CND" -> SELECT SYSTEM COND F C1 BRT
"COMM.SET," in that order. SYS-CND
I/O CONDITIONS 1COMM.STANDARD
COMM.SET 2BAUDRATE(k.bps)
COMPUTER LINK 3NO. OF DATE BITS
GAIN-OFFSET 4PARITY CHECK
5NO. OF STOP BITS
6STATION NO.

SET=TO=NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

How to set the communication settings COMM.SET SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
Adjust each item to match the equipment used
to communicate. 1COMM.STANDARD RS232C RS232C
2BAUDRATE(k.bps) 115.2 RS422:4LINE
3NO. OF DATE BITS 7BIT 7BIT RS422:2LINE
COMM. STANDARD 4PARITY CHECK EVEN 8BIT
Select "RS232C," "RS422:4LINE," or 5NO. OF STOP BITS 2BIT
EVEN 2.4
"RS422:2LINE." 6STATION NO. 00(0~7F)
ODD 4.8
NO 9.6
2BIT
19.2
BAUDRATE (kbps) 1BIT
38.4
Set the communication speed: 2.4 Kbps, 4.8 57.6
115.2
Kbps, 9.6 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4 Kbps, 57.6
Kbps, or 115.2 Kbps.

NO.OF DATA BITS

Select either 7-bit or 8-bit.

PARITY CHECK
Select "EVEN," "ODD," or "NO." SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

NO.OF STOP BITS 16

Set it to 1-bit or 2-bits.

STATION NO.
Select the station number for communication using the up and down arrow keys.

16-21
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

16-5 Computer link

When "PC-LINK" has been specified in item " OUT I/F (PARAL.)" on the "I/O CONDITIONS" screen
(page 16-1), the computer link conditions must be set on the "COMPUTER LINK" screen.

How to display the computer link setting screen

How to display the computer link setting screen
Select "MAIN COND" -> "SYS-CND" -> SELECT SYSTEM COND F C1 BRT
"COMPUTER LINK," in that order. SYS-CND
The COMPUTER LINK screen will appear. I/O CONDITIONS 1PC MANUFACTURER
COMM.SET 2STATION NO.
COMPUTER LINK 3WRITE TOP ADRS
GAIN-OFFSET 4CONTROL PROC.
5BLK WRT COMMAND

How to set up a computer link COMPUTER LINK SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
PC MANUFACTURER, STATION NO., 1PC MANUFACTURER SHARP(COMMPORT)
WRITE TOP ADRS 2STATION NO. 01
The details for " PC MANUFACTURER," 3WRITE TOP ADRS 09000
STATION NO.," and " WRITE TOP SHARP(COMMPORT)
SHARP(LINK-MDL)
ADRS" are as follows.
MITSUBISHI
Item Setting range OMRON
YOKOGAWA
- Sharp: 00 to 37(8) *
Station No. - Mitsubishi: 00 to 31
- OMRON: 00 to 31
- Yokogawa: 01 to 32
- Sharp: 09000 to 99776
Write address - Mitsubishi: D0000 to D9999
(max. 512 bytes)
- OMRON: DM0000 to DM9999
- Yokogawa: D00001 to D16384
* In this book, octal notation is indicated by adding(8)

CONTROL PROC. , BLK WRT COMMAND COMPUTER LINK SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
When "MITSUBISHI" is selected on the " PC
1PC MANUFACTURER MITSUBISHI
MANUFACTURER" line, specify 2STATION NO. 00
" CONTROL PROC." and " BLK WRT 3WRITE TOP ADRS D0000
COMMAND." 4CONTROL PROC. FORM1 FORM1
5BLK WRT COMMAND WW WW FORM4
Menu Setting details QW

FORM 1: No line terminator

4 CONTROL FORM 4: With line terminators
PROC.
･ "CR" + "LF"
16
WW: Data writing address range
5 BLK WRT ･ D0000 to D1023
COMMAND QW: Data writing address range
･ D000000 to D008191

See "Chapter 18: Computer Link" for applicable models made by these manufacturers.
Note 1: Use an even address as the write start address.
Note 2: When 512 bytes are used for a write register on a Sharp model, select a write start address
from the following addresses.
09000, 19000, 29000, 39000, 49000, 59000, 69000, 79000, 89000 , 99000

16-22
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

16-6 Output block assignment (Computer link output and general

purpose serial output)
When measurement is controlled by a computer link or a communication interface (general purpose
serial IF: * 1), in addition to other block 0, blocks can be specified whose measurement data will be
output from the IV-S30J to a programmable controller or a personal computer.
* 1 In the case of a communication interface (general purpose serial IF), output blocks can be
specified only when the measurement is started by a CCD trigger or a parallel IF signal and the
results are set by a general purpose serial IF signal. See page 17-3.
Specify the settings above on the "OBJ-TYPE I/O" screen See the next page.

[1] Data in specified blocks

(1) In the case of a computer link
Data in the specified blocks will be output after the data (block 0) from measurement numbers 0 to 4
is output by the write register of the PC. (See page 18-3.)

Write register map

Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON Description

Result top write 09000 L L Termination code
D0000 DM0000
address (* 2) 09001 H H Appended information
・ ・ ・ ・
・ ・ ・ ・
・ ・ ・ ・
： L L Output data from measurement No. 3
： ： (block 0)
： H H
・
・ ・ ・ ・
・ ・ ・
・ ・ ・
・
Result top write ： L L Data in a specified block
： ：
address ： H H ・
+ 512 bytes ・
(* 3) ・ ・ ・ ・
・ ・ ・
・ ・ ・
・

* 2 Set the result top write address in item " WRITE TOP ADRS" on the "COMPUTER LINK" screen.
See the preceding page.

* 3 The top address to which the data in the specified blocks will be written is obtained by adding 512
bytes to the result top write address.

- Setting examples for various manufacturers

Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON
16
Result top write
09000 09300 D0000 DM0000
address
Top address of data
19000 19300 D0256 DM0256
in specified blocks

16-23
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

(2) When the measurement is started by a CCD trigger or a parallel I/F signal and the results are
output by a general purpose serial I/F signal
When the IV-S30J responds, data in a specified block is output after the output data (block 0) from the
measurement No. 0 to 4, in response to the measurement run command 2 (processing code 11(H)).
1
■ Response

Measurement 1

Measurement 2

Measurement 3

Measurement 4
Object Output evaluation Measurement 0
type results
: 1 1 RC RC
(H) (L) Y0 Y1 … Y15 Camera 1 Camera 2

Measurement 0
Data from Data from Data from Data from Data in the
Camera 1 Camera 2 measurement 1 measurement 2 measurement 3 measurement 4 specified SC SC CR
data 2 data 2 data 2 data 2 data 2 data 2 block (H) (L)

See page 17-7 for details about and .

Note: The response returned by the measurement run command 2 (processing code 11(H)) will not
contain the specified block.

[2] Setting (operating) procedure

Setting (operating) procedure F C1 BRT

SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND
1. Select "MAIN COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE
OBJECT TYPE COND
COND" -> "TYPE00" -> "OBJ-TYPE I/O" in
TYPE00 1TRIG CCD START
that order. TYPE RUN COND 2CCD TRIG COND
IMAGE-ADJ 3SHUTTER SPEED
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 4SERIAL OUTPUT
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2) 5SET SERIAL BLOCK
6CAM NO
FINAL NUM.CALC 7CALIBRATION
FINAL OUTPUT COND 8CALIBRATION
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

2. The "OBJ-TYPE I/O" screen will appear. Move OBJ-TYPE I/O SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
the cursor to " SERIAL OUTPUT" and press 1TRIG CCD START NO
the SET key. A popup menu will appear.
Select "BLOCK-ASSIGN" and press the SET 2SHUTTER SPEED 1/00060(1/30~1/10000) ANY
3SERIAL OUTPUT BLOCK-ASSIGN BLOCK-ASSIGN
key. 4SET SERIAL BLOCK BLOCK00 MEAS0 CAM1
5CAM NO 1(1~2)
6CALIBRATION NO
16

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

16-24
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

3. The " SET SERIAL BLOCK" line will appear. OBJ-TYPE I/O SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
Select this line and press the SET key. Enter the
1TRIG CCD START NO
block No., measurement No. and camera No. of
the measurement data to be output, using the left, 2SHUTTER SPEED 1/00060(1/30~1/10000)
right, up and down keys. 3SERIAL OUTPUT BLOCK-ASSIGN
4SET SERIAL BLOCK BLOCK00 MEAS0 CAM1
- Specify a block number to be returned in 5CAM NO 1(1~2)
addition to block 0 (00). If block 00 is specified, 6CALIBRATION NO
data from block 00 will not be returned a second
time. After the settings are complete, press the
SET key.

SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

16

16-25
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

16-7 Setting the data output

When you communicate with the IV-S30J using a computer link or a serial communication interface
(general purpose serial IF) in the following conditions, perform steps (1) and (2) below to enable serial
output.
- Computer link: When outputting any data Pages 18-16.
- Communication interface (general purpose serial IF): When executing a measurement run command
4 (processing code 14(H)) Pages 17-8 and 17-10.

[1] Select "ANY" for the serial output

Select "ANY" in the " SERIAL OUTPUT" item on the "OBJECT TYPE I/O" menu.

Setting (operating) procedure

1. Select "MAIN COND" -> "OBJECT TYPE SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT

COND" -> "TYPE00" -> "OBJ-TYPE I/O" in OBJECT TYPE COND

that order. TYPE00 1TRIG CCD START
TYPE RUN COND 2CCD TRIG COND
IMAGE-ADJ 3SHUTTER SPEED
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 4SERIAL OUTPUT
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2) 5SET SERIAL BLOCK
6CAM NO
FINAL NUM.CALC 7CALIBRATION
FINAL OUTPUT COND 8CALIBRATION
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
TYPE(NEW)

SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

2. The "OBJ-TYPE I/O" screen will appear. Move OBJ-TYPE I/O SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
the cursor to " SERIAL OUTPUT" and press 1TRIG CCD START NO
the SET key. A popup menu will appear.
Select "ANY" and press the SET key. 2SHUTTER SPEED 1/00060(1/30~1/10000)
3SERIAL OUTPUT ANY ANY
BLOCK-ASSIGN
4CAM NO 1(1~2)
5CALIBRATION NO

16
SET=SELECT A MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

16-26
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

[2] Select "YES" or "NO" for output data

Select "YES" or "NO" on the following menu screens that are displayed as "locked" screens to output
serial data. See the next page for instructions about how to lock the screen.
On any condition setting screen, press the TRG/BRT key and the cursor will move to the upper function
menu. Select "SCREEN" and press the SET key. A popup menu will appear. Select "SERIAL
OUTPUT" and press the SET key.

- The "EVALUATION COND" screen for - The "NUMERIC CALC" or "FINAL NUM.
individual measurement program CALC" screen for individual measurement
EVALUAT COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT program
[SERIAL OUTPUT] NUMERIC CALC SCRREN SAVE F C1 BRT
1X COORD(MDL0)  NO NO [SERIAL OUTPUT]
2Y COORD(MDL0) NO YES 1OUTPUT NO
3x DEVIATE(MDL0) NO
4y DEVIATE(MDL0) NO
5MATCH LVL(MDL0) NO
6ANGULAR DEVIATE NO
7X COORD(MD1) NO
(When the numerical calculation condition
8Y COORD(MDL1) NO
menu is displayed)
9x DEVIATE(MDL1) NO
0y DEVIATE(MDL1) NO
qMATCH LVL(MDL1) NO

SEL=VALUE INPUT ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

(When measuring positional deviation)

- The "DIST&AGL COND" screen

DIST&AGL COND SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT - When the serial output setting is "NO," no data
[SERIAL OUTPUT]
(block 0) will be output (the space will be filled by
1DISTANCE EVALUATION NO
the next item).

(To measure an object's "distance" on the distance and angle condition menu)

16

16-27
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

16-8 Calibrating the IV-S30J

The IV-S30J calibration can be adjusted, e.g. "1 pixel = 1 mm", and the data can be displayed as
actual dimensions.

How to display the CALIBRATION setting screen

1) Select "MAIN COND" and then "OBJECT MAIN MENU F C1 BRT

TYPE COND."
IVS30J
SYS-CND
OBJECT TYPE COND
SET WIZARD
EDIT MAIN OPS MENU
OPTION
2) On the "OBJECT TYPE COND" screen, move the cursor to any "TYPExx" that you want to
calibrate, and press the SET key.

3) Move the cursor to the "OBJ-TYPE I/O" line SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
and press the SET key.
OBJECT TYPE COND
TYPE00 1TRIG CCD START
TYPE RUN COND 2CCD TRIG COND
IMAGE-ADJ 3SHUTTER SPEED
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA1) 4SERIAL OUTPUT
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2) 5SET SERIAL BLOCK
6CAM NO
FINAL NUM.CALC 7CALIBRATION
FINAL OUTPUT COND 8CALIBRATION
OBJ-TYPE I/O
OBJ-TYPE SYS.
+ TYPE01
TYPE(NEW)

4) On the "OBJ-TYPE I/O" setting screen, move OBJ-TYPE I/O SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT
the cursor to the " CALIBRATION" line and 1TRIG CCD START BIN
press the SET key twice, to bring up the sub- 2CCD TRIG COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
menu. 3SHUTTER SPEED 1/00060(1/30~1/10000)
4SERIAL OUTPUT BLOCK-ASSIGN
Note: Depending on settings for the " TRIG 5SET SERIAL BLOCK BLOCK00 MEAS0 CAM1
CCD START" and " SERIAL 6CAM NO 1(1~2) NO
7CALIBRATION MANUAL MANUAL
OUTPUT" items, the number of the 8CALIBRATION (TO NEXT SUB-MENU) EDGE DTECT
"CALIBRATION" line will vary between
and .

5) Set the calibration details on the CALIBRATION SCREEN SAVE F C1 BRT

"CALIBRATION" setting screen. 1CURSOR1-COORD SET (256.240)
Put a ruler in the camera’s field of view . 2CURSOR2-COORD SET (256.240)
3SCALE 000.00
4SCALE(UNIT) mm
5REG EXEC
1PIXEL CBP 000.0000 mm
1mm CBM 000.0000 PIXEL

16
When "MANUAL" is selected on the "CALIBRATION" line

1. Move the cursor to " CURSOR1-COORD" and press the SET key.

16-28
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

2. While the cursor is on the " CROSS CLOSS CURSOR RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
CURSOR" line on the CROSS CURSOR
screen, press the SET key. Move the
crosshair cursor to the tick marks on the ruler 1CLOSS CURSOR (256.240)

using the up/down/left/right arrow keys and set

coordinate 1.

40 30 20 10

X:256 Y:200

3. Then move the cursor on the CROSS CLOSS CURSOR RESET RETURN F C1 BRT
CURSOR screen to the " CUSOR2-
COORD" line and set coordinate 2 using the
same procedure. 1CLOSS CURSOR (143.200)

40 30 20 10

X:143 Y:200

4. Select the " SCALE" line and enter the actual value of the distance between coordinates 1 and
2. In this example, the distance is 10 mm. Therefore, enter "10."

5. Select the " SCALE(UNIT)" line and select the unit of distance between coordinates 1 and 2. In
this example, select "mm."

6. Select the " REG" (register) line and while the cursor is on "EXEC" (execute) press the SET
key again. The controller will be calibrated to read "1 pixel = 1 mm."
16

16-29
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

Setting the register conditions for edge detec- REG COND SCREEN COND SAVE DATAIL F C1 BRT

tion 1SEARCH AREA(MDL0) SET(224,208)∼(287,271)

2DTECT MODE(MDL0) CHNG POINT CHNG POINT
SEARCH AREA 3SEARCH DIR(MDL0) HORIZ(→) DRK→BRT
Select " SEARCH AREA (MDL0)" and press 4THRESHOLD(MDL0) SET(D:050 E:2 F:04) BRT→DRK
5REF COORD(MDL0) SET KEY(256.240) CENT(BRT)
the SET key to go to the setting screen.
CENT(DRK)
6SEARCH AREA(MDL1) SET(224,208)∼(287,271)
DTECT MODE 7DTECT MODE(MDL1) CHNG POINT
HORIZ(→)
Select an image processing method for the 8SEARCH DIR(MDL1) HORIZ(→)
HORIZ(←)
edges. 9THRESHOLD(MDL1) SET(D:050 E:2 F:04)
VERT(↓)
0REF COORD(MDL1) SET KEY(256.240)
VERT(↑)
SEARCH DIR
qSCALE 000.00
Specify a search direction. wSCALE(UNIT) mm
For details, see page 4-8. eREG EXEC
1PIXEL CBP 000.0000 mm
1mm CBM 000.0000 PIXEL
THRESHOLD
Specify a threshold value for binary
SET=WINDOW SET ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP
conversion.
For details, see page 3-11.
Edge Flat
width width

Light level

Density difference

A B

Automatic setting
Select "AUTO-REG" from the upper function menu on the THRESHOLD setting screen. The
controller will set the optimum value automatically.

REF COORD (reference coordinates)

You can change the reference coordinates to any desired position.

SCALE
Enter the actual value of the distance between coordinates 1 and 2. In this example, the distance
is 10 mm. Therefore, enter "10."

SCALE (UNIT)
Select unit of distance between coordinates 1 and 2. In this example, select "mm."

REG (register)
While the cursor is on "EXEC" (execute) press the SET key again. The controller will be
calibrated to treat 1 pixel = 1 mm.

16

16-30
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

6) Using the CBP value that was set in the calibration function, you can execute numeric
calculations.
SELECT OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 BRT
1. Press the ESC key twice to show the menu
OBJECT TYPE COND
tree. Select the "NUM-CALC" line for the
TYPE00
same object type and measurement TYPE RUN COND
N00
number, and press the SET key. IMAGE-ADJ
N01
MEA-CND(CAMERA1)
MEAS0
N02
POSI-CORRECT
+ MEAS01(POSI-DEVIATION)
N03
MEAS02(POSI-DEVIATION)
IMG PRE-PROC
N04
+ MEAS CND
EVALUATION COND
N05
+ DISTANCE&ANGLE COND
NUM-CALC
N06
OUT-COND
MEAS(NEW)
N07
+ MEA-CND(CAMERA2)
FINAL NUM.CALC
FINAL OUTPUT COND
OBJ-TYPE I/O
SET=TO NEXT SUB-MENU ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=POPUP

2. Relay numbers N00 to N07 are displayed NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
【N08-N15】
on the first screen. To display relay
CHG-CALC
numbers N08 to N15, press the SET key 1RUN A TEST    (SET KEY)
while the cursor is on the "CHG-CALC" TYPE FORMULA
item. N00

N01

N12

N03

N04

N05

N06

N07

SET=EXEC ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

3. On the "NUMERIC CALC" screen, use the NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
up and down arrow keys to move the cursor 【N00-N07】
CHG-CALC
to a cell in the "TYPE" column on the
1RUN A TEST    (SET KEY)
desired relay number line. Press the SET
TYPE FORMULA
key. A popup menu will appear and you can
select the calculation result you want to
N00
CRD-X 16
CRD-Y
output. In this example, select "DEV -x" N01 DEV-x
(deviation on the X-axis) DEV-y
N12 MATCH M
ANGL-B
N03 NUM-CAL [NC]
CNST [C]
N04 NO

N05

N06

N07

SET=SELECT TYPE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

16-31
 Setting the Input/Output Conditions

4. Next, move the cursor to the "FORMULA" NUMERIC CALC SCREEN COND SAVE F C1 BRT
column and press the SET key. Another 【N00-N07】
popup menu will appear allowing you to CHG-CALC
select the type of formula you want to use 1RUN A TEST    (SET KEY)

for calculations. In this case, select "CBP." TYPE FORMULA

N00
OBJECT TYPE
CALC RESULT
N01
CNST
SUM
N12 AVG
CBP
N03 CBM
DEL
N04

N05

N06

N07

SET=SELECT TYPE ESC=BACK SEL=CHNG IMG TRG=FUNC

5. After completing these settings, deviation on X-axis will be output as a CBP value (in unit of
mm).

16

16-32
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

Chapter 17: Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

The IV-S30J can communicate with a personal computer that transmits commands and receives responses to
measurement execution commands.

17-1 List of processing functions

The following functions can be used for communication between the IV-S30J and a personal
computer (using the general-purpose serial interface).

Cate- Processing
Code Functions
gory description
Measurement - Executes all measurement programs for a specified object type.
execution 10 (You can make measurements by specifying a camera.)
function 1 - Outputs the ladder results (Y0 to 15).
Executing measurement

- Executes all measurement programs for a specified object type.

Measurement
(You can make measurements by specifying a camera.)
execution 11
- Outputs the ladder results (Y0 to 15) and the measurement
function 2
data in block 0 for each measurement program.
- Executes all measurement programs for a specified object type.
Measurement (You can make measurements by specifying a camera.)
execution 12 - Outputs the ladder results (Y0 to 15) and the measurement
function 3 result from a specified block for a specified measurement
number.
Measurement - Executes all measurement programs for a specified object type.
execution 14 (You can make measurements by specifying a camera.)
function 4 - Outputs any numerical data selected by the IV-S30J.
Measurement Reads the result of the last measurement
20
data reading 1 - Outputs the ladder results (Y0 to 15).
Reads the result of the last measurement
Measurement
21 - Outputs the ladder results (Y0 to 15) and the measurement
data reading 2
data in block 0 for each measurement program.
Reading result

Reads the result of the last measurement

Measurement
22 - Outputs the ladder results (Y0 to 15) and the measurement
data reading 3
result from a specified block for a specified measurement number.
- Reads the results of the last measurement from a specified
Measurement
24 measurement code.
data reading 4
- Outputs any numerical data selected by the IV-S30J.
Illumination - Reads the amount of illumination measured by the lighting
28
reading monitor function, and the evaluation result.
Corrected light - Reads the corrected light level measured by the lighting monitor
29
level reading function, evaluation result and preset reference density.

Shown below is the relationship of each selection when code 10 to 14 are specified is shown below.
The conditions below are what is shown when the "PARALLEL+SERIAL" is selected on the " MEAS
INP I/F" on the "I/O CONDITIONS" selection screen.

Measurement Output
Serial output Object type change
start selection
General purpose
--- Command codes 10 to 12 Command codes 10 to 12
serial port
None --- Parallel
17
SHARP/MITSUBISHI/
Computer link Parallel
Parallel port OMRON/YOKOGAWA
General-purpose Response output from
Parallel
serial command codes 11

17-1
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

The conditions below are what is shown when the "TRIG CCD START" is selected on the " MEAS
INP I/F" on the "I/O CONDITIONS” selection screen.
Measurement Output
Serial output Object type change
start selection
Parallel port --- Parallel
Auto General purpose Response output from
Command codes 55
serial port command codes 11
None --- Parallel
SHARP/MITSUBISHI/
Computer link Parallel
Parallel port OMRON/YOKOGAWA
General-purpose Response output from
Parallel
serial port command codes 11
General-purpose Command codes 10 to
--- Command codes 10 to 12
serial port 12

Cate-
Processing function Code Function
gory
Operation lock Read 50 - Read lock/unlock condition of the operation screen.
status Set 51 - Set lock/unlock for the operation screen.
English or Read 52 - Read the status from the English or Japanese display.
Japanese display Set 53 - Enter a change on the English or Japanese display.
- Read an object type number to measure when the
Read 54
Object type measurement start input is turned ON.
number - Assign an object type number to be executed when the
Set 55
measurement start input is turned ON.
- Read the image status being monitored
Individual conditions

Read 56
(Output: Through/freeze, Brightness: Full/half).
Image status
- Change the status of the image being monitored
Set 57
(Output: Through/freeze, Brightness: Full/half).
- Read the status of the camera outputting an image for
Read 58
Output image the specified object type.
camera - Set the status of the camera that is outputting an image
Set 59
for the specified object type.
- Read the shutter speed setting for the specified object
Read 5A
Shutter speed type.
Set 5B - Set shutter speed for the specified object type.
- Measurement program: Registers reference images for
the specified object type and measurement number
Register a
Assign 5E (register No. 0 only).
reference image
- Image calculation: Registers reference images used for
image calculations of the specified object type.
- Set all settable conditions to their initial values (global
Initialize all 60 conditions, all object type conditions, and reference
images).
- Check the controller for a hardware error.
Self-diagnostic 68 Items to check: VRAM (read after write), SDRAM (read
after write), etc.
Reset 69 - Reset the controller (the same as a power reset operation).
Manual measurement Read 70 - Read the coordinates detected by manual measurement.
17 coordinates Set 71 - Set the coordinates for manual measurement.

17-2
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

17-2 Data flow

The data flow between the IV-S30J and a personal computer is shown below.

[1] Measurement execution 1: Command codes 10, 11, or 12

æ Select the measurement start input source = general purpose serial and parallel port
IV-S30J

(for each object type)

1 Receiving a command

Measuring Personal
computer
2 Transmitting a response
(measurement data, etc.)

[2] Measurement execution 2: Response processing for command 11

æ Select the measurement start method = CCD trigger, parallel or serial output = general
purpose serial
Note: When a CCD trigger is chosen as the measurement start input, the sample start must be set
to parallel or auto.
IV-S30J
(for each object type)

1 Inputting a trigger CCD camera or

programmable controller
Measuring

2 Transmitting a response Personal computer or

 (Command 11, programmable controller
 measurement data, etc.)

- You can specify the response block on the "OBJECT TYPE I/O" screen see page 16-23.

æ Select the measurement start method = CCD trigger, start sampling & output results =
general purpose serial

IV-S30J
1 Inputting a trigger CCD camera or
(Start sampling CCD trigger.) programmable controller
(for each object type)

2 CCD trigger
CCD camera
Measuring

3 Transmitting
a response Personal computer or
(Command 11, programmable controller
measurement data, etc.)

17

17-3
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

[3] Measurement execution 3: Command 14

æ Select measurement start input source = general purpose serial and parallel port
[Procedure] (1) Send packet number 0 → After measuring, send back the measurement code for
the first register and any specified data.
(2) Send the other packets, starting from number 1→
- Send back the measurement code for the next register and any specified data.
- When there are no more measurement registers, send back the end code "F."

IV-S30J
(for each object type)

1 Receiving a command
(Packet = 0: Measurement execution)
Measuring

2 Transmitting a response
(Measurement codes, measurement data, etc.) Personal
computer
1 Receiving a command
(Packet = 1: No measurement execution)

2 Transmitting a response
(Next measurement codes, measurement data, etc.)
:
:

[(Response) measurement code]

Measurement Setting Measurement Setting
code code

0 MEASURE 0 CAMERA 1 5 MEASUREMENT 4

1 MEASURE 0 CAMERA 2 6 Distance and angle measurement
2 MEASUREMENT 1 7 Numerical calculation

3 MEASUREMENT 2 F Quit
4 MEASUREMENT 3

[4] Processing other than measurement execution processing

- Operation screen: Any command can be processed, regardless of the measurement I/O
settings (measurement start, result output).
- Setting screens: Reading/writing a display image (commands 30, 31) and reading a binary
image (command 34) are available.

IV-S30J

1 Receiving a command
Operating

Personal
computer
17 2 Transmitting a response

17-4
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

17-3 Communication format

The communication formats of the commands and responses between the IV-S30J and a personal
computer are outlined below.

Command Station
: No. ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ............... ＊ ＊ SC
   SC CR
H L

Terminator

Header
*2
*1 Processing *2 *4
Station Text Checksum code
code
No.
Response Station
: No. ＊ ＊ RC   ＊ ＊ ............... ＊ ＊ SC SC CR
  RC
H L H L
Header

*3 *2
*1 Termination Text Terminator
Station
code *4
No. *2
Checksum code
Processing code
*1 Station No.: 00 to 7F(H)
*2 Processing code and text
- They depend on the contents of communication. - See pages 17-1 and 17-7 and after.
- On abnormal termination, no text is provided.
*3 Termination code(H)
The termination code is a 2-digit hexadecimal number.
- When an output is sent through the general purpose serial I/F, 00(H) is sent on normal
termination.
- On abnormal termination, a code other than 00(H) is sent. - See page 19-3.
*4 Checksum code (SCH and SCL)
To improve the reliability of the transmitted data, in addition to a parity check, error detection by a
checksum is used for error detection.
When the IV-S30J does not need to complete a checksum for error detection, use an @ (at sign:
ASCII code 40(H)) in each of the checksum codes SCH and SCL included in the command.

[Error detection using a checksum]

The ASCII code for each data byte, from the processing code to the end of text (prior to the
checksum code), is added. The final value is compared to the checksum code which is treated the
same way. If the two values are identical, the command is considered to be valid. I/F they are not
identical, an error has occurred during transmission.
Value increment range
for checksum

Command Station
: No. ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ............... ＊ ＊ SC SC CR
H L

Terminator
Header

Station Processing
No. Text Checksum code
code
17
Value increment range
for checksum

Response Station
: No.   RC
＊ ＊ RC   ＊ ＊ .............. ＊ ＊ SC SC CR
H L H L
Header

Station Termination Text Terminator

No. code
Checksum code
Processing code

17-5
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

[Method for creating a checksum code]

The ASCII code for each byte of data, from the processing code to the end of text (prior to the
checksum code) is added together. The lower 1 byte of this sum is divided into the upper 4 bits and
the lower 4 bits. The hex character (0 to F) is converted to the ASCII code for that character and
sent as one byte. Thus the checksum code consists of two bytes.

Ex. 1 Command for the measurement Ex. 2 Command for the measurement
execution function 1 (code 10(H)) execution function 7 (code 1A(H))

Station Station
: No. 1 0 0 1 C 2 CR : No. 1 A 1 6 4 0 1 6 E CR

ASCLII data ASCLII data

1.................31 1.................31
0.................30 A................41
0.................30 1.................31
1.................31 6.................36
Checksum
code : C2 C2 4.................34
0.................30
1.................31
Checksum
code : 6E 16E

Note

- This manual uses the following notation to represent addresses and set values.
Octal number .......................... (8) Ex. 377(8)
Decimal number ...................... None Ex. 255
Hexadecimal number ............. (H) Ex. FF(H)

17

17-6
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

17-4 Processing functions

[1] Measurement execution functions
(1) Measurement execution function 1: code 10(H)
This command will cause the IV-S30J to execute all of the measurement programs for a specified
object type. (You can specify the camera to use for measurements.)
The results in the ladder outputs (Y00 to 15) will be sent back as the response.
On page 17-1 you can see how each command affects the various inputs and outputs.
Ë Command

Execution
Station Object

camera
No. type
: 1 0 SC SC CR
(H) (L)

Ë Response
Object Final output

Execution
Station

camera
No. type evaluation result
: 1 0 RC RC Y0 Y1 … Y15 SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

- Object type → Object type to measure: 00 to 3F

- Execution camera number → 0: Both cameras 1 and 2; 1: Camera 1 only; 2: Camera 2 only
- Final output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) → 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
- Data flow - See page 17-3.

(2) Measurement execution function 2: code 11(H)

This command will cause the IV-S30J to execute all of the measurement programs for a specified
object type. (You can specify the camera to use for measurements.)
The results in the ladder outputs (Y00 to 15) and the measurement data in block 0 of each
measurement will be sent back as the response.
On page 17-1 you can see how each command affects the various inputs and outputs.
Ë Command
Station
Execution

Object
camera

: No. type
1 1 SC SC CR
(H) (L)

1
Ë Response
Measure-
Execution

Station Object Final output ment 0

Measure-

Measure-

Measure-

Measure-
Camera 1
Camera 2

evaluation result
camera

No. type
ment 1

ment 2

ment 3

ment 4

: 1 1 RC RC
Y0 Y1 … Y15
(H) (L)

Measurement 0
Data on Data on Data on Data on
Camera 1 Camera 2 measure- measure- measure- measure- SC SC CR
data 2 data 2 ment 1 2 ment 2 2 ment 3 2 ment 4 2 (H) (L)

- Object type → Object type to measure: 00 to 3F

- Execution camera number → 0: Both camera 1 and 2; 1: Camera 1 only; 2: Camera 2 only
- Final Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) → 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
- 1 → Measurement programs 0 to 4
0 = none, 1 = positional deviation measurement, 2 = degree of match inspection,
3 = lead inspection, 5 = area measurement by binary conversion,
6 = object counting by binary conversion, 7 = object identification by binary conversion, 17
8 = point measurement, 9 = multiple positions measurement, A = multiple degree of
inspections
- 2 → Measurement data
Only the data in block 0 of a measurement program is output. (For details about the data
arrangement in a block, see the section "Measurement data blocks" in Chapter 18, "Computer
link.")
- Data flow - See page 17-3.

17-7
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

(3) Measurement execution function 3 : code 12(H)

This command will cause the IV-S30J to execute all of the measurement programs for a specified
object type. (You can specify the camera to use for measurements.)
The results in the ladder outputs (Y00 to 15) and the results from a specified block in a specified
measurement will be sent back as the response.
On page 17-1 you can see how each command affects the various inputs and outputs.
■ Command - Measurement Number → A measurement
Object number that outputs numerical data (MEASURE 0

Execution
Station

Measure-
Block
No. SC SC CR CAMERA 1: 0, MEASURE 0 CAMERA 2: 1, and

camera

ment
No. type
: 1 2 MEASUREMENT 1 to 4: 2 to 5)
(H) (L)
- Block → Specified block from which the data of a
■ Response specified measurement function will be output.
Final Output

Execution
Station Object
evaluation result Specified

camera
No. type
: 1 2 RC RC Y0 Y1 … Y15 block data SC SC CR
(H) (L) 1 (H) (L)

- Object type → Object type to measure: 00 to 3F

- Execution camera number → 0: Both camera 1 and 2; 1: Camera 1 only; 2: Camera 2 only
- Final output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) → 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
- → Specified block data (For details about the data arrangement in a block, see the section
"Measurement data blocks" in Chapter 18, "Computer link.")
- Data flow - See page 17-3.
(4) Measurement execution function 4: code 14(H)
This command will cause the IV-S30J to execute all of the measurement programs for a specified
object type. (You can specify the camera to use for measurements.)
Any numerical data selected by the IV-S30J can be output as the response.
See page 16-26.
On page 17-1 you can see how each command affects the various inputs and outputs.
■ Command
Object
Execution

Station
camera

No. type
: 1 4 1 SC SC CR
(H) (L)

■ Response
Execution

Station Object
ment code
Measure-
camera

: No. 1 4 RC RC type Any numerical data SC SC CR

(H) (L) (H) (L)

- → 0: Execute/read, 1: Read
- Object type → Object type to measure: 00 to 3F
- Execution camera number → 0: Both camera 1 and 2; 1: Camera 1 only; 2: Camera 2 only
- Measurement code (response)
Measurement Setting Measurement Setting
code code

0 MEASURE 0 CAMERA 1 5 MEASUREMENT 4

1 MEASURE 0 CAMERA 2 6 Distance and angle measurement
17 2 MEASUREMENT 1 7 Numerical calculation

3 MEASUREMENT 2 F Quit
4 MEASUREMENT 3

- Specifications for any output data See page 17-16.

- Data flow See page 17-3.

17-8
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

[2] Result reading

Data from the last measurement is read. (No instruction is sent to execute an operation.)
For details about the measurement data blocks, see the section "Measurement data blocks" in
"Chapter 18: Computer link."
(1) Measurement data reading function 1: code 20(H)
This command will cause the IV-S30J to read the results of the last measurement.
The results in the ladder outputs (Y00 to 15) will be sent back as the response.
This command is effective regardless of the measurement input specified.
Ë Command
Station
No.
: 2 0 SC SC CR
(H) (L)

Ë Response
Object Final output

Execution
Station

camera
No. type evaluation result
: 2 0 RC RC Y0 Y1 … Y15 SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

- Object type → Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 3F
- Executed camera number → 0: Both camera 1 and 2; 1: Camera 1 only; 2: Camera 2 only
- Final output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) → 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK

(2) Measurement data reading function 2: code 21(H)

This command will cause the IV-S30J to read the results of the last measurement.
The results in the ladder outputs (Y00 to 15) and the measurement data in block 0 of each
measurement will be sent back as the response.
This command is effective regardless of the measurement input specified.
Ë Command
Station
: No. 2 1 SC SC CR
(H) (L)

1
Ë Response
Measure-
Final output
Execution

Object ment 0
Measure-

Measure-

Measure-

Measure-
Camera 1
Camera 2

evaluation result
camera

type
ment 1

ment 2

ment 3

ment 4

: 2 1 RC RC
Y0 Y1 … Y15
(H) (L)

Measurement 0 Data on Data on Data on Data on

Camera 1 Camera 2 measure- measure- measure- measure- SC SC CR
data 2 data 2 ment 1 2 ment 2 2 ment 3 2 ment 4 2 (H) (L)

- Object type → Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 3F
- Executed camera number → 0: Both camera 1 and 2; 1: Camera 1 only; 2: Camera 2 only
- Final Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) → 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
- 1 → Measurement programs 0 to 4
0 = none, 1 = positional deviation measurement, 2 = degree of match inspection,
3 = lead inspection, 5 = area measurement by binary
conversion, 6 = object counting by binary conversion, 7 = object identification by
binary conversion, 8 = point measurement, 9 = multiple positions measurement,
A = multiple degree of inspections 17
- 2 → Measurement data
Only the data in block 0 of a measurement program is output.

17-9
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

(3) Measurement data reading function 3: code 22(H)

This command will cause the IV-S30J to read the results of the last measurement.
The results in the ladder outputs (Y00 to 15) and the measurement data in block 0 of each
measurement will be sent back as the response.
This command is effective regardless of the measurement input specified.
■ Command
Station Object

Measure-
Block

ment
No. type SC SC CR
: 2 2
(H) (L)

■ Response
Final output

Execution
Station Object
evaluation result Specified

camera
No. type
: 2 2 RC RC Y0 Y1 … Y15 block data SC SC CR
(H) (L) 1 (H) (L)

- Object type → Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 3F
- Executed camera number → 0: Both camera 1 and 2; 1: Camera 1 only; 2: Camera 2 only
- Final Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) → 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
- 1 → Specified block data

(4) Measurement data reading function 4: code 24(H)

This command will cause the IV-S30J to read the results of the last measurement.
Any numeric value data will be output as a response. See page16-26.
This command is effective regardless of the measurement input specified.
■ Command - Measurement Number → A measurement number that
outputs numerical data (MEASURE 0 CAMERA 1: 0,
ment code

Station
Measure-

MEASURE 0 CAMERA 2: 1, and MEASUREMENT 1 to

: No. 2 4 SC SC CR
4: 2 to 5)
(H) (L)
- Block → Specified block from which the data of a
■ Response specified measurement function will be output.
Execution

Station Object
ment code
Measure-
camera

: No. 2 4 RC RC type Any numerical data SC SC CR

(H) (L) (H) (L)

- Object type → Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 3F
- Executed camera number → 0: Both camera 1 and 2; 1: Camera 1 only; 2: Camera 2 only

[(Response) measurement code]

Measurement Measurement Setting
code Setting code

0 MEASURE 0 CAMERA 1 5 MEASUREMENT 4

1 MEASURE 0 CAMERA 2 6 Distance and angle measurement

2 MEASUREMENT 1 7 Numerical calculation

3 MEASUREMENT 2
17
4 MEASUREMENT 3

- Specification for any output data See page 17-16.

17-10
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

(5) Illuminance level reading: code 28(H)

The illuminance level measured by the illuminance monitor function and the evaluation result are
read.
Ë Command

Execution
Station

camera
: No. 2 8 SC SC CR
(H) (L)

Ë Response
Station Object Illuminance

Result
No. type
: 2 8 RC RC SC SC CR
102 101 100 10-1 (H) (L)
(H) (L)

- Camera No. → 0: camera 1, 1: camera 2

- Object type → Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 3F
- Result → 0: NG, 1: OK
- Illuminance → 000.0 to 255.0

(6) Corrected light level reading: code 29(H)

The corrected light level measured by the illuminance monitor function, the evaluation result and
preset reference light level are read.
Ë Command
- Camera No. → 0: camera 1, 1: camera 2
Execution

Station
camera

: No. 2 9 SC SC CR
(H) (L)

Ë Response
Station Object Corrected Reference
Result

No. type light level light level

: 2 9 RC RC SC SC CR
± 102 101 100 10-1102 101 100 10-1 (H) (L)
(H) (L)

- Object type → Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 3F
- Result → 0: NG, 1: OK
- Corrected light level → Corrected light level (–0 to 255.0)
- Reference light level → Light level used as the criterion (0 to 255.0)

17

17-11
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

[3] Setting, initialization, and diagnosis of the operation screen

Shown below are only the commands and responses of these processing functions.

Process function Process

code Communication format
Ë Command
Station
No.
: 5 0 SC SC CR
Read (H) (L)
operation 50
screen lock Ë Response
status 1→Operation screen lock
Station 0 : Lock OFF
No.
: 5 0 RC RC SC SC CR 1 : Lock ON
(H) (L) 1 (H) (L)

Ë Command
Station 1→Operation screen lock
No. 0 : Lock OFF
Set
: 5 1 1 SC SC CR 1 : Lock ON
(H) (L)
operation
screen lock 51
Ë Response
status
Station
No.
: 5 1 RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command
Station
No.
: 5 2 SC SC CR
Read from the (H) (L)
English or 52
Japanese Ë Response
display Station 1→English or Japanese display
No.
: 5 2 1 0 : Japanese
Individual conditions

RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L) 1 : English

Ë Command
Station 1→English or Japanese display
No. 0 : Japanese
: 5 3 1 SC SC CR 1 : English
Set items on (H) (L)
the English or
53
Japanese Ë Response
display
Station
No.
: 5 3 RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command
Station
: No.
5 4 SC SC CR
Read object (H) (L)
type number 54
Ë Response
Station Object
1→Type number(00 to 3F)
17 : No.
5 4 RC RC
type
SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command
Station Object
No. type 1→Type number(00 to 3F)
: 5 5 SC SC CR
Assign object (H) (L)
type number 55
Ë Response
Station
No.
: 5 5 RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

17-12
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

Process function Process

code Communication format
Ë Command
Station
No. 1→Output
: 5 6 SC SC CR 0 : Freeze
(H) (L) 1 : Through
Read the
56
image status Ë Response
2→Light

Brightness
Station

Output
No. 0 : Full
: 5 6 RC RC SC SC CR 1 : Half
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command

Brightness
Station
1→Output

Output
No.
: 5 7 SC SC CR 0 : Freeze
Set the image (H) (L) 1 : Through
status 57
Ë Response
2→Light
Station
No. 0 : Full
: 5 7 RC RC SC SC CR 1 : Half
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command Camera1 display

1 2
Station 1Camera 1
No. 2Camera 2 8 0 4 0
: 5 8 SC SC CR
(H) (L) Camera2 display
Read out
1 2
image camera 58
condition
Ë Response 4 0 8 0
Station 1 2 Horizontal division
No. display
: 5 8 RC RC SC SC CR
Individual conditions

1 2
(H) (L) (H) (L)
0 X1 0 X2

Ë Command Camera1 display

1 2
Station 1 2 8 0 4 0
No.
: 5 9 SC SC CR
(H) (L) Camera2 display
Set output 1 2
59
image camera Ë Response 4 0 8 0
condition
Station Horizontal division
No. display
: 5 9 RC RC SC SC CR 1Camera 1 1 2
(H) (L) (H) (L) 2Camera 2 0 X1 0 X2

Ë Command
Station
No. 1→Shutter speed
: 5 A SC SC CR (001E to 2710(H) : 1/30 to 1/10000)
Read the (H) (L)
shutter speed 5A
for each object Ë Response
type Station Shutter speed
No.
: 5 A RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command 17
Station Shutter speed
No.
: 5 B SC SC CR
Set the shutter (H) (L)
speed for each 5B
Ë Response
object type
Station
No. 1→Shutter speed
: 5 B RC RC SC SC CR (001E to 2710(H) : 1/30 to 1/10000)
(H) (L) (H) (L)

17-13
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

Process
Process function code Communication format
Ë Command
Station

Measure-
1Object

ment No.
Individual conditions

No. 1→ 0: Measurement program

: 5 E SC SC CR 1: Comparative calculations
Register a (H) (L)
between images
reference 5E
image
Ë Response
Station
No.
: 5 E RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command
Station
: No.
6 0 1 SC SC CR 1→Initialize memory
(H) (L) 0 : Flash memory and RAM
Initialize all 1 : RAM
60
parameters Ë Response
Station
No.
: 6 0 RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command
Station
No.
: 6 8 SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Self diagnosis 68
Ë Response
Station
No.
: 6 8 RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command
Station
No.
: 6 9 SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Reset 69
Ë Response
Station
No.
: 6 9 RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

17

17-14
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

Process
Process function code Communication format
Ë Command
1 → X coordinate 0X of the 0th detection
Station
No. (000 to IFF(H)) : 0 to 0511
: 7 0 SC SC CR 2 → Y coordinate 0Y of the 0th detection
(H) (L) (000 to IDF(H)) : 0 to 479
Read the
3 → X coordinate 1X of the 1st detection
manual
measurement 70 (000 to IFE(H)) : 0 to 511
coordinates 4 → Y coordinate 1Y of the 1st detection
Ë Response (000 to IDF(H)) : 0 to 479

Station 1 2 3 4
No.
: 7 0 RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

Ë Command
Station 1 2 3 4
No.
: 7 1 SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Set the manual
measurement Ë Response 1 → X coordinate 0X of the 0th detection
71
coordinates Station (000 to IFF(H)) : 0 to 0511
: No. 2 → Y coordinate 0Y of the 0th detection
7 1 RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L) (000 to IDF(H)) : 0 to 479
3 → X coordinate 1X of the 1st detection
(000 to IFE(H)) : 0 to 511
4 → Y coordinate 1Y of the 1st detection
(000 to IDF(H)) : 0 to 479

17

17-15
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

[4] Setting numerical data of the any output measuring

Numerical data of the any setting of the response at measuring (code 14(H): page 17-8) and reading
measurement data 4 (code 24(H): page 17-10) is as follows.
[Ex.] Response to code 24

Execution
Station Object

ment code
Measure-
camera
type
: No. 2 4 RC RC Any numerical data SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)

[Any type of numerical data]

1 →Delimiter between output data:","(Space 20(H) + comma 2C(H))
Output
code Numeric result data3
2 →Output code list
1 2 3 →Numeric result data
Output only the registered data in each specified
measurement, in register order.
Note: A maximum of 1 K bytes data is allowed.

[Ex.] A numerical data of the any setting when outputting coordinate X and coordinate Y with the
positional deviation measurements.
Registration 0 Registration 0 Registration N Registration 0 Registration N
, 0 2 (Model 0) (Model 1) : (Model 1) , 0 3 (Model 0) : (Model 1)

Codes and number of bytes of output data

1. Result of each measurement program
Output data Measurement program

Area measurement

match inspections
binary conversion

Multiple degree of
Multiple positions
identification by
Degree of match

Object counting

measurement

measurement
measurement

conversion

conversion
inspection
inspection
Positional
deviation

by binary

by binary

Object
Output

No. of

Point
bytes
code

Lead

Kind of output

Degree of match 01 2 O O
Coordinate X 02 2 O O
Coordinate Y 03 2 O O
Coordinate deviation X 04 2 O
Coordinate deviation Y 05 2 O
Angle 06 2 O
Average light level 1 07 2 O
Number of objects 08 2 O O O O O
MAX. 09 2 O
Distance
MIN. 0A 2 O
MAX. 0B 2 O
Lead width
MIN. 0C 2 O
Lead length/ MAX. 0D 2 O
lead width 2 MIN. 0E 2
Total area 10 4 O O O
CUR. 11 O
Area of each
MAX. 12 4
label
MIN. 13
17 CTR. OF
X coordinate 14 O
of gravity GRAVITY
center/Distan- MAX. 15 2
ce between DIST.
gravity MIN.
centers X DIST. 16

Y coordinate CTR. OF 17 O
of gravity GRAVITY
center/Distan- MAX.
18 2
ce between DIST.
gravity MIN.
centers Y DIST. 19

17-16
 Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)

Output data Measurement program

Object identification by
Area measurement by
Positional deviation

Object counting by
binary conversion

Multiple positions

match inspections
binary conversion
binary conversion

Multiple degree of
Degree of match

measurement
measurement

measurement
Output code

No. of bytes

inspection
inspection

Point
Lead
Kind of output

CUR. 1A O
Fillet diameter
X MAX. 1B 2
MIN. 1C
CUR. 1D O
Fillet diameter MAX. 1E 2
Y
MIN. 1F
Main axis angle 20 2 O
Perimeter 21 4 O
Degree of match 22 2 O O
Coordinate X 23 2 O O
Coordinate Y 24 2 O O
Average light level 1(total 25 2 O
of light level differences)
Average light level 2 28 1 O
Black and white 29 1 O
Counting white objects 2A 2 O
Number of registers 2B 2 O
Center point X 2C 2 O
Center point Y 2D 2 O

2. Results of the distance and angle measurement

Kind of output Output code No. of bytes
Distance 30 2
Angle 31 2
Coordinate X 32
Auxiliary 1 4
Angle 33
Coordinate Y 34
Auxiliary 2 4
Y slice length 35

3. Numeric calculation results

Kind of output Output code No. of bytes
MEASURE 0 CAMERA 1
MEASURE 0 CAMERA 2
MEASUREMENT 1
17
MEASUREMENT 2 40 4
MEASUREMENT 3
MEASUREMENT 4
Final calculation

17-17
 Computer Link

Chapter 18: Computer Link

A programmable controller (hereafter referred to as a PC) can be connected to the IV-S30J, so that the
computer link can be used to have the IV-S30J execute measurements.

18-1 Compatible models

The IV-S30J is applicable with the computer links for the following models of Sharp, Mitsubishi, OMRON,
and Yokogawa.
Sharp J-board - Host communication port in models Z-311J/312J
JW10 - Communication port in models JW-1324K/1342K/1424K/1442K/
1624K/1642K, MMI port
JW20H - Communication port in the JW-22CU
- JW-21CM (link module)
JW30H - Communication port of JW-32CUH/33CUH
- Communication port in models JW-32CUH1/33CUH1/33CUH2/33CUH3
- JW-21CM (link module)
JW50H/70H/100H
- Communication port in models JW-70CUH/100CUH
- JW-10CM (link module)
Mitsubishi AnA, AnN (AJ71C24-Sx)
A1S (A1SJ71C24)
A0J2 (A0J72C24-S1)
OMRON C1000H (C500-LK203)
C200H RS-232C (C200H-LK201)
C200H RS-422 (C200H-LK202)
CV1000 - CV CPU link port
- CV500-LK201
CVM1 - CV CPU link port
- CV500-LK201
Yokogawa F3SP21-0N
F3SP05-0P CPU for F3SC21-1N
F3SP08-0P CPU for F3SC22-1F/2F/1A
F3SP25-2N
F3SP28-3N
F3SP35-5N
F3SP38-6N
F3SP53-4H
F3SP58-6H
F3SP28-3S
F3SP38-6S
F3SP53-4S
F3SP58-6S
F3SP59-6S

18

18-1
 Computer Link

18-2 Data flow

Specify the CCD-TRIG (camera 1) or the PARALLEL (parallel interface) as the source of the MEAS INP
I/F (measurement start input) signal.
See Chapter 16 "Setting the Input/Output Conditions."
The data flow for a measurement start input (CCD trigger/parallel) signal and an object type change
command (parallel) is shown below.

IV-S30J
1 Enter measurement start signal.
CCD camera or PC
Measuring

(CCD trigger/parallel)

2 Write measurement data.

PC
3 Receive a completion response.
2,3: Computer link

The block of measurement data to be written from the IV-S30J to the PC, in step , can be specified on
the "OBJ-TYPE I/O" screen.
See page 16-23.

When a Sharp PC is connected

The IV-S30J sends write enable command (EWR) to the PC in the following cases.
- When the power is applied to the IV-S30J.
- When a Sharp PC is selected.
- When a write mode nonconformity error (code 10(H)) occurs after a result write command (WRG) is
transmitted (when the power is disconnected from the PC).

When a Mitsubishi, OMRON, or Yokogawa PC is connected

The data in items and are divided into packets for transmission.

18

18-2
 Computer Link

18-3 Register setting

Use PC register (writing: up to 512 bytes) to provide the IV-S30J with a computer link.
Setting item Applicable range of address
- Sharp: 09000 to 99776
Write register - Mitsubishi See page 16-22.
(up to 512 bytes) - OMRON: DM0000 to DM9999
- Yokogawa: D00001 to D16384
Enter the write start address in item " WRITE TOP ADRS," on the "COMPUTER LINK" screen, under
the "SELECT SYSTEM COND" screen.
Note 1: When a Sharp PC is used, specify an even address for the write start address.
Note 2: When 512 bytes are used for the write register in a Sharp PC, use one of the following write start
addresses.
09000, 19000, 29000, 39000, 49000, 59000, 69000, 79000, 89000, 99000
Write register map
The write register contains the following data.
Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON Yokogawa Contents
Termination code (00(H): normal termination, codes other
09000 L L L than 00(H) abnormal termination -See page 19-3.)
D0000 DM0000 D00001
09001 H H H Appended information (error code in an error response) *1
09002 L L L Object type number (0 to 63: 00 to 3F(H))
D0001 DM0001 D00002
09003 H H H Measurement number when outputting results (0 to 5) *2
09004 L L L
D0002 DM0002 D00003 Result output (Y0 to Y15) *3
09005 H H H
09006 L L L Measurement function 0 using camera 1
D0003 DM0003 D00004 *4
09007 H H H Measurement function 0 using camera 2
09010 L L L Measurement function 1
D0004 DM0004 D00005
09011 H H H Measurement function 2
09012 L L L Measurement function 3
*5
D0005 DM0005 D00006
09013 H H H Measurement function 4
09014 L L L Output data from measurement 0 camera 1 (block 0)
D0006 DM0006 D00007
09015 H H H    :

： L L L Output data from measurement 0 camera 2 (block 0)

： ： ：
： H H H    :

： L L L Output data from measurement 1 (block 0)

： ： ：
： H H H    :

： L L L Output data from measurement 2 (block 0) *6

： ： ：
： H H H    

： L L L Output data from measurement 3 (block 0)

： ： ：
： H H H    :
:
： L L L Output data from measurement 4 (block 0)
： ： ：
： H H H    :

19000 L L L Assigned block data

D0256 DM0256 D00257
19001 H H H ・
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ *7
・ ・ ・ ・ ・
・ ・ ・ ・ ・
18
*1 to *7 See the next page.
The register map shown above is established when the write start addresses have been set as shown
below.

Manufacturer Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON Yokogawa

Write start address 09000 D0000 DM0000 D00001

18-3
 Computer Link

*1 When the termination code is 08(H) (received an error response), the error code is contained in the
appended information. (Example: 0A(H) on a Sharp PC = parity error)
*2 Measurement number when outputting the results
00(H) = Measurement 0, Camera 1, 01(H) = Measurement 0, Camera 2, 02(H) = Measurement 1,
03(H) = Measurement 2, 04(H) = Measurement 3, 05(H) = Measurement 4
*3 Result output (Y0 to Y15)

H (09005) L (09004)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Y9 Y8 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

*4 Measurement program for measurement 0
00(H) = none, 01(H) = positional deviation measurement
*5 Measurement programs for measurements 1 to 4
00(H) = none, 01(H) = positional deviation measurement, 02(H) = degree of match inspection, 03(H) =
lead inspection, 05(H) = area measurement by binary conversion, 06(H) = object counting by binary
conversion, 07(H) = object identification by binary conversion, 08(H) = point measurement, 09(H) =
multiple position measurement, 0A(H) = multiple degree of match inspections
*6 Output data from measurements 0 to 4 (block 0)
The data output will vary according to whether "ANY" or "BLOCK-ASSIGN" was selected on the
SERIAL OUTPUT item. - Pages 16-23 to 16-27.
When a block is specified
- The measurement data from measurement numbers 0 to 4 in block 0 is output. (Max. 496 bytes).
- Measurement numbers that have not been specified will not output any data. (The space will be
filled by the next item. Max. 500 bytes.)
- See pages 18-6 to 18-13, for details about the measurement data in block 0.
When "ANY" is selected for the output
See page 18-16.
*7 Assigned block data
When the SERIAL OUTPUT item is set to "BLOCK-ASSIGN," the IV-S30J will output the
measurement result data in the specified block number. When the SERIAL OUTPUT item is set
to "ANY," the nature of the output will depend on the output settings.
For details about how to specify measurement output, see pages 16-23 and 16-25.
- No data is output if block 0 (00) is specified.
For details about the measurement data block, see pages 18-5 to 18-15.
- The top address where the specified block of data is written will be an address made by
adding 512 bytes to the top address for writing results.

Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON Yokogawa Contents

Top address 09000 L L L Termination code
D0000 DM0000 D00001
for writing 09001 H H H Appended information
results . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
. . L . L . L Output data from
. . . . .
measurement 4 (block 0)
. H H H
.
. . . .
.
. . . .
.
. . . .
18 Top address 19000
D0256
L
DM0256
L
D00256
L Assigned block data
for writing .
19001 H H H
results .
. . . . .
+ 512 bytes
. . . . .
. . . .

18-4
 Computer Link

18-4 Measurement data blocks

[1] Number of blocks
The measurement functions vary in the number of measurement data blocks they use.
Measurement function Blocks Page
Positional deviation measurement 0, 1 18-6
Degree of match inspection 0, 1
18-7
0, 1
Measurement program

Lead inspection
Area measurement by binary conversion 0
18-8
Object counting by binary conversion 0
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion 0 18-8 to 10
0, 1 (when binary
processing is selected)
Point measurement 18-11 to 12
0 to 4 (when average
density is selected)0 to 4
Multiple positional measurement 0 to 4
18-13
Multiple degree of match inspections 0 to 4
Distance and angle measurement 58 18-14
Numerical calculation 51 18-15

18

18-5
 Computer Link

[2] Contents of the measurement result block (for each measurement function)
(1) Positional deviation measurement

No. of Decimal point

Block Item Sign (+/-) bytes (digit)
1st point X None 2 1
(center coordinates) Y None 2 1
Registration 2nd point X None 2 1
0 No. 0 (center coordinates) Y None 2 1
Angular deviation Provided * 2 1
Registration The registration No. 1 to 7 contain the same data as the
No. 1 to 7 registration No. 0.
* When a sign is provided, if the highest-order bit of the data is ON (1), a "-" minus sign is used, and if
the bit is OFF (0), a "+" plus sign is used. The value (decimal) is expressed two's complement
notation. (A two's complement number is obtained by inverting the 0s and 1s in a binary number
and adding 1.)
Note: If a registration number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.

Example of the data in block 0: Only registration No. 0

0 8 2 0 0 5 2 8 0 F A 0 0 E B 0 F F 7 6
X Y X Y Angular
Center coordinates Center coordinates deviation
of 1st point of 2nd point
Registration No. 0

- These data are in hexadecimal. They are converted to the actual decimal measurements as shown
below.
Data Decimal Measurement
(hexadecimal) number result (value)
Center coordinates X 820 2080 208.0
of 1st point
Y 528 1320 132.0
Center coordinates X FA0 4000 400.0
of 2nd point Y EB0 3760 376.0
Angular deviation FF76 —138 —13.8

Block Item Sign (+/-) No. of Decimal point

bytes (digit)
Provided 2 None
Degree of 1st point
match 2nd point Provided 2 None
1st X Provided 2 1
Registration
No. 0 point Y 1
1 Deviation Provided 2
amount 2nd X Provided 2 1
point Y Provided 1
2
18
Registration The registration No. 1 to 7 contain the same data as the
No. 1 to 7 registration No. 0.

Note: If a registration number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.

18-6
 Computer Link

(2) Degree of match inspection

No. of Decimal
Block Item Sign (+/-) bytes point (digit)
Degree of 1st point Provided 2 None
Registration match
No. 0 (positioning) 2nd point Provided 2 None
0
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 15 No. 0.

No. of Decimal
Block Item Sign (+/-) bytes point (digit)
1st X None 2 1
point Y
None 2 1
Registration Coordinate X
2nd None 2 1
No. 0
point Y 2
None 1
1
Average 1st point None 2 1
light level 2nd point 2 1
None
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 15 No. 0.

(3) Lead inspection

No. of Decimal
Block Item Sign (+/-) bytes point (digit)
Registration Number 2 None
of None
0 No. 0 objects
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data
No. 1 to 15 as the registration No. 0.

No. of Decimal
Block Item Sign (+/-) bytes point (digit)
Maximum None 2 1
Minimum None 2 1
Distance
NG No. None 2 None
No. of NG None 2 None
Maximum None 2 1
Lead Minimum None 2 1
Registration
No. 0 width NG No. None 2 None
1
No. of NG None 2 None
Maximum None 2 1
Lead Minimum None 2 1
length NG No. None 2 None
No. of NG None 2 None 18
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the
No. 1 to 15 registration No. 0.

18-7
 Computer Link

(4) Area measurement by binary conversion

No. of Decimal
Block Item Sign (+/-) bytes point (digit)
Registration 4 None
Area None
0 No. 0
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data
No. 1 to 15 as the registration No. 0.

(5) Object counting by binary conversion

No. of Decimal
Block Item Sign (+/-) bytes point (digit)
Registration No of labels None 2 None
0 No. 0 Total area None 4 None
Registration Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as
No. 1 to 3 the registration No. 0.

(6) Object identification by binary conversion

Sign No. of Decimal
Block Item (+/0) bytes point (digit)
Registration No. of labels None 2 None
No. 0 Total area None 4 None
0 Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as the
Registration registration
No. 1 to 3 No. 0.
Area of each label None 4 None
X coordinate of None 2 1
gravity center
Y coordinate of None 2 1
gravity center
Label 0
10 Spindle axis angle Provided 2 1
Registration Fillet diameter X None 2 None
No. 0 Fillet diameter Y None 2 None
Peripheral None 4 1
Label 1 to 31
11 Label 32 to 63 Label No. 0 to 127 contain
the same
12 Label 64 to 95 data as the label No. 0.
13 Label 96 to 127
20 Label 0 to 31
Label No. 0 to 127 contain
21 Registration Label 32 to 63 the same
22 No. 1 Label 64 to 95 data as the label No. 0 of
block 10.
23 Label 96 to 127
30 Label 0 to 31
Label No. 0 to 127 contain
31 Registration Label 32 to 63 the same
32 No. 2 Label 64 to 95 data as the label No. 0 of
18 33 Label 96 to 127
block 10.

40 Label 0 to 31
Label No. 0 to 127 contain
41 Registration Label 32 to 63 the same
42 No. 3 Label 64 to 95 data as the label No. 0 of
block 10.
43 Label 96 to 127

To the next page

18-8
 Computer Link

Block Item Sign No. of Decimal point

(+/0) bytes (digit)
Label 0 4
60 Registration No. 0 label unit area to None to None
Label 127 4
61 Registration No. 1 label unit area Label 0 to 127
Each label contains the same
62 Registration No. 2 label unit area Label 0 to 127 data as block 60.
63 Registration No. 3 label unit area Label 0 to 127
X None 2 1
Label 0
Y None 2 1
64 Registration No. 0 gravity center to to
X None 2 1
Label 127
Y None 2 1
65 Registration No. 1 gravity center Label 0 to 127
Each label contains the same
66 Registration No. 2 gravity center Label 0 to 127
data as block 64.
66 Registration No. 3 gravity center Label 0 to 127
Registration No. 0 spindle angle Label 0 to 127 1B Provided 2 1
68
Registration No. 1 spindle angle Label 0 to 127 1B Provided 2 1
Registration No. 2 spindle angle Label 0 to 127 1B Provided 2 1
69
Registration No. 3 spindle angle Label 0 to 127 1B Provided 2 1
X None 2 None
Label 0
Y None 2 None
70 Registration No.0 fillet dia. to to
X None 2 None
Label 127
Y None 2 None
71 Registration No.1 fillet dia. Label 0 to 127
Each label contains the same
72 Registration No.2 fillet dia. Label 0 to 127 data as block 70.
73 Registration No.3 fillet dia. Label 0 to 127
74 Registration No.0 peripheral length Label 0 to 127 None 4 1
75 Registration No.1 peripheral length Label 0 to 127
76 Registration No.2 peripheral length Label 0 to 127 Each label contains the same
data as block 74.
77 Registration No.3 peripheral length Label 0 to 127
X None 2 None
Label 0
Y None 2 None
78 Registration No.0 center point to to
X None 2 None
Label 127
Y None 2 None
79 Registration No.1 center point Label 0 to 127
Each label contains the same
80 Registration No.2 center point Label 0 to 127 data as block 78.
81 Registration No.3 center point Label 0 to 127

18

18-9
 Computer Link

Block Item Sign No. of Decimal point

(+/0) bytes (digit)
Area of each label None 4 None
X coordinate of
gravity center None 2 1
Y coordinate of
gravity center None 2 1
Provide-
Label Spindle axis angle d 2 1
82 0
Fillet diameter X None 2 None
Registration No. 0 Fillet diameter Y None 2 None
Peripheral None 4 1
Center point X None 2 None
Center point Y None 2 None
Label 1 to 31
83 Label 32 to 63 Label No. 0 to 127 contains the
84 Label 64 to 95 same data as label No. 0.
85 Label 96 to 127
86 Label 0 to 31
Label No. 0 to 127 contains the
87 Label 32 to 63 same data as label No. 0 in
Registration No. 1 block 82.
88 Label 64 to 95
89 Label 96 to 127
90 Label 0 to 31
91 Label 32 to 63 Label No. 0 to 127 contains the
Registration No. 2 same data as label No. 0 in
92 Label 64 to 95 block 82.
93 Label 96 to 127
94 Label 0 to 31
95 Label 32 to 63 Label No. 0 to 127 contains the
Registration No. 3 same data as label No. 0 in
96 Label 64 to 95 block 82.
97 Label 96 to 127

18

18-10
 Computer Link

(7) Point measurement

1. In the binary mode
Sign No. of Decimal
Block Item (+/0) bytes point (digit)
Registration Black and white 0 = black
None 2 None
No. 0 to 15 information 1 = white
Registration Black and white 0 = black
None 2 None
No. 16 to 31 information 1 = white
0
: : :
Registration Black and white 0 = black
No. 240 to None 2 None
information 1 = white
255
Evaluation 0 = NG
None 1 None
Registration information 1 = OK
No. 0 to 7 Black and white 0 = black
None 1 None
information 1 = white
Evaluation 0 = NG
None 1 None
Registration information 1 = OK
No. 8 to 15 Black and white 0 = black
1 None 1 None
information 1 = white

: : :
Evaluation 0 = NG
None 1 None
Registration information 1 = OK
No. 248 to 255 Black and white 0 = black
None 1 None
information 1 = white

Note: If a point number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.
- When an item does not have data in 2 byte units, the data will be increment (scrolled up) in units of
two bytes.

[Ex.] When "NO" data is registered at memory locations 16 to 31, the data at memory locations 32
and on are moved down to locations 16 and on.

Data example: Only point No. 0 to 7 in block 0

Data Contents

FA F A

White/black 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
White/ FA (H) Point No. P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0
information
black White/black White White White White White Black White Black
information
0: black, 1: white

18

18-11
 Computer Link

2. In the average light level mode

Data Sign No. of Decimal
Block Item code (+/0) bytes point (digit)
Registration
No. 0 Average densigy 20 None 2 None
0
Registration Registration No. 1 to 31 contain the same data as
No. 1 to 31 registration No. 0.
Registration Average densigy 20 None 2 None
No. 32
1
Registration Registration No. 33 to 63 contain the same data as
No. 33 to 63 registration No. 0.
Registration Average densigy 20 None 2 None
No. 64
2
Registration Registration No. 65 to 95 contain the same data as
No. 65 to 95 registration No. 0.
Registration Average densigy 20 None 2 None
No. 96
3
Registration Registration No. 97 to 127 contain the same data as
No. 97 to 127 registration No. 0.
Registration Evaluation 0=NG
No. 0 to 15 information 1=OK None 2 None
Registration Evaluation 0=NG None 2 None
4 No. 16 to 31 information 1=OK
: : :
Registration Evaluation 0=NG None 2 None
No. 112 to 127 information 1=OK
Note: If a point number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.

18

18-12
 Computer Link

(8) Multiple positional measurement

Sign No. of Decimal
Block Item (+/0) bytes point
(digit)
Registration Number of objects detected None 2 None
No. 0
0
Registration Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as
No.1 to 3 registration No. 0.

Sign No. of Decimal

Block Item (+/0) bytes point (digit)
Degree
of match None 2 None
Coodin- None
Detection 0 2 None
ate X
Registration Coodin- None
1 2 None
No. 0 ate Y
Average light level 1 (total None 2 None
of light level difference)*
Detection Details about detected objects 1 to 127
1 to 127 are the same as for object 0.
Registration
2 No. 1
Registration Details about detected objects 2 to 4 are the same as for
3
No. 2 object 1(register No. 0).
Registration
4 No. 3

(9) Multiple degree of match inspections

Sign No. of Decimal
Block Item (+/0) bytes point
(digit)
Registration Number of objects detected None 2 None
No. 0
0
Registration Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as
No.1 to 3 registration No. 0.

Sign No. of Decimal

Block Item (+/0) bytes point (digit)
Degree
of match None 2 None
Coodin- None
Detection 0 2 None
ate X
Registration Coodin- None
1 2 None
No. 0 ate Y
Average light level 1 (total None 2 None
of light level difference)*
Detection Details about detected objects 1 to 127
1 to 127 are the same as for object 0.
Registration
2 No. 1
Registration Details about detected objects 2 to 4 are the same as for
3 No. 2 object 1(register No. 0).
Registration
4 No. 3
18
* When light level matching is executed, the total difference in light level is output.

18-13
 Computer Link

(10) Distance and angle measurement

Block Item Data No. of Decimal

code Sign (+/0) bytes point (digit)
Distance 30 Provided 2 1
Angle 31 Provided 2 1
Auxiliary 1
Registration (coordinate X 32/33 Provided 4 Float
Measurement 0 No. 0 /angle)
Camera1 Auxiliary 2
(coordinate Y 34/35 Provided 4 Float
/Y slice length)
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as
58 No. 1 to 15 registration No. 0.
Measurement 0 Registration Registration No. 0 to 15 contain the same data as
Camera 2 No. 0 to 15 measurement 0, camera 1.
Registration Registration No. 0 to 15 contain the same data as
Measurement 1 No. 0 to 15 measurement 0, camera 1.
Measurement 2 Registration Registration No. 0 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 0 to 15 measurement 0, camera 1.
Measurement 3 Registration Registration No. 0 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 0 to 15 measurement 0, camera 1.
Measurement 4 Registration Registration No. 0 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 0 to 15 measurement 0, camera 1.
Note: Blank items are omitted and the remaining lines are moved up.

18

18-14
 Computer Link

(11) Numerical calculation

Data No. of Decimal
Block Item code Sign (+/0) bytes point (digit)
Registration Calculation
No. 0 result 40 Provided 4 2
Measurement 0
Camera1 Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 1 to 15 registration No. 0.
Registration Calculation
No. 0 result 41 Provided 4 2
Measurement 0
Camera 2 Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 1 to 15 registration No. 0.
Registration Calculation
No. 0 result 42 Provided 4 2
Measurement 1
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 1 to 15 registration No. 0.
Registration Calculation 43 Provided 4 2
No. 0 result
51 Measurement 2
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 1 to 15 registration No. 0.
Registration Calculation 44 Provided 4 2
No. 0 result
Measurement 3
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 1 to 15 registration No. 0.
Registration Calculation 45 Provided 4 2
No. 0 result
Measurement 4
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 1 to 15 registration No. 0.
Registration Calculation 48 Provided 4 2
Final No. 0 result
measurement Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as
No. 1 to 15 registration No. 0.
Note: Blank items are omitted and the remaining lines are moved up.

18

18-15
 Computer Link

18-5 Specifications for any output data

When the serial output is set to "ANY" (page 16-26), the measurement results for the output data that
is set to "YES" will be written into the write register map "output data from measurements 0 to 4 (block
0): *6 on page 18-3," in output-code order.
Measurement Output Registration
Degree of match for register number 0
Output code 01 Degree of match for register number 1
(degree of match) to
Degree of match for register number 7
Coordinate X for register number 0
Output code 02 Coordinate X for register number 1
Measurement 0
(coordinate X) to
Camera1
Coordinate X for register number 7
to to
Numeric calculation result for register number 0
Output code 40
Numeric calculation result for register number 1
(numeric
to
calculation)
Numeric calculation result for register number 15
Measurement 0 The details of the output codes and register numbers are the same as
Camera2 for "MEASUREMENT 0, CAMERA1"
The details of the output codes and register numbers are the same as
Measurement 1
for "MEASUREMENT 0, CAMERA1"
The details of the output codes and register numbers are the same as
Measurement 2
for "MEASUREMENT 0, CAMERA1"
The details of the output codes and register numbers are the same as
Measurement 3
for "MEASUREMENT 0, CAMERA1"
The details of the output codes and register numbers are the same as
Measurement 4
for "MEASUREMENT 0, CAMERA1"

- Data that are set to "NO" output do not output any signal (scrolled up).
- Set the next page for details about the output codes (type, number of bytes, related measurement
programs)

Ex.: Output data examples when the "SERIAL OUTPUT" column is set to "YES."
Measurement item
Output when SERIAL
SHARP Mitsubishi OMRON Details
data OUTPUT is set to
"YES"
09014 L L 00 0100(H): 00 = fixed value
D0006 DM0006
09015 H H 01 01 = output code (degree of match)
09016 L L 78
D0007 DM0007 2678(H): 9848(D) = 98.48% Register 0 (degree of
09017 H H 26
09020 L L 00 0200(H): 00 = fixed value match, coordinate X,
D0008 DM0008 coordinate Y
09021 H H 02 02 = output code (X coordinate)
deviation) for
09022 L L 92
D0009 DM0009 0992(H): 2450(D) = 245.0 (coordinate value) measurement 1
09023 H H 09 (position deviation
09024 L L 00 0005(H): 00 = fixed value,05 = output code measurement)
D0010 DM0010
09025 H H 05 (coordinate Y deviation)
09026 L L FA
D00011 DM00011 00FA(H): 250(D) = 25.0 (deviation value)
09027 H H 00
09030 L L 01 Register 0 (degree of
18 09031
D00012
H
DM00012
H 00
0001(H): 00 = fixed value
01 = output code (degree of match) match) for
measurement 3
09032 L L 28 (degree of match
D00013 DM00013 2628(H): 9752(D) = 97.52%
09033 H H 26 inspection)

18-16
 Computer Link

Codes and number of bytes of output data

1. Result of each measurement program
Output data Measurement program

Object counting by binary

Multiple degree of match

Positional deviation

Area measure-ment

Multiple positions
Degree of match

cation by binary
Object identifi-
measurement

measurement

measurement

inspections
conversion

conversion

conversion
inspection

inspection

by binary
Output

No. of
bytes

Point
Lead
code
Kind of output

Degree of match 01 2 O O
Coordinate X 02 2 O O
Coordinate Y 03 2 O O
Coordinate deviation X 04 2 O
Coordinate deviation Y 05 2 O
Angle 06 2 O
Average light level 1 07 2 O
Number of object 08 2 O O O O O
MAX. 09 2 O
Distance
MIN. 0A 2 O
MAX. 0B 2 O
Lead width
MIN. 0C 2 O
Lead length/ MAX. 0D 2 O
lead width 2 MIN. 0E 2
Total area 10 4 O O O
CUR. 11 O
Area of each
MAX. 12 4
label
MIN. 13
X coordinate CTR. OF 14 O
of gravity GRAVITY
center/Distan- MAX. 15 2
ce between DIST.
gravity MIN.
centers X 16
DIST.
Y coordinate CTR. OF 17 O
of gravity GRAVITY
center/Distan- MAX. 18 2
ce between DIST.
gravity MIN.
centers Y 19
DIST.
CUR. 1A O
Fillet diameter MAX. 1B 2
X
MIN. 1C
CUR. 1D O
Fillet diameter MAX. 1E 2
Y
MIN. 1F

18

18-17
 Computer Link

Output data Measurement program

match inspections
Multiple degree of
Multiple positions
Degree of match

cation by binary
Object counting
ment by binary

Object identifi-
Area measure-
measurement

measurement

measurement
conversion

conversion

conversion
inspection

inspection
Positional
deviation

by binary
Output

No. of
bytes
code

Lead

Point
Kind of output

Main axis angle 20 2 O

Perimeter 21 4 O
Degree of match 22 2 O O
Coordinate X 23 2 O O
Coordinate Y 24 2 O O
Average light level 1 (total 25 2 O
of light level differences)
Average light level 2 28 1 O
Black and white 29 1 O
Counting white objects 2A 2 O
Number of registers 2B 2 O
Center point X 2C 2 O
Center point Y 2D 2 O

2. Results of distance and angle measurement

Kind of output Output code No. of bytes
Distance 30 2
Angle 31 2
Coordinate X 32
Auxiliary 1 4
Angle 33
Coordinate X 34
Auxiliary 2 4
Y slice length 35

3. Results of numerical calculations

Kind of output Output code No. of bytes
MEASURE 0 CAMERA 1
MEASURE 0 CAMERA 2
MEASUREMENT 1
MEASUREMENT 2 40 4
MEASUREMENT 3
MEASUREMENT 4
Final calculation

18

18-18
 Computer Link

18-6 Interface
The interface between the IV-S30J and a programmable controller from each manufacturer is
described below.

Programmable
IV-S30J
controller

Settings for the IV-S30J Sharp [2]

See item [1] below. Mitsubishi [3]
OMRON [4]
Yokogawa

[1] Setting items for the IV-S30J

Item Setting details
Communication speed(k bit/sec) 115.2, 57.6, 38.4, 19.2, 9.6, 4.8, 2.4
Data length (bit) 7, 8
Parity None, odd, even
Stop bit 1, 2
Error check Checksum
Sharp: 00 to 37(8)
Mitsubishi: 00 to 31
Station No.
OMRON: 00 to 31
Yokogawa: 01 to 32
Sharp: 09000 to 99776
Write address Mitsubishi: D0000 to D9999
(up to 512 bytes) OMRON: DM0000 to DM9999
Yokogawa: D00001 to D16384

18

18-19
 Computer Link

[2] Connection with a Sharp PC

Applicable models
1. Control module: JW-22CU (can be used with ROM version 2.2 or later)
JW-70CUH/100CUH, JW-32CUH/33CUH
JW-32CUH1/33CUH1/33CUH2/33CUH3
2. Basic module: JW-1324K/1342K/1424K/1442K/1624K/1642K
3. CPU board: Z-311J/312J
4. Link module: JW-21CM, JW-10CM
5. Communication board: Z-331J/332J

(1) Module setting

When a JW-22CU or a JW-70CUH/100CUH and Z-311J/312J are used
Store the communication port conditions in system memory addresses #236 and #237.
Bits D0 to D5 are stored in memory address #236.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#236

Data D5 Stop D4 D3 Parity D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)

7 bits, 0 1 bit 0 0 None 0 0 1 9.6
fixed 1 2 bits 0 1 Odd 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 Even

#237 Station No. (001 to 037(8))

Enter the station No. for the current station.

In the initial state, addresses #236 and #237 are set to 000.

When a JW-32CUH/33CUH or a JW-32CUH/33CUH1/33CUH2/33CUH3 is used

1. When communication port 1 (PG/COMM1 port) is used
Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses #234 and #235. Set bits D0 to
D5 in memory address #234. Only an RS-422 cable can be connected to the PG/COMM1 port.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#234

Data D5 Stop D4 D3 Parity D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)

7 bits, 0 1 bit 0 0 None 0 0 1 9.6
fixed 1 2 bits 0 1 Odd 0 0 0 19.2
18 1 0 Even 1 1 1 38.4
1 1 0 57.6 *
1 0 1 115.2
* Applicable only to
the JW-32CUH1/33CUH1/33CUH2/33CUH3
#235 Station No. (001 to 037(8))

Enter the station No. for the current station.

In the initial state, addresses #234 and #235 are set to 000.

18-20
 Computer Link

2. When communication port 2 (PG/COMM2 port) is used.

Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses #222, #236 and #237. Either
RS-232 or RS-422 cable can be connected to the PG/COMM2 port.

#222 Communication method for the PG/COMM2 port (00(H))

Set to 00(H).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#236 Set bits D0 to D5 in memory address #236.

Data D5 Stop D4 D3 Parity D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)

7 bits, 0 1 bit 0 0 None 0 0 1 9.6
fixed 1 2 bits 0 1 Odd 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 Even 1 1 1 38.4
1 1 0 57.6 *
1 0 1 115.2
* Applicable only to
the JW-32CUH1/33CUH1/33CUH2/33CUH3
#237 Station No. (001 to 037(8))

Enter the station No. for the current station.

In the initial state, addresses #222, #236 and #237 are set to 000.

When a JW-1324K/1342K/1424K/1442K/1624K/1642K is used

1. When the communication port is used
Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses #234, #236 and #237.

#234 Communication mode for the communication port (00(H))

Set to 00(H) (computer link).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#236 Set bits D0 to D5 and D7 in memory address #236.

D7 Data D5 Stop D4 D3 Parity D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)

0 7 bits 0 1 bit 0 0 None 0 0 1 9.6
1 8 bits 1 2 bits 0 1 Odd 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 Even 1 1 1 38.4

#237 Station No. (001 to 037(8))

Enter the station No. for the current station.

18
In the initial state, addresses #234, #236 and #237 are set to 000.

18-21
 Computer Link

2. When the MMI port is used

Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses #226 and #227. Set bits D0 to
D5 in memory address #226.
Use of the MMI port ensures a one-to-one connection between the IV-S30J and the JW10.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#226

D7 Data D5 Stop D4 D3 Parity D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)

0 7 bits 0 1 bit 0 0 None 0 0 1 9.6
1 8 bits 1 2 bits 0 1 Odd 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 Even 1 1 1 38.4
1 1 Invalid

#227 Station No. (001(8))

Set to (001(8))

In the initial state, addresses #226 and #227 are set to 000.
When a JW-21CM or JW-10CM is used
Set the switches (SW0 to SW4 and SW7) on the module as shown below.
Switch Setting Set value
SW0 Command mode 4
SW1 Station No. (upper bit)
01 to 37(8)
SW2 Station No. (lower bit)
SW3-1 Invalid OFF
SW3-2 4-wire system ON
SW3-3 Invalid OFF
SW3-4 Odd parity (OFF), even parity (ON) OFF or ON OFF or ON
SW4 Transmission speed (k bit/sec) 19.2 (0) or 9.6 (1) 0 or 1
SW7 With a termination resistance ON

When a Z-331J/332J is used

Set the switches (SW0 to SW4 and SW7) on the board as shown below.
Switch Setting Set value
SW0 Computer link 4
SW1 Station No. (upper bit)
01 to 37(8)
SW2 Station No. (lower bit)
SW3-1 Invalid OFF
SW3-2 Only the 2-wire system can be used. OFF
SW3-3 Invalid OFF
SW3-4 Odd parity (OFF), even parity (ON) OFF or ON
SW4 Transmission speed (k bit/sec) 19.2 (0), 9.6 (1) 0 or 1
18 SW7 With a termination resistance ON

(2) Using memory

To allow the memory to be used by the IV-S30J, enter a result write start address in the following
range.
Memory Range (address)
Register 09000 to 99776

18-22
 Computer Link

(3) Connections
When a JW-22CU or JW-70CUH/100CUH is used
1. Communication through the RS-232C port JW-22CU
Communication connector on JW-70CUH/100CUH
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) (Communication port)
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
Connector
shield FG 1 FG
3 SD 3 RD
2 RD 2 SD
5 SG 7 SG
12 Short-circuit
14 terminal
15 m or less
RS-232C
2. Communication through the RS-422 port (4-wire system) JW-22CU
Communication connector on JW-70CUH/100CUH
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) (Communication port)
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
4 TA 12 RD (+)
7 TB 13 RD (-)
8 RA 10 SD (+)
9 RB 11 SD (-)
Connector
shield FG 1 FG
Shielded, twisted-pair cable

1 km or less
RS-422
When a JW-32CUH/33CUH or JW-32CUH1/33CUH1/33CUH2/33CUH3 is used
1. Communication through the RS-232C port
JW-32CUH/33CUH
JW-32CUH1/33CUH1
Communication connector on /33CUH2/33CUH3
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) (PG/COMM2 port)
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
Connector
shield FG 1 FG
3 SD 4 RD
2 RD 2 SD
5 SG 7 SG

15 m or less
RS-232C
2. Communication through the RS-422 port (4-wire system)
JW-32CUH/33CUH
JW-32CUH1/33CUH1
/33CUH2/33CUH3
Communication connector on PG/COMM1 port
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) PG/COMM2 port
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
4 TA 9 RD (+)
7 TB 10 RD (-) 18
8 RA 3 SD (+)
9 RB 11 SD (-)
Connector
shield FG 1 FG
Shielded, twisted-pair cable

1 km or less
RS-422

18-23
 Computer Link

When a JW-1324K/1342K/1424K/1442K/1624K/1642K is used

The IV-S30J can only be connected to the RS-422 port. When the communication port is used,
provide a 2-wire RS-422 system. When the MMI port is used, provide a 4-wire RS-422 system.
1. When the communication port is used
JW-1324K/1342K/1424K
Communication connector on /1442K/1624K/1642K
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) (Communication port)
Pin No. Signal name Terminal name
4 TA
L1
8 RA
7 TB
L2
9 RB
Connector
shield FG SHLD
Shielded, twisted-pair cable

1 km or less
RS-422 (2-wire system)
2. When the MMI port is used
JW-1324K/1342K/1424K
Communication connector on /1442K/1624K/1642K
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) (MMI port)
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
4 TA 2 RX
7 TB 7 ／RX
8 RA 3 TX
9 RB 8 ／TX
Connector
shield FG 4 PG／COM
5 GND
Shielded, twisted-pair cable

1 km or less
RS-422 (4-wire system)
When a Z-311J/312J is used
1. Communication through the RS-232C port
Communication connector on Z-311J/312J
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) (Communication port CN3)
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
Connector
shield FG 1 FG
3 SD 3 RDc
2 RD 2 TDc
5 SG 7 GND
6 Short-circuit
terminal
8
15m or less
RS-232C
2. Communication through the RS-422 port (4-wire system)
Communication connector on Z-311J/312J
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) (Terminal block TC1)
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
4 TA 3 RD
18 7 TB 4 /RD
8 RA 1 TD
9 RB 2 /TD
Connector
shield FG 5 FG
Shielded, twisted-pair cable

1 km or less
RS-422

18-24
 Computer Link

When a JW-21CM or JW-10CM is used

- Communication through the RS-422 port (4-wire system)
Communication connector on JW-21CM
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) JW-10CM
Pin No. Signal name Signal name
4 TA L3
7 TB L4
8 RA L1
9 RB L2
Connector
shield FG SHIELD
GND
Ground
Shielded, twisted-pair cable

1 km or less
RS-422 (4-wire system)

When a Z-331J/332J is used

- Communication through the RS-422 port (2-wire system)

Communication connector on Z-331J/332J

the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) (Host communication port T1)
Pin No. Signal name Terminal name
4 TA
L1
8 RA
7 TB
L2
9 RB
Connector
shield FG S
FG
Shielded, twisted-pair cable

1 km or less
RS-422 (2-wire system)

18

18-25
 Computer Link

[3] Connection with a Mitsubishi PC

Applicable models
A series computer link modules
1. AJ71C24-Sx (AnA or AnN)
In the case of the AnA, a computer link can be created if a CPU from the AnA series is used
and the link module version is S6 or later.
2. A1SJ71C24(A1S)
When the A1SJ71C24-R2 is used, the station number is fixed at 00 because it does not have
a station number switch.
3. A0J72C24S1(A0J2)

(1) Module setting

Example using an AJ71C24-Sx module

Item Description
Transmission control procedure mode
Format 1fi 1
(RS-232C)
Station No. 00 to 31
Transmission speed (kbit/sec) 19.2, 9.6
Parity None, odd, even
Data bit 7/8 bits (ASCII)
Transmission code
Stop bit 1, 2 bits
Checksum Executed
Writing while running Possible

Switch setting
Ex.: To set as shown below:
Mode: RS-232C, Station No.: 00, Transmission speed: 19.2 K bytes/sec.
Parity: Even, Data bit: 7 bits, Stop bit: 2 bits

- 3 rotary DIP switches

STATION No. STATION No. MODE

× 10 ×1
B C D B C D B C D
A E A E A E
9 F 9 F 9 F
8 0 8 0 8 0
7 1 7 1 7 1
6 2 6 2 6 2
5 4 3 5 4 3 5 4 3

- DIP switches

SW11 to 13 SW14 to 24
OFF ON
18

18-26
 Computer Link

Example using an A1SJ71UC24-R4 module

Switch setting
Ex.: To set as below:
Mode: RS-422, Transmission speed: 19.2 K bytes/sec.
Parity: Even, Stop bit: 2 bits

SW ON OFF STATION No.

01 7 8
02 6 9
03 5 0 ×10
04 4 1
3 2
05 7 8
06 6 9
07 5 0 ×1
08 4 1
3 2
09
CD
10 AB E
9 F
11 8 0 MODE
7 1
12 65 2
43

(2) Using memory

To allow the memory to be used by the IV-S30J, use a result write start address within the following
range.
Memory Range (address)
D (data register) 0 to 9999/0 to 999900

Note: To write data from the IV-S30J to a Mitsubishi PC, use the WW/QW write command. The
range that can be written using the write command WW/QW is D0000 to D1023/D000000 to
D008191, due to the limitation of Mitsubishi PCs. The write all address can be set within the
range of limitation for Mitsubishi PCs.
See page 16-22.

18

18-27
 Computer Link

(3) Connections
Shown below are the connections with a calculator link module.
Example of RS-232C connection
Calculator link module
Communication connector on In case of 25 In case of 9
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) pins connector pins connector
Signal Shielded cable Signal
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. name
name
Connector
shield FG FG 1 FG
2 RD 2 3 SD
3 SD 3 2 RD
4 7 RS
5 8 CS
20 4 DTR
6 6 DSR
5 SG 7 5 SG

15m or less
RS-232C

Note: Jumper the RS, CS, DR and CD lines.

Do not jumper the SG.

Remarks

- For RS-232C communications, create the sequence program shown below in order to set "no
CD terminal check" for the CD terminal check setting. For details, see the instruction manual
for Mitsubishi’s calculator link module.

Xn7

TOP n1 H10B K1 K1

Example of RS-422 communication

Communication connector
on the IV-S30J Calculator link
(RS232C/RS422) Shielded, twisted-pair cable module
Pin No. Signal name Signal name
Connector
shield FG FG
4 TA RDA
7 TB RDB
18 8 RA SDA
9 RB SDB
5 SG SG
1 km max.
RS-422 (4-wire system)

18-28
 Computer Link

[4] Connection with an OMRON PC

Applicable models

Host link modules

1. C500-LK203 (C1000H) 4. CV CPU link port (CV1000, CVM1)
2. C200-LK201 (C200H RS-232C) 5. CV500-LK201 (CV1000, CVM1)
3. C200-LK202 (C200H RS-422) 6. CS1W-SCU21

Remarks

- Start the OMRON PC in the monitor mode when turning ON the power. If the OMRON PC is
started in any other mode, a computer link error will occur.
The operation mode is specified using the following items for each support tool: The initial mode
setting switch on the memory module, or the monitor mode rising bits of the system setting
(FUN49) instruction.

Memory module initial setting switch

OFF
Installed support tool The bit used to set the monitor
mode in the system setting ON
(FUN49) instruction
0 1 *1
Support tools other than the
Program mode Monitor mode Operation mode
programming console
No support tool Operation mode Monitor mode Operation mode
Programming console Programming console setting mode *2
*1 Insert the ladder program step shown below at address 000000.
AR1001
00000 FUN49
 #A302
  000
  000
*2 When the programming console is used, set the PC to the "monitor mode"
using the switch.
For details, see the user’s manual for the OMRON PLC module.

(1) Module setting

Item Description
Module No. 00 to 31*
Transmission speed (k bit/sec) 19.2, 9.6
Command level 1
Parity Odd or even
Dat a         
bit 7 (ASCII)
Transmission code
Stop bit 2
1:1/1:N procedure 1:N procedure
18
Synchronous change-over switch Internal synchronization
CTS change-over switch 0 V (normally ON)
5 V supply switch OFF

* Enter the unit number of the IV-S30J, as a component of CV500-LK201 system. When
communication port 1 is used, the unit number is fixed at 00, and when communication port 2 is
used, any number (00 to 31) can be used.

18-29
 Computer Link

(2) Using memory

To allow the memory to be used by the IV-S30J, enter a result write start address within the following
setting range.
Memory Range (address)
DM (data register) 0 to 9999

Note: The IV-S30J uses [DM area write] command of C mode command. Concerning the limitation
of address settings, see OMRON's PC manual.

(3) Connections
Example of RS-232C communication

C500-LK203
C200-LK201 CV500-LK201
CV500-LK201 (Communication port 2)
(Communication port 1) CV CPU module
Communication connector on
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422)
Signal Shielded cable Signal
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. name
name
Connector Connector
shield FG 1 hood FG
2 RD 2 2 SD
3 SD 3 3 RD
4 4 RS
5 5 CS
5 SG 7 9 SG

15m or less
RS-232C

Example of RS-422 communication

Communication connector on
the IV-S30J (RS232C/RS422) Calculator link
Shielded, twisted-pair cable module
Pin No. Signal name
Signal name
Connector
shield FG FG
4 TA RDB(SD+)
7 TB RDA(SD-)
8 RA SDB(RD+)
9 RB SDA(RD-)
RS
CS
1 km max. Pin numbers vary with
RS-422 (4-line system) the module to be used

18

18-30
 Computer Link

18-7 Program examples

An example of measurements using the IV-S30J and a Sharp PC (JW70H) (2-point search for
positional deviation measurement) is explained below, using data flow, a flowchart and a timing chart.
Input terminal

IV-S30J main housing

IV-S30J

Sharp’s PC (JW70H) (plan view)

INPUT POWER POWER
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 C(＋) ＋24V 0V

Communication
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 READY C(−)

Output module
OUTPUT

port

VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2 RS232C/RS422 REMOTE

▼ ▼

IV-S30J main housing

(side view)

Camera 1 Communication connector

(RS232C/RS422)

(1) Data flow Camera 1 connector

Sharp PC (JW70H) IV-S30J

Execution of measurement
1 Output a start signal.
Output relay Description
00040 Start output
2 Write data into the register.
Write
Data (H) Description
register
*1 09000 00 Termination code (normal termination) 3 Transmit completion
09001 - response.
09002 01 Object type No. (1)
09003 -
09004 01 Result output Y0 to Y15
09005 00 (Only Y0 is OK.)
Measurement 0 using camera 1:
09006 01
Positional deviation measurement
Measurement function of
09007 00
measurement 0 using camera 2 (none)
Measurement function of
09010 00
measurement 1 (none)
Measurement function of * In this example, the write start
09011 00
measurement 2 (none) address has been set to 09000.
Measurement function of
09012 00
measurement3 (none)
Measurement function of
09013 00
measurement4 (none)
09014 40
X 1st point
09015 06
(center
09016 E0
Y coordinates) Output data
09017 06 from
09020 98 measurem-
X 2nd point
09021 0D ent 1 using
(center
09022 90
Y
camera
coordinates) 1(block 1) 18
09023 06
09024 00
Angular deviation
09025 00

Note 1: The PC must be write enabled. A Mitsubishi, OMRON, or Yokogawa PC will operate in the
same manner, but use different PC register and relay addresses.
Note 2: If the PC has not been connected to the object type input (parallel) on the IV-S30J, the object
type No. is set to 0. To set different types, first enter the object type numbers (parallel) using
the type input terminals on the IV-S30J.
18-31
 Computer Link

(2) Flow chart

Power ON

N
15 second interval
Y

Camera
starts operation N
(00040 = ON)

Y
Starting the time-out detection timer

Y
Time-out

Y
Normal termination

N
* Transferring the result
output (Y0 to Y15)
from registers 09004 N
and 09005 to Error occurs.
addresses ]0412 and
]0413 Y

Turning ON relay
00010 Turning ON relay 00013

Outputting Y0
Error recovery N
(00041 = ON)

Outputting Y1 Y

18

18-32
 Computer Link

(3) Program

07377 TMR
0050
1
000

00040 00000
2

T000 00000 F-044 04100 00006 00007

[ 3

00007
F-008
377
4
OCT 09000

00007 04100 04101 TMR

0030
5
001

T001 04107
6

00007 Fc012
09000
7
CMP 000

07357 04100
8

07354 07357 Fc012

09000
9
CMP 377

07356 04101
10

04100 F-000w
09004
11
XFER ]0412

04100 00040 00010

12
00010

04120 00040 00011

13
00011

04121 00040 00012

14
00012

04101 00041 00013

15
04107

00013

04101 00041 00006

16
04107

18

18-33
 Computer Link

Explanation of the program

The numbers 1 to 16 below correspond to the same numbers on the preceding page.
1. Turn on the power, and wait for 5 sec. (07377 is kept ON for only 1 scan after the power is turned
ON.)
2. The camera is started. (00040 enters a measurement trigger.)
3. The trigger input (00007) is self-latched when the operation start has begin (00000 = ON).
4. The termination code of the write register is cleared.
5. The time-out detection timer monitoring the computer link is started.
6. Time-out error
7. A check is made for normal termination.
8. Normal termination (09000 = 000(8))
9. A check is made for errors.
10. Occurrence of an error (09000 = 001 to 376(8))
11. The data in the result output relays Y0 to Y15 (16 points) on the IV-S30J is transferred from
registers 09004 to 09005 to addresses ]0412 and ]0413.
12. A normal termination signal is output.
13. The judgment (OK/NG) of the result output relay Y0 is output.
14. The judgment (OK/NG) of the result output relay Y1 is output.
15. When a time-out or an error occurs, it is output.
16. When a time-out or an error occurs, it is reset.

(4) Timing chart

1 scan time

Operation start 00040

Start signal input 00007

Execution of Data writing
measurement IV-S30J - JW70H
Operation of the IV-S30J
through a computer link

Normal termination
04100
OK
Y0, Y1

Error output 00013

18

18-34
 Troubleshooting

Chapter 19: Troubleshooting

Item [1] shows problems which may occur when the IV-S30J measurement system is started. If any error
(the termination code is not 00 (H)) occurs during image processing on the IV-S30J, take the steps
described in item [2].
Perform the recommended daily inspection following the maintenance procedures listed in item [3].
[1] Symptoms and checks
The following symptoms may not be malfunctions. Before asking us to repair your equipment, check the
recommended parts.

Phenomenon Checks
1. Make sure that the power cord has been connected properly
The power is not turned ON. to the DC power terminal block on the IV-S30J.
(The power lamp on the IV-
S30J does not light.) 2. Make sure that the proper supply voltage is available and has
not dropped.
After the power is first turned 1. Make sure that the monitor cable has been connected
ON, no images or characters correctly.
are displayed on the monitor. 2. Make sure that the offset and gain are adjusted properly.
After the power is first turned 1. Make sure that the message display and pattern display
ON, no characters are modes are not set to the non-display mode. Make sure that
displayed on the monitor. the title field is not filled with spaces.
1. The operation screen is always displayed in the freeze mode.
Change the mode to the through mode on the lower menu
section.*
2. Make sure that the lens iris is not closed.
After the power is first turned
ON, no image is displayed on 3. Make sure that the shutter speed has not been increased.
the monitor, or the image on 4. Check the lens for contamination.
the display is abnormal. 5. Check the CCD light receiving surface for contamination.
6. Make sure that the lens focus has been adjusted properly.
7. Make sure that the lighting equipment is providing adequate
illumination.
1. Make sure that the monitor screen is not too bright or dark.
The background is completely
(Changes in brightness cannot be sensed.)
white (or black) even after the
- Adjust the lens aperture or the illumination of the light
shutter speed is changed.
source.
Operations cannot be carried 1. Make sure that the remote key pad cable has been correctly
out using the remote key pad. connected to the IV-S30J.
1. Make sure that the communication cable has been correctly
connected.
2. Make sure that each terminal of the communication cable is
properly connected.
3. Make sure that the communication conditions (standard,
General purpose serial speed, and parity check) in the personal computer conform to
communications cannot be those of the IV-S30J.
performed. 4. Check the cable for disconnection and the connectors for
contact failure.
5. Make sure that you waited about 15 seconds after you turned
ON the power.

6.
Make sure that the operation screen is displayed on the 19
screen.

* You can change to the through mode screen using the "TYPE
RUN COND" screen.
- Continued on the following page -

19-1
 Troubleshooting

Phenomenon Checks
1. Make sure that the communication cable has been correctly
connected.
2. Make sure that the communication cable route does not run
near electrically noisy devices.
3. Make sure that each terminal of the camera cables is properly
connected.
Communications through a Make sure that the communication conditions (standard,
4.
computer link cannot be speed, and parity check) in the personal computer conform to
established. those of the IV-S30J.
5. Make sure that a compatible model, the station No. and result
write start address have been set correctly.
6. Make sure that you waited about 15 seconds after you turned
ON the power.
Make sure that the operation screen is displayed on the
7.
screen.
1. Make sure that measurement can be started by using the key
pad to send a trigger signal.
2. Make sure that the camera cables have been correctly
connected.
Measurement does not start Make sure that the device to send a trigger signal have been
3.
even when a start trigger is properly connected to the input terminals on the IV-S30J main
given. housing.
4. Make sure that you waited about 15 seconds after you turned
ON the power.
Make sure that the operation screen is displayed on the
5.
screen.
1. Make sure that the camera cables have been correctly
connected.
2. Make sure that the devices have been properly connected to
Measurement results are not the input terminals on the IV-S30J main housing.
output. 3. Make sure that you waited about 15 seconds after you turned
ON the power.
4. Make sure that the operation screen is displayed on the
screen.
1. Make sure that the lighting equipment does not flicker.
2. Make sure that the lens has not fogged up.
3. Check the lens for contamination.
Measurement results are Make sure that the focus ring has not turned. (Make sure that
4.
unstable, or NG results occur the camera lock screw has been secured.)
frequently. 5. Check whether the camera position has changed.
6. Make sure that the illuminance monitor window has been set
to the intermediate illumination.
7. Make sure that the criteria have been set properly.

19

19-2
 Troubleshooting

[2] Causes of termination codes (when an error occurs) and remedies

When an abnormal termination code (other than 00(H)) is received, take the following measures.
Termi-
nation
Cause Remedy
code
(H)
01 The specified processing code does not exist. Check the processing code.
The wrong number of data items was specified
02 Check the number of data items in the text.
in the text.
03 The text data is outside the acceptable range. Check the text setting range.
Communication errors

- Check the check sums.

- Check the communication environment for
04 The results of the check sums are not identical.
problems such as electric noise, which may
come in on the communication line.
The header code (:) was not attached to the Check whether the header code was attached
05
head of the communication command. to the head of the communication command.
- Check the communication environment for
06 An asynchronous error has occurred. problems such as electric noise, which may
come in on the communication line.
The communication command contains an Check the number of data items in the
07
improper number of data items. communication command.
The error code is contained in the evaluation
An error response has been returned from the result area, and the error code is displayed on
Computer link errors

08 programmable controller. (Communications are the monitor. Take the proper measures
performed normally.) according to the error code (different models
use different codes).
- Make sure the power supply of the
programmable controller and check the
A time-out has occurred during communication
09 connections of the cables.
through the computer link.
- Check the communication conditions and
computer link settings.
Start address error (larger than the end
0A Check the address.
address)
10 SDRAM error
Replace the IV-S30J itself.
11 Flash memory error
Hardware errors

No camera connected to the camera 1

12
connector.
Connect a camera.
No camera connected to the camera 2
13
connector.
14 VRAM error has occurred.
18 Flash ROM delete error
Replace the IV-S30J itself.
19 Flash ROM write error
1A Flash ROM verify error
The measurement conditions for the specified
20
object type have not been set.
The setting area is larger than the screen, due
21
to positional correction.
Processing errors

Correction after binary conversion: The

22 illuminance monitor function (system) has not
been set.
Correction after binary conversion: The Check the abnormal setting.
23 threshold range has exceeded the specified
range.
24 No edge detection
25 A reference image has not been registered
26 Number of labels exceeds the specified amount
27 No setting for number o fimage lines
28 "0" subtraction error (numeric calculation
19

19-3
 Troubleshooting

Termi-
nation
code Cause Remedy
(H)
29 Overflow (numerical calculation)
2A No numerical calculation setting
2B No label (camera adjustment)
2C The search area is smaller than the reference image.
2D Equivalent label exceeded
2E Edge center point exceeded (lead inspection)
Unable to make a numerical calculation (point
2F measurement)
30 Coordinates range exceeded (distance/angle
measurement)
31 The lines are parallel (at the same angle) (cross point of
two straight lines)
Divide by "0" (center of circle, vertically bisector,
32 distance between point and line)
33 The two points are the same (two points on a straight
line)
34 The CCD trigger has not been registered.
The CCD trigger is not being sampled by a serial
35 interface signal.
36 The SIO trigger has not been set.
37 A start point has not been set. (Distance/angle
measurement)
38 The auxiliary point conditions are not thoroughly
specified. (Distance/angle measurement)
Processing errors

39 Wrong conditions specified for a line or a point (distance

/ angle measurement) Check the abnormal setting.
The distance conditions are not thoroughly specified.
3A
(Distance/angle measurement)
The angle conditions are not thoroughly specified.
3B (Distance/angle measurement)
3C Image reading/writing is impossible.
3D The range of calculations using two images has
exceeded the specified range.
The reference image cannot be registered from parallel
3E
input X6.
3F Exceeded the number of reference images registered
40 Image not captured (CCD trigger)
41 The reference image rotation condition does not match.
42 The reference image edge is not registered yet.
43 CCD trigger disabled (through image).
44 Not a manual measurement
45 Binary mask conditions not set yet
No position correction conditions
- You assigned a non-existing register number or
model number to the position correction conditions.
- An angle has not been assigned for rotation
46 correction (only X and Y correction values have
been assigned.)
- The rotation angle detection is set to "NO" for a 1-
point search, or this register number is used for the
angular correction in the rotation correction.
19 Number of objects to measure has not been set.
47
(BGA/CSP)
In a multiple detection, the number of the edges
48
exceeded the limit.
Unable to make a positional correction since there is no
49
edge.

19-4
 Troubleshooting

Termi-
nation
code Cause Remedy

(H)
4A No output data
Processing errors

Object type conditions not set yet (numerical

4B calculation)
Number of objects detected or number of labels is too
4C
small (numerical calculation)
4D Image capture mode does not match.
Cannot make two corrections in one step (same register
4E number)
4F Serial trigger disabled
50 The object type cannot be changed.
51 No corresponding block Check the abnormal setting
Communication errors

52 The output camera cannot be changed.

54 Image area is not appropriate
55 NG image not registered
56 Font not registered
57 Character strings not registered
58 Menu tables not registered
59 Area not registered (user menu)
5A Title not registered (user menu)
5B Initialization error (user menu)
5C Number of data exceed the limit (any setting)

19

19-5
 Troubleshooting

[3] Maintenance
Check the equipment for the following items.

(1) Operation check

- Change the measurement number on the MAIN OPS MENU, and change the monitor screen to the
freeze or through mode. Then, make sure that the image is normally displayed.

(2) Checks
- Check the illumination from the lighting equipment.
- Make sure that the monitor screen is in focus and that the aperture setting is proper.
- Check the cable insulation for breaks, and make sure that the cable connectors are not loose.
- Carefully wipe dust off the lens with a soft, dry cloth.
- If dust has landed on the CCD surfaces of this camera, wipe them with a clean cotton swab soaked
in isopropyl alcohol. Move the cotton swab lightly and slowly in one direction. Change cotton swabs
frequently. Do not clean more than one CCD surface with one cotton swab.

Procedure for checking after cleaning

1 Mount the lens (mirror tube) on this camera.
2 Close the lens iris all the way.
3 Point the lens toward the light source, and check the monitor screen to make sure that there are
no spots on the screen. (If the iris is open even a little, then even if spots exist, they will not be
visible on the monitor screen. Fine adjustments to the iris are required.)
CCD
section
A

Front view
(view A) of the CCD When an IV-S30C1 is used
(3) When measurement errors and/or evaluation errors occur frequently, check:
- The illumination of the lighting equipment and lamps.
- The inspection object is within the window.
- The cables for looseness or disconnection.
- The lens for dirt and dust.
- The lens focus and aperture have not changed.
- The power is being supplied normally, and
- The parameters you set have been stored.
(If the parameters have changed, reset the parameters from the beginning.)

19

19-6
 Alphabetical Index
[A]
Absolute value of the differences ..................................................................................................... 3-20
ALL-INIT (total initialization) ............................................................................................................. 2-22
AND (evaluation) .............................................................................................................................. 10-5
Angle detection (DTECT ANGL) ....................................................................................................... 4-12
Angular correction (standard/high precision) .................................................................................... 3-30
Area measurement by binary conversion ........................................................................................... 8-1
Artifact processing ............................................................................................................................ 3-15
Automatic setting (threshold value) .................................................................................................. 3-11
AUTO-REG (condition setting) ......................................................................................................... 3-15
Average light level method ............................................................................................................. 16-18

[B]
Binary area conditions ...................................................................................................................... 3-27
Binary image display .......................................................................................................................... 2-7
Binary image mask ........................................................................................................................... 3-25
Binary method ................................................................................................................................ 16-18
Binary processing (fixed/threshold value correction) ........................................................................ 3-12
BLK WRT COMMAND (block write command) .............................................................................. 16-22

[C]
Calibrating the IV-S30J ................................................................................................................... 16-28
Camera settings ............................................................................................................................... 2-17
CAMERA TYPE ................................................................................................................................ 2-17
Causes of termination codes (when an error occurs) and remedies ................................................ 19-3
CCD trigger ..................................................................................................................................... 16-18
Change camera display mode ............................................................................................................ 2-3
Change the Japanese or English display mode ............................................................................... 1-15
CHG-C1 (change camera 1) ............................................................................................................. 1-12
CHG-C2 (change camera 2) ............................................................................................................. 1-12
CHG-MEA (change measurement) .................................................................................................. 1-12
CHG-TYPE (change object type) ..................................................................................................... 1-12
CHNG-REG (change registration) .................................................................................................... 1-12
Circle window ..................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Common operations for each menu ................................................................................................. 1-14
Communication (general purpose serial interface) ........................................................................... 17-1
Communication format ..................................................................................................................... 17-5
Comparative calculations between images ...................................................................................... 3-20
Compatible models ........................................................................................................................... 18-1
Computer link output ...................................................................................................................... 16-23
Computer link setting ...................................................................................................................... 16-22
Computer link ................................................................................................................................... 18-1
Configuration of set wizard ................................................................................................................. 1-6
Configuration of the setting conditions ............................................................................................... 1-5 I
Connection with a Mitsubishi PC .................................................................................................... 18-26
Connection with a Sharp PC .......................................................................................................... 18-20

I-1
 Connection with an OMRON PC .................................................................................................... 18-29
Contents of the measurement result block (for each measurement function) .................................. 18-6
CONTR. PIXL (pixel contraction) ........................................................................................................ 4-7
Contrast magnification rate ............................................................................................................... 3-22
Contrast search (reference image) ................................................................................................... 3-16
Copying ............................................................................................................................................ 3-37
Crosshair cursor display .......................................................................................................... 2-12, 2-13

[D]
Data flow .................................................................................................................................. 17-3, 18-2
Data in specified blocks .................................................................................................................. 16-23
Data length ..................................................................................................................................... 18-19
Degree of match inspection ................................................................................................................ 5-1
Description of the operation screen .................................................................................................. 1-10
Detection precision ............................................................................................................................. 3-9
DISPLAY MODE ............................................................................................................................... 1-15
Distance and angle measurement .................................................................................................... 13-1

[E]
Edge detection condition .................................................................................................................... 4-7
Edge detection .................................................................................................................................. 3-14
Edge emphasis ................................................................................................................................. 3-23
Edge extraction ................................................................................................................................. 3-23
Editing operation screen ................................................................................................................... 2-21
Eliminating binary noise ............................................................................................... 3-13, 7-6, 8-6, 9-7
Elliptical window ................................................................................................................................. 3-7
Evaluation change display ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Evaluation conditions ........................................................................................................................ 3-17
Evaluation condition measurement
- Area measurement by binary conversion ......................................................................................... 7-6
Degree of match inspection .............................................................................................................. 5-8
Lead inspection ................................................................................................................................ 6-4
Multiple degree of match inspection ............................................................................................... 12-7
Multiple positional measurement .................................................................................................... 11-9
Object counting by binary conversion ............................................................................................... 8-7
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion ........................................................................ 9-8
Point measurements ....................................................................................................................... 10-7
- Positional deviation measurement ................................................................................................... 4-9
Examples of a final output conditions ladder circuit ........................................................................ 15-17
Existence inspection by point measurement .................................................................................... 10-1
Expansion/contraction method of elimination noise in binary images .............................................. 3-13
Extension functions .......................................................................................................................... 2-12
External synchronization .................................................................................................................. 2-19

[F]
Final numerical calculations ............................................................................................................. 14-9
I Final output conditions .................................................................................................................... 15-11
Flow chart ....................................................................................................................................... 18-32
Full .................................................................................................................................................... 2-18

I-2
Full+half ............................................................................................................................................ 2-18

[G]
Gain/offset adjustment ...................................................................................................................... 2-15
General purpose serial output ........................................................................................................ 16-21
Gray level change ............................................................................................................................. 3-22
Gray scale processing ........................................................................................................................ 3-9
Gray scale search
- Degree of match inspection .............................................................................................................. 5-3
Multiple positional measurements .................................................................................................. 11-3
- Positional deviation measurements .................................................................................................. 4-4

[H]
Half ................................................................................................................................................... 2-18
Halt on NG measurement ................................................................................................................. 3-38
Histogram widening .......................................................................................................................... 3-22
Horizontal edge ................................................................................................................................ 3-23
Horizontal line ..................................................................................................................................... 3-6
How to display NG images ............................................................................................................... 1-19
How to enter the setting screen .......................................................................................................... 3-1

[I]
Illuminance (light level) monitor ........................................................................................................ 3-34
Image adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 3-24
Image capture ..................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Image pre-processing ....................................................................................................................... 3-19
Image settings .................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Individual numerical calculations for each measuring program ........................................................ 14-1
Initialization ..................................................................................................................... 2-22, 17-2, 17-4
Input & output / system settings ....................................................................................................... 3-34
Interface .......................................................................................................................................... 18-19
Internal synchronization .................................................................................................................... 2-19

[L]
Ladder circuit program creation ........................................................................................................ 15-3
Lead Inspection .................................................................................................................................. 6-1
List of processing functions .............................................................................................................. 17-1
LOCK (menu display) ....................................................................................................................... 1-15
Lock the menu display ...................................................................................................................... 1-15

[M]
MAIN OPS MENU ............................................................................................................................ 1-15
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 19-6
MANL-MEAS (manual measurement) ..................................................................................... 1-12, 2-13
Manually setting the object type ....................................................................................................... 2-14
Mask setting ................................................................................................................ 3-26, 7-6, 8-6, 9-7
Measurement conditions I
- Area measurement by binary conversion ......................................................................................... 7-2
Degree of match inspection .............................................................................................................. 5-2

I-3
 Distance and angle measurement .................................................................................................. 11-2
Lead inspection ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
Multiple degree of match inspection ............................................................................................... 12-2
Multiple position measurement ....................................................................................................... 11-2
Object counting by binary conversion ............................................................................................... 8-2
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion ........................................................................ 9-2
Point measurements ....................................................................................................................... 10-2
- Positional deviation measurement ................................................................................................... 4-2
MEA-CND (measurement conditions) ................................................................................................ 1-5
Measurement data blocks ................................................................................................................ 18-5
Measurement processing cycle ........................................................................................................ 15-2
Measurement start input and result output settings .......................................................................... 16-5
Measurement start input interface ........................................................................................... 16-1, 16-4
Measurement start input ................................................................................................................... 16-4
Menu bar ................................................................................................................................. 1-11, 1-12
Menu configuration ............................................................................................................................. 1-4
Message display ................................................................................................................................. 2-5
Method for selecting the menu configuration ...................................................................................... 1-2
Mid emphasis ................................................................................................................................... 3-22
Monitor output ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Multiple degree of match inspection ................................................................................................. 12-1
Multiple positional measurements .................................................................................................... 11-1

[N]
NEXT-NG (display next NG image) .................................................................................................. 1-22
NG image display screen ................................................................................................................. 1-19
NG image display .................................................................................................................... 1-19 to 23
Number of blocks .............................................................................................................................. 18-5
Numeric calculation
- Area measurement by binary conversion ................................................................................ 7-8, 14-6
Degree of match inspection ..................................................................................................... 5-9, 14-5
Distance and angle measurement ......................................................................................... 13-8, 14-8
Lead inspection ....................................................................................................................... 6-8, 14-5
Multiple degree of match inspection ...................................................................................... 12-8, 14-7
Multiple position measurement ............................................................................................ 11-10, 14-7
Object counting by binary conversion ...................................................................................... 8-8, 14-6
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion ............................................................... 9-9, 14-6
Point measurements .............................................................................................................. 10-8, 14-7
- Positional deviation measurement ........................................................................................ 4-10, 14-2
Numerical calculation conditions ...................................................................................................... 14-1
Numerical calculations (setting examples) ....................................................................................... 14-2
Numerical calculations ...................................................................................................................... 14-1

[O]
Object counting by binary conversion ................................................................................................. 8-1
Object identification and numbering function (labeling) .................................................................... 3-11
I Object Identification by binary conversion .......................................................................................... 9-1
Operation cycle ................................................................................................................................. 15-1
Operation flow after the measurement start input is turned ON. ...................................................... 1-26

I-4
Operation flow .................................................................................................................................. 1-24
Operation main display ....................................................................................................................... 2-9
Operation screen .............................................................................................................................. 1-10
Operation set menu ............................................................................................................................ 2-1
Operations menu lock ....................................................................................................................... 1-15
Operations to return to the operation screen .................................................................................... 1-14
Operation settings
- Area measurement by binary conversion ......................................................................................... 7-2
Degree of match inspection .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Distance and angle measurement .................................................................................................. 13-2
Lead inspection ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
Multiple degree of match inspection ............................................................................................... 12-2
Multiple positional measurements .................................................................................................. 11-2
Object counting by binary conversion ............................................................................................... 8-2
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion ........................................................................ 9-2
Point measurements ....................................................................................................................... 10-2
- Positional deviation measurement ................................................................................................... 4-2
Option ............................................................................................................................................... 2-22
OR (evaluation) ................................................................................................................................ 10-5
Output conditions
- Area measurement by binary conversion ................................................................................ 7-8, 15-9
Degree of match inspection ..................................................................................................... 5-9, 15-9
Distance and angle measurement ....................................................................................... 13-8, 15-10
Lead inspection ....................................................................................................................... 6-8, 15-9
Multiple degree of match inspection .................................................................................... 12-8, 15-10
Multiple positional measurements ..................................................................................... 11-10, 15-10
Object counting by binary conversion .................................................................................... 8-8, 15-10
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion ............................................................. 9-9, 15-10
Point measurements ............................................................................................................ 10-8, 15-10
- Positional deviation measurement ........................................................................................ 4-10, 15-4
Output block assignment ................................................................................................................ 16-23
Output code ......................................................................................................................... 17-16, 18-17
Output conditions .............................................................................................................................. 15-3
Output monitor .................................................................................................................................... 2-1

[P]
Parallel input X5 ............................................................................................................................... 16-2
Parallel input X6 ............................................................................................................................... 16-3
Parity check .................................................................................................................................... 16-21
Pattern display .................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Pattern settings ................................................................................................................................... 3-4
PC Function ...................................................................................................................................... 15-1
PC monitor screen ................................................................................................................. 2-11, 15-18
PC scan cycle ................................................................................................................................... 15-2
Pixel contraction ................................................................................................................................. 3-9
Point condition .................................................................................................................................. 10-4
Point measurement .......................................................................................................................... 10-1 I
Polygonal window ............................................................................................................................... 3-8
Position correction ............................................................................................................................ 3-30

I-5
 Positional deviation measurement ...................................................................................................... 4-1
Power ON and main loop processing ............................................................................................... 1-24
Power ON setting menu ................................................................................................................... 1-15
Pre-processing ................................................................................................................................. 3-19
Processing functions ........................................................................................................................ 17-7
Program examples (shape and positional deviation inspection) .................................................... 15-16
Program examples ......................................................................................................................... 18-31

[R]
RAM initialization .............................................................................................................................. 2-22
Reading result ......................................................................................................................... 17-1, 17-9
READY'ON (I/O conditions) .............................................................................................................. 16-3
Rectangular window ........................................................................................................................... 3-4
RE-EXAM-NG (re-examine NG) ....................................................................................................... 1-22
Reference image ................................................................................................................................ 4-5
Register coordinate position (window group move) .......................................................................... 3-39
Register a reference image ................................................................................................................ 4-6
Register setting ................................................................................................................................. 18-3
Remote keypad (IV-S30RK1) ........................................................................................................... 1-16
Remote keypad specifications .......................................................................................................... 1-16
Reset ................................................................................................................................................ 17-2
RESET (condition settings) .............................................................................................................. 3-15
Result output .................................................................................................................................... 16-5
Reference image (masking) ............................................................................................................. 3-17

[S]
SAVE ................................................................................................................................................ 1-12
Saving data ....................................................................................................................................... 1-14
Select "ANY" for the serial output ................................................................................................... 16-26
Select "YES" or "NO" for output data.............................................................................................. 16-27
SELECT CAMERA ........................................................................................................................... 2-17
Select output ..................................................................................................................................... 14-3
Self-diagnosis ................................................................................................................................... 2-22
Serial output ........................................................................................................................ 16-23, 16-26
Set serial block ............................................................................................................................... 16-25
Set wizard ........................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Setting (operating) procedure ......................................................................................................... 16-24
Setting and operating outline .............................................................................................................. 1-1
Setting and operating procedures ...................................................................................................... 1-1
Setting any data output ................................................................................................................... 16-26
Setting distance and angle condition ................................................................................................ 13-2
Setting examples ............................................................................................................................ 14-11
Setting for serial communications ................................................................................................... 16-21
Setting items for the IV-S30J .......................................................................................................... 18-19
Setting measurement conditions ........................................................................................................ 3-1
Setting numerical data of any output measuring ............................................................................ 17-16
I Setting reference image area ...................................................................................................... 4-4 to 5
Setting the conditions for each object type ......................................................................................... 3-1
Setting the data output ................................................................................................................... 16-26

I-6
Setting the input/output conditions ................................................................................................... 16-1
Setting the measurement programs ................................................................................................. 1-13
Setting the operating and system conditions ...................................................................................... 2-1
Setting the operating conditions ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Setting the shutter speed .................................................................................................................. 3-36
Setting the system conditions ........................................................................................................... 2-14
Setting window boundaries ............................................................................................................... 3-11
Shading correction ............................................................................................................................ 3-24
Shutter speed ................................................................................................................................... 3-37
Smoothing (median, average) .......................................................................................................... 3-23
Space filter ........................................................................................................................................ 3-23
Specifications for any output data .................................................................................................. 18-16
Station No. ...................................................................................................................................... 16-22
STROBE OUT (strobe output) .......................................................................................................... 16-3
Subtraction ....................................................................................................................................... 3-24
Symptoms and checks ..................................................................................................................... 19-1
SYS-CND (system conditions) ........................................................................................................... 1-5

[T]
Table of controller functions ............................................................................................................. 1-29
Termination code .............................................................................................................................. 19-3
Threshold value automatic setting (edge detection) ......................................................................... 3-15
Threshold value automatic setting (gray scale search) .................................................................... 3-10
Threshold value correction ............................................................................................................... 3-12
Threshold value setting .................................................................................................................... 3-10
Through display ................................................................................................................................ 2-11
Title registration ................................................................................................................................ 3-33
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 19-1

[V]
Variation difference ........................................................................................................................... 3-12
Variation rate .................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Vertical edge ..................................................................................................................................... 3-23
Vertical line ......................................................................................................................................... 3-6

[W]
Window group move ......................................................................................................................... 3-39
Window shape selection and settings ................................................................................................ 3-4
Write address ................................................................................................................................. 16-22

[X]
XY correction .................................................................................................................................... 3-30

[γ]
γ (positive/negative) .......................................................................................................................... 3-22

[θ] I
θ angle correction image display ........................................................................................................ 2-8

I-7